Brack,  Antoine  Fortune  De,  1789-1850 
Pocket  manual  for  cavalrymen 


Pocket  Manual 

for 

Cavalrymen 


Issued  for 

Officers  and  Non-Commissioned  Officers 
of  the 

52nd.  Cavalry  Brigade, 
Pennsylvania  National  Guard 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


https://archive.org/details/pocketmanualforc02brac 


POCKET  MANUAL 

/I 

FOR 

CAVALRYMEN 


Extracts  from  a book  by  F.  de  Brack, 
Colonel  of  Cavalry  under  Napoleon 


Printed  June  1,  1922  for  the  52nd.  Cavalry 
Brigade,  Pennsylvania  National  Guard 


PRESS  OF 

THE  TELEGRAPH  PRINTING  CO. 

Harrisburg.  Pa. 


357. 18 
£797/° 


“General  Steingel,  an  Alsatian,  was  an  excellent  hussar  of- 
ficer; he  had  served  under  Dumouriez  In  the  northern  campaigns, 
and  was  a clever,  intelligent  and  extremely  vigilant  man.  To  all 
the  characteristics  of  youth  he  joined  those  of  mature  years;  he 
was  an  ideal  outpost  general.  Two  or  three  days  before  his  death 
he  was  the  first  one  to  enter  Lezegno;  the  French  general  who  ar- 
rived a few  hours  later  found  that  all  his  wants  had  been  antici- 
pated and  everything  prepared  for  his  future  operations. 

"The  fords  and  defiles  had  been  reoonnoitered,  guides  employed, 
the  cure  and  postmaster  interrogated,  friendly  relations  established 
with  the  inhabitants,  spies  sent  out  in  various  directions,  the 
letters  in  the  post-office  seized,  and  all  those  containing  military 
information  had  been  translated  and  abstracts  of  their  contents 
made,  and  all  necessary  measures  taken  to  establish  magazines  of 
supplies  for  the  subsistence  of  the  army” — Napoleon. 


' • - i ■ • : • ' r 

-iy;  i.  . . v . i 

’ . 

- W?  i,!,  i .1  . '■  : 'i 

i:  r 1 '■  ; . 

- ' - ■ . » • . ■ : 

Ik.  : . •.  k . . ■ , , 

: ’ :■  - . ' 

t j t 

....  . . cub 

. wsi  c 

.r  . i;  L'  — " .•  • . • . ■ 


c ..  ji  •'<  mR 

; . . '• 

■ 

....  . r 

" 


FOREWORD 

The  scientific  discoveries  and  mechanical  Inventions  of  th© 
past  century  have  made  such  vast  changes  in  the  implements  and 
mechanisms  of  war,  that  a treatise  written  from  experience  ob- 
tained in  the  Napoleonic  wars  seems  archaic  in  its  allusions  to 
arms  and  the  methods  of  their  employment.  But  the  fundamental 
principles  of  cavalry  outpost  duty  are  so  unchanging  that  De 
Brack’s  manual  still  remains  the  primary  source  from  which  all 
later  writers  upon  the  subject  have,  directly  or  indirectly,  derived 
their  inspiration. 

A compilation  of  the  more  important  passages  of  enduring 
value  from  this  cavalry  classic  will  interest  the  enthusiasm  of 
officers  of  all  branches  of  the  military  service;  and  will  be  very 
useful  for  instructional  purposes  in  the  mounted  branches.  In 
making  available  the  permanently  useful  portions  of  DeBrack's 
too  little  known  and  not  generally  accessible  work  a very  im- 
portant service  is  being  performed. 

John  P.  Wood, 

Brigadier-General,  Cavalry,  P.N.G. 


PREFACE 


The  book  from  which  these  extracts  are  taken,  was  written  by 
one  of  the  most  brilliant  Cavalry  officers  of  the  French  Empire, 
and  is  founded  upon  the  actual  experience  of  a distinguished 
cavalry  officer  who  fought  through  eight  campaigns  under  the 
generals  of  Napoleon. 

Written  in  1831,  after  an  absence  of  15  years  from  the  service, 
Lieutenant  Colonel  F.  DeBrack,  in  command  of  the  Eight  Hussars, 
wished  to  prepare  his  officers  and  men  for  the  war  which  it  was 
believed  was  impending.  He  felt  that  the  service  had  been  sur- 
feited with  theories  at  the  expense  of  practical  instruction,  and 
his  book  is  a mine  of  knowledge  and  inspiration  to  veterans  and 
young  officers  alike. 

The  demands  of  economy  prevent  republication  of  the  book  in  its 
entirety.  Efforts  to  secure  additional  copies  have  failed.  Much  of 
the  text  is  inapplicable  to  modern  units  by  virtue  of  dissimilarity 
of  small  arms,  uniforms,  etc  But  the  principles  enunciated  in 
DeBrack’s  book,  and  the  spirited  style,  make  it  an  extremely 
valuable  pocket  manual  for  the  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers  of  every  cavalry  regiment,  no  matter  what  the  nationality 
or  period  of  existence. 

By  authority  of  John  P.  Wood,  Brigadier-General  of  Cavalry, 
Pennsylvania  National  Guard,  Commanding  the  52nd  Cavalry 
Brigade,  and  through  the  assistance  of  Adjutant  General  Frank  D. 
Beary,  State  of  Pennsylvania,  this  booklet  is  published  for  the 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  brigade. 

Edward  J.  Stackpole,  Jr., 

Colonel  104th  Cavalry, 

Penna.  National  Guard. 


v;-.  . . ■'  -r  . . ! 

_V.:  ■ . "5  T -I  •'’>«  ' 

: -J*  - 

ViV:  V ■/  ' V-.-  . • v 

- ...  . ' ' 

. e.  ,i  , c i ' 

■ : ■ *.  •..  . fa  iT, ..  ..  .1--.'.  :•  -•  "i 

Vo  rfouSfT  * . i ...  ' ■ 5 • ! »W3 

tf  -.  ' ‘ ’ is-  ' i •'  *•  tx»i  = 

y)e  .-•.i-.s  r.i;  i1  ■■ 

— . - .no:  -.  -!  ' ’ I - . •>'  : •' 

yV  V-.  . ■ a.  er1  • 

' 

- 

j 1 i#  ' i 

L !V;-.  : ■ 


INTRODUCTION 

(de  Brack) 


One  must  be  born  a light-cavalryman.  No  other  position  requires 
so  much  natural  aptitude,  such  innate  genius  for  war,  as  that  of 
an  officer  of  that  arm.  The  qualities  which  make  the  superior  man 
— intelligence,  will,  force — should  be  found  united  in  him.  on- 
stantly  left  dependent  on  himself,  exposed  to  frequent  combats, 
responsible  not  only  for  his  own  command,  but  as  well  for  that 
which  he  protects  and  guards,  the  employment  of  his  physical 
and  moral  powers  is  continuous.  The  profession  which  he  prac- 
tices is  a rude  one,  but  the  opportunities  of  distinguishing  him- 
self are  presented  daily — glorious  compensation  which  the  more 
richly  rewards  his  labors  by  enabling  his  true  (worth  to  become 
the  sooner  known. 

I have  often  mentioned  to  you  General  Curely,  lieutenant  with 
me  in  1807;  he  became  a general  in  1813.  But  in  1806,  while  twenty 
leagues  in  advance  of  our  army,  and  at  the  head  of  twenty  men  of 
the  Seventh  Hussars,  he  struck  terror  into  Leipsic,  where  3000 
Prussians  were  stationed.  In  1809,  while  fifteen  leagues  in  advance 
of  the  division  to  which  he  belonged,  and  at  the  head  of  100  men 
of  the  Seventh  Chasseurs  and  Ninth  Hussars,  he  passed  unper- 
ceived through  the  Austro-ltalian  army,  which  it  was  his  object  to 
reconnoitre,  and  penetrated  as  far  as  the  headquarters  of  the 
Archduke,  the  general-in-chief. 

In  1812,  at  Pultusk,  with  100  men  of  the  Twentieth  Chasseurs 
he  captured  from  the  enemy  twenty-four  pieces  of  artillery,  and 
took  the  general-in-chief  of  the  Russian  army  a prisoner. 

* * 

To  be  a good  officer  of  the  advanced-guard  it  is  not  enough  to 
be  brave  and  to  command  well  under  fire;  one  must  bring  to  the 
place  of  action  the  greatest  number  of  men  and  have  them  in  the 
best  condition  for  exerting  the  greatest  power.  This  second  part  of 
our  instruction,  indispensable  as  it  is,  though  not  the  most  brilli- 
ant, is  undoubtedly  the  most  important.  It  is  dependent  upon  a 
number  of  things,  and  cannot  be  learned  in  garrison. 

A habit  of  judging  the  health  of  men  and  horses,  an  acquaint- 
ance with  the  ready  remedies  applicable  in  certain  cases,  a daily 
and  scrupulous  inspection  of  the  trappings,  knowledge  of  the 
repairs  that  should  be  made,  inspection  of  the  equipments  and 
of  the  repairs  which  they  need,  supplying  all  that  may  be  useful 
to  man  and  beast  without  overloading  the  horses,  packing  well 
understood,  regularity  of  gaits  in  the  columns  on  the  march, 
good  position  of  the  bivouacs,  continuous  watchfulness  in  them 
of  all  that  may  affect  the  health  of  the  horses,  indication  of  the 
means  of  temporarily  dispensing  with  the  farrier,  instructions 
for  the  employment  of  the  instruments  contained  in  the  surgical 
case,  the  art  of  eating  and  sleeping  seasonably,  study  of  the 
character  of  the  men  under  our  orders,  the  maintenance  of  a 
discipline  which  will  prevent  the  troopers  arguing  when  they 
have  no  longer  the  guardhouse  or  prison  to  fear,  a constant 
superintendence  which  will  prevent  the  useless  (waste  of  the 
horses’  strength,  to  set  a personal  example  in  every  situation — 
all  the  more  carefully  as  the  conditions  become  more  toilsome 
and  difficult — to  inspire  the  troops  with  entire  confidence,  de- 
votion, and  enthusiasm — those  are  what  the  theoretical  instruc- 
tions of  peaceful  times  do  not  teach;  those  are  what,  joined  to 
courage,  the  military  coup  d’oeil  to  promptness  of  judgment  on 
the  field  of  battle,  make  the  truly  distinguished  officer. 


9 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


It  is  to  prepare  you  tor  the  practical  knowledge  of  outpost 
duty  that  I have  recorded  for  you  these  recollections — this  species 
of  manual  that  I offer  you;  which  I have  preceded  by  these  re- 
flections, forming,  in  a manner,  their  preface. 

* * 

Study  is  the  arsenal  from  which  you  will  draw  your  arms  for 
the  day  of  action.  To  study  carefully  assists  us  to  think  and 
act  quickly,  and  to  do  this  is  the  secret  of  success  as  a model 
officer.  Nowhere  so  much  as  in  the  light  cavalry  does  one 
recognize  the  complete  application  of  this  saying  of  a distinguished 
officer:  “PROMPTITUDE  IS  GENIUS.” 

• • 

In  the  matter  of  instruction  one  is  rich  on  the  day  of  appli- 
cation only  when  he  has  an  excess  of  it.  When  this  great  day 
has  arrived  it  is  too  late  to  learn;  it  is  time  to  choose  the  best 
and  forget  the  useless.  Moreover,  war  presents  so  many  varying 
opportunities,  becomes  so  complicated  by  different  situations, 
that  the  reserve  of  our  knowledge  may  also  find  its  unexpected 
application,  and  if  this  application  can  be  made  only  once  in 
our  lifetime  it  repays  a year  of  labor. 


10 


THE  CAVALRYMANS  HAND-BOOK 


THE  DUTIES  OF  LIGHT  CAVALRY 

Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  light  cavalry  in  campaign? 

A.  To  clear  the  way  for  the  army  and  protect  its  maroh. 

Q.  How  does  it  accomplish  this  object? 

A.  By  preceding  our  columns,  scouting  their  flanks,  surrounding 
them  and  concealing  them  with  a bold  and  vigilant  curtain;  fol- 
lowing the  enemy  step  by  step,  harassing  and  annoying  him,  dis- 
covering his  designs,  exhausting  his  forces  in  detail,  destroying 
his  magazines,  capturing  his  convoys,  and,  finally,  forcing  him 
to  expend  in  defensive  operations  the  strength  from  which  he 
might  otherwise  have  reaped  the  greatest  advantage. 

THE  CHIEF  IN  CAMPAIGN.  THE  OFFICER 

0-  What  is  the  meaning  of  chief?  (As  used  in  this  book, 
“chief”  applies  to  a cavalry  sergeant  as  well  as  to  a general 
officer,  whenever  the  responsibility  of  command  is  assumed.) 

A.  Head.  Example. 

Q.  What  are  the  first  qualities  required  in  a commander  of 
light  cavalry  on  the  day  of  battle? 

A.  1.  Clear  perception,  and  cool,  mathematical  estimation 
of  his  own  strength  and  that  of  the  enemy. 

2.  The  sure  and  rapid  glance  which  recognizes  and  compre- 
hends the  frame  of  mind  of  the  force  which  he  commands,  as 
well  as  that  of  the  one  he  attacks. 

3.  The  glance  with  which,  from  whatever  side  he  approaches 
the  field,  he  takes  it  in  as  a whole,  and  in  its  minutest  details 
as  to  distances,  accidents,  possibilities  and  Impossibilities  for  at- 
tack, defence  or  retreat. 

4.  Quickness  of  decision  and  action. 

5.  The  dash  which  oarries  everything  before  it. 

6.  The  firmness  which  despairs  of  nothing  and  retrieves  the 
most  desperate  situation. 

7.  The  calmness  which  never  changes  countenance,  and  causes 
his  subordinates  to  see  only  with  his  eyes.  Add  to  these  quali- 
ties the  courage  which  sets  the  example,  the  justice  which  re- 
wards fully,  and  you  have  the  model  commander  who,  under  all 
circumstances,  holds  in  hand  a hundred  squadrons  as  one,  leads 
them  on,  stops  them  as  a single  man,  wins  or  snatches  victory, 
overawes  her  as  though  she  were  a mistress.  This  combination 
of  qualities  is  called  first  NAPOLEON,  then  FREDERICK,  MAS- 
SENA,  SOULT,  NEY,  KLEBER  DESSAIX,  HOCHE,  LANNES, 
MORAND,  LASALLE. 

The  face  of  a chief  is  often  consulted;  he  should  never  forget 
that,  and  should  allow  it  to  be  read  only  when  he  especially 
desires  it  to  be  read. 

Thus  at  the  time  of  an  expedition  of  which  he  alone  possesses 
the  secret,  if  it  is  necessary  that  the  men  should  not  discover 
this  secret  until  the  arrival  of  the  proper  time,  the  calmness  of 
their  chief  should  prevent  any  feeling  of  uneasiness  entering 
their  ranks. 

Q.  Where  is  the  position  of  the  chief  in  a fight? 

A.  Always  at  the  place  of  command. 

Q.  But  suppose  there  are  several  such  positions? 

A.  There  can  be  but  one  for  the  experienced  chief;  thus, 
for  example,  when  the  chief  upon  the  battle-field  commands  sev- 
eral squadrons  in  echelon,  which  he  is  going  to  launch  succes- 


11 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


sively,  he  ought  to  restrain  his  ardor  and  not  put  himself  at 
the  head  of  '.he  first,  except  under  peculiar  circumstances;  it 
is  better  to  launch  the  first  and  take  the  head  of  the  second; 
in  this  manner  he  can  comprehend  at  a glance  the  whole  affair; 
he  keeps  in  hand  all  his  force,  which  he  can  readily  advance  in 
case  of  success,  or  use  as  a reserve  in  the  event  of  a repulse. 

If,  under  certain  circumstances,  he  believes  he  ought  to  march 
at  the  head  of  the  leading  squadron,  he  should  do  so  only  after 
having  given  to  the  other  squadron  commanders  orders  so  precise 
that  it  will  be  impossible  for  any  doubt  to  arise  during  the 
onset,  no  matter  what  may  happen,  and  as  soon  as  possible  he 
ought  to  return  to  the  squadrons  he  has  left. 

* * 

If  a detachment  of  another  regiment,  cavalry  or  infantry,  joins 
his,  the  chief  should  go  to  meet  it  and  give  it  in  the  presence 
of  his  own  command  some  marks  of  his  esteem.  The  example 
will  be  quickly  followed,  and  the  detachment  will  soon  become 
a part  of  the  family. 

During  the  campaign  of  1809,  a battalion  of  the  Seventh 
Light  Infantry  was  ordered  on  detached  service  with  the  Seventh 
Hussars,  to  which  I belonged;  the  infantry  was  received  with 
open  arms  by  our  hussars. 

The  two  regiments  conceived  for  each  other  so  warm  a friend- 
ship, that  afterwards,  saying  seven  and  seven  make  fourteen,  the 
hussars  responded  to  the  challenge;  “Who  goes  there?”  “The 
Fourteenth  Hussars”,  and  the  infantry  “The  Fourteenth  Light 
Infantry.” 

An  opportunity  of  proving  this  friendship  was  soon  found,  for 
we  were  attacked  at  a distance  of  a few  leagues  from  Ratisbon 
by  a very  superior  force,  and  would  have  been  obliged  to  yield 
had  it  not  been  for  the  mutual  dash  and  devotion  which  it 
inspired. 

Some  chiefs  who  have  received  the  order  to  go  into  bivouao 
neglect  to  do  so  at  once,  and  while  they  thus  needlessly  consume 
time  and  the  strength  of  their  horses,  other  regiments  dismount, 
install  themselves,  and  monopolize  the  forage  and  provisions: 
this  is  a glaring  fault  on  the  part  of  the  chief  of  the  regi- 
ment deprived  of  its  rights,  and  one  which  has  great  influence 
upon  the  minds  of  the  men. 

The  officer  of  experience  in  active  service  possesses  a foresight 
which  enables  him  to  determine  perfectly  in  advance,  the 
halting-place  for  his  division,  his  brigade,  and  the  bivouac  which 
his  regiment  or  detachment  will  occupy.  To  install  himself 
quickly  or  slowly,  to  place  himself  a hundred  paces  to  the  right 
or  left,  near  to  or  distant  from  a wood,  from  a stream,  and  above 
all  a village,  is  not  a matter  of  indifference.  Upon  this  choice, 
in  the  end,  will  depend  the  efficiency  of  the  regiment.  Given 

two  chiefs  of  equal  merit  in  other  respects,  of  whom  one  shall 
select  good  bivouacs  and  the  other  poor  ones,  at  the  end  of 
the  campaign  the  first  will  find  under  his  orders  a strong  force 
in  good  condition,  while  the  second  will  be  followed  no  longer 
except  by  a few  broken-down  horses. 

Let  the  officer  prepare  and  instruct  himself  if  he  desires  to 
succeed;  let  him  employ  every  moment  in  studying  his  profession 
in  its  smallest  details;  let  him  learn  all  that  a trooper  has  to 
do;  in  garrison,  let  his  colonel  assure  himself  that  he  knows 
how  to  groom  a horse,  to  clean  his  arms  and  equipment;  one 
cannot  intelligently  order  what  he  is  ignorant  of  himself. 

* * 

If  he  enjoys  the  advantage  of  being  stationed  in  a garrison 
with  troops  of  other  arms,  let  him,  in  his  spare  moments  run 
to  the  arsenals;  to  the  works  in  course  of  construction  by  the 


12 


CLO  THIN  G—E  Q UIPMEN  T 


engineers;  to  the  ordnance  yards  of  the  artillery;  to  the  drill- 
ground  of  the  infantry;  there  only  will  he  learn  the  relations 
of  the  different  arms  to  one  another;  will  estimate  the  diffi- 
culties and  possibilities  of  attack  and  defence  by  studying  the 
rapidity  of  formations,  distances,  firing,  etc.  And  if  upon  the 
frontier  or  during  an  armistice  he-  finds  strange  bivouacs,  bar- 
racks and  drill-grounds,  let  his  military  coup  d'oeil  retain 
faithfully  the  improvements  which  he  recognizes  among  them, 
and  with  which  he  may  enrich  his  own  service  on  his  return. 

Finally,  let  the  officer  remember  that  FACILITY  IN  ACQUIR- 
ING KNOWLEDGE  IS  A POWER,  AND  THAT  IN  SPITE  OF 
EVERYTHING,  POWER  ALWAYS  TRIUMPHS. 


CLOTHING.  EQUIPMENT 

In  war  one  very  quickly  perceives  the  inconvenience  of  the 
garments  which  in  garrison  were  required  to  fit  so  snugly,  of 
the  Doots  which  were  ordered  made  so  tight.  When,  in  bivouac, 
the  cramped  limbs  can  find  no  repose;  when  the  boots,  dried 
by  the  fire,  shrink  still  more  upon  feet  already  swollen  by  fati- 
gue, when  their  thin  soles  have  broken  through  and  refuse 

further  service — one  would  give  a great  deal  to  be  able  to  ex- 
change his  natty  costume  for  a comfortable  jacket  and  a pair 
of  large,  easy-fitting  boots;  but  the  time  for  that  has  passed; 
the  campaign  must  be  made  under  the  most  fatiguing  conditions, 
and  the  officer  will  be  doomed  to  see  his  elegant  apparel  reduced 
to  rags,  as  its  tightness  will  make  it  tear  everywhere,  and  in 
such  a manner  that  it  cannot  be  repaired. 

It  is  then  that  one  discovers  the  usefulness  of  the  housewife 
— so  despised  and  so  entirely  neglected  in  time  of  peace.  He 
who  has  neither  thread,  needles,  wax,  buttons,  scissors,  nor 

knife,  will  have  to  depend  upon  borrowing;  but  lenders  are  few. 
because  those  who  possess  such  articles  are  the  provident,  and 
the  foresight  which  induced  them  to  provide  themselves  with 
these  necessaries  will  make  them  keep  them  for  their  own  use. 

Young  officers,  listen  to  this  advice,  based  upon  my  own  ex- 
perience: never  carry  a large  portmanteau,  for  it  will  prove  to 

be  only  a hindrance. 

An  officer,  no  matter  what  may  be  his  grade,  needs  no  more 
baggage  than  a trooper  requires. 

Two  jackets,  two  pairs  of  cloth  trousers,  three  or  four  shirts, 
and  two  pairs  of  boots  should  fully  suffice  for  a campaign  of 

eighteen  months.  They  should  all  be  new,  of  good  quality,  and 

fit  comfortably.  A housewife,  supplied  with  thread,  buttons, 
needles,  etc.,  should  accompany  them  and  always  be  ready  for 
use  in  repairing  the  slightest  rent  as  soon  as  it  appears.  By 
taking  these  precautions  you  will  save  yourself  a world  of  pri- 
vations and  annoyances,  which  might  degenerate  Into  actual  mis- 
fortune, and  have  a greater  influence  than  you  can  foresee  upon 
your  military  career. 

In  war  certain  articles  are  used  up  more  rapidly  than  others; 
among  these  are  boots.  Supply  yourself  with  those  having  thick 
soles,  studded  with  small  nails  and  let  them  be  wide  and  at  least 
of  an  inch  longer  than  your  foot. 

In  war  only  the  useful  and  durable  are  the  elegant. 

All  leather  articles  which  in  peace  are  iwaxed,  in  war  should 
be  greased.  In  doing  this  there  are  several  advantages:  first, 

the  multitude  of  brushes,  embarrassing  on  account  of  their  num- 
ber, volume  and  weight,  may  be  dispensed  with;  second,  the 
life  of  the  leather  will  be  prolonged;  third,  the  leather  will  be 
less  liable  to  injury  by  moisture. 

When  leather  gets  wet  beware  of  drying  it  quickly  at  a fire. 


13 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


An  officer  should  wear  next  to  his  skin  a belt  of  soft  leather 
or  strong  linen,  in  which  to  put  a few  pieces  of  gold  coin.  That 
is  his  purse.  There  would  be  no  harm  in  his  sewing  a few 
of  these  pieces  between  the  cloth  and  the  lining  of  one  of  his 
oldest  jackets.  In  his  trouser  pockets  he  should  put  a memoran- 
dum book,  a good  pencil,  a small  pocket  compass,  a tin  spoon,  a 
strong  knife  which  has  besides  its  ordinary  blade,  a penknife 
and  hoof  pick,  an  awl,  a lancet,  and  a steel.  In  order  to  prevent 
this  knife  from  being  lost,  it  would  be  well  to  have  an  eye  in 
the  lower  part  of  the  handle,  to  allow  a string  to  be  attached 
to  It,  the  other  end  of  which  iwould  be  fastened  to  the  trousers 
pocket. 


Overcoats  are  issued  to  troopers  to  protect  them,  as  well 
as  their  arms  and  ammunition,  from  the  weather.  In  peace  the 
march  need  not  be  delayed  to  give  time  to  put  them  on,  because, 
as  the  trooper  will  reach  his  destination  at  an  early  hour,  he 
can  find  the  time  and  means  necessary  to  dry  himself;  but  in 
war  that  cannot  be  counted  upon,  so,  as  soon  as  it  begins  to  rain, 
have  the  overcoats  unrolled  and  put  on;  after  the  rain  has  ceased, 
allow  them  to  remain  upon  the  men  long  enough  to  dry,  then 
have  your  men,  as  they  should  be  trained  to  do,  reroll  and  re- 
place them  on  their  saddles,  as  they  march  along.  At  the  first 
halt  the  coats  will  be  overhauled  and  any  faults  in  packing 
remedied,  under  the  supervision  of  the  squadron  and  platoon 
commanders. 

* * 

The  great  quantity  of  clothing  allowed  the  trooper  has  nec- 
essitated a valise  much  too  large;  a campaign  will  hardly  have 
begun  before  the  greater  part  of  these  useless  things  will  be 
thrown  aside  and  lost;  but  it  is  to  be  feared  that  the  horse  will 
gain  but  little  by  this  temporary  diminution  of  weight.  The 
trooper  will  replace  his  linen  trousers  by  rags  which  he  will  pile 
upon  his  poor  horse  without  in  any  way  benefitting  himself.  It 
is  absolutely  necessary,  then,  that  officers  should  make  frequent 
and  unexpected  inspections  of  the  valises,  and  order  every  for- 
bidden article  found  in  them  to  be  thrown  away  or  destroyed,  and 
punish  severely  the  troopers,  who,  in  spite  of  orders  to  the  con- 
trary, persist  in  exhausting  the  strength  of  their  horses  in  trans- 
porting useless,  and  frequently  stolen,  property. 

At  the  present  day  the  weight  oarried  by  a light-cavalry  horse 
is  from  246  to  253  pounds,  and  this  weight  is  naturally  much 
increased  in  rainy  weather.  Add  to  that  the  weight  of  the 
rations,  and  you  can  easily  see  that  it  is  necessary  to  be  very 
strict  in  regard  to  the  (weights  allowed  to  be  carried. 

Sometimes  officers  have  their  personal  supplies  carried  on  the 
horses  of  their  grooms;  the  chief  should  positively  forbid  this, 
and  severely  punish  any  officer  guilty  of  a repetition  of  the 
offense,  after  having  been  once  cautioned.  The  trooper's  horse 
belongs  to  the  government,  and  should  be  employed  only  in  its 
service. 


HORSE  EQUIPMENTS.  PACKING 

Q.  Why  does  it  often  happen  that  a non-commissioned  officer 
or  soldier  does  not  receive  the  promotion,  the  cross,  which  he 
might  have  obtained. 

A.  Because,  instead  of  continuing  with  the  war  squadrons  to 
which  he  belonged,  he  remained  in  rear,  at  one  of  the  small 
depots. 


14 


HORSE  EQUIPMENT— PACKING 


Q.  Why? 

A.  Because  his  horse  was  injured  and  unfit  for  service. 

Q.  What  injured  him? 

A.  The  saddle. 

Q.  Why  did  the  saddle  injure  him? 

A.  Because  the  chief  of  squadron  in  assigning  it,  and  the 
soldier  in  receiving  it,  failed  to  study  carefully  the  proper  bear- 
ing of  the  saddle  on  the  horse's  back. 

The  first  thing  to  be  done  when  a saddle  is  received  is  to 
place  the  naked  tree  on  the  horse’s  back  to  see  that  the  bars  fit 
properly;  that  they  are  parallel  to  the  surface  on  which  they  are 
placed;  to  judge  beforehand  the  changes  of  position  which  will 
be  effected  in  these  surfaces  by  the  movements  of  the  horse,  so 
that  the  weight  of  the  saddle  may  be,  as  nearly  as  possible,  dis- 
tributed over  the  whole,  and  not  bear  upon  a portion  of  the  bars 
only.  The  slightly  convex  form  of  the  bars  is  given  to  them  for 
the  sole  purpose  of  preserving  a perfect  equilibrium  in  all  pos- 
sible positions  of  the  horse  and  his  rider.  To  see  that  the  arch 
of  the  pommel  does  not  constrain  the  withers,  either  by  pinching 
them  laterally  or  compressing  them  in  their  upper  portion;  that 
the  arch  of  the  cantle  is  high  enough  and  the  fork  sufficiently 
elevated  to  prevent  the  valise  resting  on  the  loins  when  it  is 
attached;  that  the  bars  are  smooth,  so  that  there  may  be  no 
rough  spots  to  produce  abrasions  of  the  skin;  that  the  pegs,  made 
of  green  wood,  and  afterward  dried,  do  not  project  from  their 
holes  in  a way  to  produce  injury;  that  the  saddle  seat  is  not  so 
law  as  to  throw  the  rider  on  the  backbone  of  the  horse,  instead 
of  keeping  him  away  from  it,  thus  producing  pressure  and  dan- 
gerous chafing;  that  the  saddle  seat  is  not  raised  too  high  be- 
fore or  behind,  which,  by  throwing  the  rider  too  much  to  the  front 
or  rear,  will  make  the  saddle  tilt  up,  derange  the  equilibrium, 
establish  a constant,  uneven  pressure  upon  the  same  place,  con- 
strain the  horse  and  rider  in  their  movements,  and  will  surely 
injure  both;  that  the  holsters  do  not  close  too  tightly  on  the 
shoulders,  which  will  constrain  their  movements  and  surely 
wound  them.  The  only  way  of  judging  perfectly  of  the  fit  of  a 
saddle  Is,  as  I have  already  said,  to  place  the  bare  tree  upon  the 
horse's  back,  then  mount  the  ma(  upon  the  tree  and  see  how 
the  pressure  acts. 

If,  in  every  movement,  the  bars  are  not  parallel  to  the  horse’s 
sides,  the  pressure  will  be  irregular;  for  either  the  tree  is  too 
wide,  and  the  bars,  pressing  only  from  the  inside,  will  injure  the 
backbone  of  the  horse;  or  the  tree  will  be  too  narrow,  and  the 
bars,  pressing  only  diagonally,  will  produce  sores  upon  those 
parts  of  the  sides  which  they  must  bear  upon  with  all  the  weight 
of  the  rider  and  his  load. 

That  having  been  done,  the  leather  parts  belonging  to  the  saddle 
will  be  attached  to  it,  and  it  will  then  be  placed  carefully  upon 
the  folded  blanket.  The  crupper,  breast-strap,  and  girth  will  be 
so  arranged  that  by  their  united  action  they  will  hold  the  saddle 
securely  in  the  place  it  should  occupy  and  thus  prevent,  instead 
of  oausing,  injuries  to  the  horse. 

When  a saddle  fits  a horse  properly  there  is  no  need  of  fas- 
tening it,  in  oeace  with  either  a crupper  or  breast-strap;  which 
shows  plainly  that  these  two  pieces  of  harness  should  not  be 
tightly  drawn — as  this  would  simply  result  in  constraining  the 
movements  of  the  horse,  and  chafing  his  skin  unnecessarily.  On 
the  contrary,  the  girth  should  be  tightened  rather  more,  because 
by  holding  the  blanket  in  position  it  prevents  its  becoming  dis- 
placed, to  the  injury  of  the  horse,  and  also  keeps  the  saddle  in 
place. 

The  captain  who  adjusts  a saddle  to  the  back  of  a horse  of 
his  squadron  ought  to  see  not  only  the  immediate  effect  it  will 


\ 

I 


15 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


produce  on  the  back,  rounded  by  rest  in  the  garrison,  but  alsc  . 
that  which  it  must  produce  upon  the  same  back,  thinned  anc  : 
wasted  by  the  fatigues  of  war,  or  of  a long  march.  He  shoulc  •' 
be  guided,  then,  not  by  the  fleshy  form  but  by  the  bony  frame  o 
the  horse,  in  forming  his  opinion. 

When  the  saddle  has  been  tried  as  I have  just  directed,  i- 
should  then  be  packed  and  mounted;  and,  in  the  alterations  whicf  1 
will  be  suggested  by  these  operations,  a large  margin  must  bs 
allowed  for  the  changes  which  will  be  rendered  necessary  by  thi 
thinness  of  the  horse,  as  mentioned  above. 

After  this  important  labor  has  been  performed,  the  horse  mas  ’ 
be  bridled. 

The  greatest  care  should  be  exercised  in  the  choice  of  a bit  - 
The  conformation  of  the  mouth  will  suggest  the  one  most  suit- 
able. nevertheless,  it  may  be  that  after  having  conformed  tc 
all  that  the  ordinary  rules  prescribe,  the  greater  cf  less  sensi 
bility,  general  or  partial,  of  the  mouth  may  upset  our  calcula  ; 
tions;  in  that  case,  let  us  not  hesitate  to  change  the  bits  unti 
we  find  one  offering  the  fewest  objections. 

After  having  fitted  the  bit,  guard  against  doing  what  I have  ; 
unfortunately  seen  done  in  many  regiments,  and  among  others 
my  own — that  is,  shortening  the  curb-chain  in  order  that  the 
equipments  may  be  handsomer  and  more  uniform.  That  is  sacri-  : 
ficing  the  useful  to  the  elegant,  while,  on  the  contrary,  we  ought 
really  to  sacrifice  everything  to  the  useful.  Let  us  leave  the 
curb-chain  at  its  full  length,  because  in  certain  cases  by  this 
means  we  will  be  able  to  give  greater  freedom  to  the  horse's  :: 
mouth.  If  a horse  dies  and  is  replaced  by  another,  the  same  bif  : 
can  be  used,  no  matter  what  may  be  the  thickness  of  the  new  : 
horse's  chin.  If  the  horse  does  not  obey  the  bit,  applied  in  the  : 
proper  manner,  we  can  let  out  the  chain  on  one  side,  twist  ir-  : 
regularly,  and  thus  produce  a more  marked  effect  upon  him. 
This  expedient,  useful  in  certain  emergencies,  necessarily  shortens 
the  length  of  the  curb-chain;  but  even  if  the  curb-chain  breaks. 
and  we  lose  the  broken  ring,  there  will  still  remain  something  ; 
with  which  to  repair  damages. 

Let  us  also  guard  against  drawing  the  curb-chain,  nose-band  ana 
throat-latch  too  tight;  to  do  so  is  to  torture  the  horse  uselessly  - 

restrict  his  respiration,  deprive  him  of  all  liberty,  all  movements  ol  s 

the  bit  necessary  to  refresh  the  bars  of  his  mouth.  It  is  also  a ; 
mistake  to  place  a bit  so  as  to  cause  the  branches  to  tilt  forward, 
as  the  effect  of  their  pressure  upon  the  bars  is  to  fatigue  them 
and  destroy  their  sensibility;  it  gives  to  the  bit  a severity  which, 
far  from  rendering  the  horse  obedient,  too  often  frets  him  and 
makes  him  wild  and  stubborn. 

After  the  equipment  has  been  used  for  some  time,  the  use 
made  of  it,  or  the  moisture  of  the  air,  may  cause  the  leather  j 
straps  to  yield  and  stretch.  We  must  then  readjust  it  in  order 
that  the  leather  may  not  become  creased  or  wrinkled;  that  if 
may  fit  the  horse  perfectly  and  permit  neither  chafing  nor  useless  ; 
swaying.  And  this  operation  must  be  repeated  as  often  as  we 
see  the  necessity  for  so  doing. 

Q.  Why  is  it  that  the  girth  often  breaks  and  throws  the 
rider  to  the  ground? 

A.  The  girth  itself  seldom  breaks,  because  it  is  made  of  ’ 

strong  material,  and  when  this  becomes  old  and  stiff  enough  tc 

break,  it  is  replaced  by  new;  but  the  girth  is  attached  to  the  tree 
by  a thong  which  is  as  weak  as  the  parts  to  which  it  is  attached 
are  heavy  and  strong.  Its  strength  not  being  proportioned  to  the 
other  parts,  it  gives  way  when  not  well  secured,  or  breaks  wher  “ 
suddenly  dried,  or  weakened  by  a service  of  short  duration.  This 
thong  should  be  frequently  examined,  as  it  Is  upon  its  soundness 
that  our  safety  depends. 


16 


HORSE  EQUIPMENT — PACKING 


u Q.  The  backs  of  troop  horses  are  generally  badly  formed, 
d Some  are  narrow,  others  too  round,  others  are  lower  in  front  than 
d behind,  others  have  the  contrary  fault,  and  others  are  swaybacked. 
)f  A.  The  greater  reason  why  we  should  examine  them  carefully 
in  order  to  fit  the  saddles  to  them  suitably, 
it  Q.  But  suppose  the  horse,  in  campaign,  becomes  thinner  than 
h we  anticipated  on  starting  out? 

it  A.  I have  already  told  you  that  before  setting  out  on  a cam- 
15  paign  you  should  study  his  bony  frame  instead  of  his  fleshy  form, 
and  that  you  should  be  guided  in  your  action  by  the  results  of 
iy  that  study;  however,  if  you  have  made  the  mistake  of  not  seeing 
what  must  happen,  you  must  not  hestitate  to  attach  pads  to  the 
t,  saddle-tree. 

(.  Q.  Of  what  should  these  pads  be  made? 

s A.  A bit  of  coarse  linen  which  can  be  nailed  to  the  bars  and 

ij.  then  stuffed  with  hair,  or,  In  default  of  that,  with  hay  or  straw, 
i.  Be  careful  to  drive  the  nails  which  secure  the  pads  upon  the  upper 
i|  face  of  the  bars,  (where  they  cannot  possibly  come  in  contact 

with  the  horse’s  back,  so  that  their  heads  may  cause  no  injuries 

ii  by  their  roughness. 

s,  Q.  If  the  horse  is  low  in  front  or  behind? 

k A.  You  must  give  greater  thickness  to  your  pad  in  front  or 

(.  behind,  in  order  to  correct  this  fault  of  conformation,  which  is 
it  the  more  dangerous  because  the  saddle,  in  moving  to  the  front  or 
K rear,  increases  the  effect  of  the  breast-strap  or  crupper,  and  by 
is  that  means  quickly  produces  injuries  which  cannot  be  cured,  be- 
's  cause  the  cause  cannot  be  entirely  removed.  Further,  by  throwing 
it  the  weight  of  the  trooper  forward  or  to  the  rear,  out  of  its  proper 

w position,  it  constrains  the  paces  of  the  horse,  paralyzes  his  action, 

,5  and  diminishes  the  power  of  the  trooper  through  the  clumsiness 
l.  produced  thereby. 

i,  Generally,  the  troop  horses  in  France  are  low  in  front  and 
uihave  deficient  withers.  The  manner  of  folding  the  blanket  only 
S|  partially  remedies  the  defect.  There  should  be  in  all  regiments 
ig  a certain  number  of  saddles  made  for  this  class  of  horses,  with 
the  pommel  arches  higher  than  those  of  the  cantle. 
id.  General  rule;  the  horse  and  his  rider  should  be  a unit,  and 

l to  accomplish  this  the  centre  of  gravity  of  both  should  be  in  the 
oj'Same  place,  and  the  weight  should  bear  on  the  centre  of  its  sup- 
a ports. 

d Q.  During  a campaign,  what  should  be  done  when  a horse’s 
ni  sides  are  injured? 

h,  A.  When  the  blanket  has  been  folded,  the  surface  which 

,d  chafes  the  injured  parts  should  be  covered  iwith  a linen  cloth,  in 
order  that  the  wool  may  not  irritate  the  sore;  then  the  saddle 

sjjshould  be  raised  by  half  pads  which  will  bear  upon  the  sound 

((lsurface,  without  touching  the  sore,  so  that  the  horse  may  be 
((  cured  while  marching. 

il  If,  after  the  sore  has  healed,  and  the  pads  have  been  removed, 
jj  the  saddle  continues  to  hurt  the  sore,  in  spite  of  the  care  taken 
,5  to  prevent  it,  the  tree  should  be  exchanged  for  another. 

Q.  If  the  horse  is  injured  on  the  withers? 
j(l  A.  The  front  of  the  saddle  should  be  raised  by  half  pads, 
covered  with  linen,  and  the  weight  on  the  saddle  be  temporarily 
(l  shifted,  by  throwing  it  upon  or  toward  the  cantle. 
tl  Q.  If  injured  on  the  loins? 

A.  The  folded  blanket  should  be  made  shorter  so  that  it  will 
ej  not  touch  the  sore,  the  thickness  and  weight  of  the  valise  be  di- 
li{  minished  by  removing  some  of  the  contents,  which  may  be  placed 
on  the  saddle,  and  afterwards,  the  valise  be  raised  so  that  it  can 
I,  no  longer  touch  the  injured  part.  If  these  measures  prove  unavail- 
js  ing,  the  valise  must  be  entirely  removed.  Sometimes  the  iron 
plates  of  the  tree  are  too  long  and  injure  the  horse  in  front  and 


17 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


or  hav 


r. 


in  rear.  In  this  case  the  plates  must  be  shortened 

their  sharp  edges  smoothed  down. 

Often  the  loins  are  injured  by  the  faulty  manner  of  fold  in 
the  jacket,  the  buttons  being  allowed  to  touch  the  horse.  Thi 
fault  may  be  easily  discovered  and  corrected. 

Q.  But  what  will  the  trooper  do,  when  deprived  of  his  valise 

A.  He  will  place  his  two  unfolded  shirts  between  the  sea 
and  the  schabraque,  his  housewife  in  his  nosebag,  put  on  his  bes 
pair  of  boots,  and  send  the  remainder  of  his  effects  back  to  th 
sub-depot. 

Q.  Should  his  horse  be  wounded  in  the  shoulder  by  the  rut 
bing  of  his  carbine? 

A.  The  trooper  must  carry  his  carbine  on  his  arm  until  th 
sore  is  completely  healed. 

Q.  Should  the  horse  be  injured  by  the  crupper? 

A.  It  must  be  loosened  and  be  wrapped  with  linen  cloth,  anc 
if  the  trouble  is  not  remedied  by  this,  the  crupper  must  be  take 
off  entirely. 

Q.  Should  the  horse  be  injured  by  the  girths? 

A.  This  will  always  arise,  either  from  the  saddle  getting  to- 
far  in  front,  or  the  girths  becoming  too  dry  and  hard.  In  th 
first  case  the  cause  must  be  removed  by  saddling  farther  back 
and  arranging  the  saddle  so  that  it  will  not  pull  too  much  o 
crupper;  and,  in  the  second,  by  slightly  rasping  the  edge  whicl  '■ 
injures  the  horse,  greasing  it,  and  wrapping  it  with  linen  cloth 
or  other  soft  material  such  as  sheepskin. 

Q.  Should  the  horse’s  mouth  be  injured? 

A.  Attack  the  cause,  by  raising  or  lowering  the  bit,  by  openini 
out  the  upper  branches,  or  by  lowering  the  snaffle 

Often,  men,  in  bridling  their  horses,  do  not  take  care  to  plac 
the  snaffle  above  the  port  of  the  curb  bit,  which  causes  the  tw 
bits,  one  above  the  other,  to  strike  the  bars  together,  and  in 
jure  the  mouth. 

The  great  art  of  packing  consists  of  three  things:  1st.  T 

carry  cut  only  the  indispensable.  2nd.  To  distribute  its  weigh 
properly,  so  that  it  may  bear  equally,  and  thus  fatigue  the  hors 
as  little  as  possible,  and  not  wound  him.  3rd.  To  give  the  troope 
the  greatest  possible  facility  in  the  use  of  his  arms,  so  that  h 
may  employ  them  to  the  very  best  advantage. 

Packing  forms  three-fourths  of  the  duty  of  the  trooper  i 
campaign.  Do  not  be  astonished,  then,  at  the  importance 
have  attached  to  it  since  I have  commanded  you;  at  the  manne 
in  which  I have  continually  insisted  that  you  should  appear  o 
parade  every  day  with  a regularly  and  completely  packed  equip 
ment. 

There  are  some  things  which  one  never  knows  well  enoug 
until  he  knows  them  too  well. 

Whenever  in  war,  either  by  the  death  of  a horse,  or  capture 
from  the  enemy,  you  find  yourself  in  possession  of  extra  saddle- 
trees do  not  send  them  to  the  rear  or  abandon  them  on  th 
battlefield,  until  after  you  have  tried  them  on  the  backs  of  th 
horses  wounded  or  injured  by  causes  which  you  recognize  as  pro 
ceeding  from  the  shapes  of  your  saddle-trees.  I recommend  t r 
you  especially,  the  tree  of  the  Hungarian  saddle,  the  very  bes 
you  can  have,  and  one  that  is  durable  and  adapted  to  almos 
every  kind  of  horse. 

Never  abandon  an  equipment  until  after  you  have  taken  fron 
it  everything  that  may  be  of  use  to  you,  not  to  make  a suppl 
depot  and  burden  your  horse  with  a useless  load,  but  in  order  t< 
replace  in  the  field  that  which  may  be  wanting,  or  to  exchang 
what  is  worthless.  Over  that  let  the  squadron  commanders  pr«  ; 
side,  and  take  care  that  they  permit  none  but  useful  exchanges 


IS 


SHOEING 


In  time  of  war,  let  the  squadron  commanders  frequently  make 
Unannounced  inspections  of  their  equipments  and  packs. 

The  campaign  once  begun,  no  horses  should  be  sent  to  the 
"l  ear,  except  in  case  of  absolute  necessity.  The  rest  which  an 
^Injury  would  justify  in  time  of  peace  ought  not  to  be  granted 
then.  In  a campaign,  an  injured  horse  able  to  serve  ought  to 
iiserve;  it  is  the  duty  of  his  rider  to  cure  him  while  marching. 


si:  • • 

Hl  I have  seen  horses,  weak  and  thin,  with  backs  perfectly  stripped 
;tf>f  skin,  the  means  of  gaining  the  cross  for  their  riders.  Of  this 
lumber  I would  mention  the  one  ridden  by  my  friend  Guinden, 
*4vhen  he  killed  the  Prince  of  Prussia,  at  Saalfeld. 

Unfortunately,  in  time  of  war,  the  light  cavalryman  has  but 
kittle  time  to  nurse  his  horse,  which  would  be  the  means  of 
rreserving  his  health,  but  he  can  always  find  time  enough  to 
ilacken  his  girths,  to  pull  forward  the  saddle  blanket,  to  replace 
lis  saddle  in  its  proper  position,  and  he  should  not  negleot  to 
eipmploy  it  in  services  of  this  nature. 

The  trooper,  ought  to  live  only  for  his  horse  which  is  his 
egs,  his  safety,  his  honor,  and  his  reward. 

A squadron  commander  ntust  devote  his  attention  at  all  times 
jio  his  horses.  Everything  pertaining  to  them  is  a subject  for 

inspection,  and  every  moment  should  be  employed  In  looking 
ijifter  them.  The  saddlery  should  receive  special  attention  because 
i|  t often  causes  the  loss  of  horses  and  consequent  loss  of  success. 
_et  him  bear  that  constantly  in  mind. 

The  dismounted  trooper  must  be  made  to  understand  that  if 
le  is  ordered  to  save  his  equipments  it  is  not  for  reasons  of 
Economy.  The  reason  Is  a nobler  and  grander  one,  and  founded 
mtirely  on  his  personal  interest.  For,  if  he  finds  an  extra 
it#iorse  at  the  rear,  being  already  supplied  with  an  equipment,  he 
,,/vill  be  able  to  reappear  immediately  in  the  ranks,  and  return 
ifto  the  battle,  where  he  will  obtain  the  reward  of  his  conduct 
tnd  courage. 

Sometimes,  to  the  disgrace  of  their  regiments,  men  are  seen 
ihivho  deliberately  injure  their  horses  so  as  to  have  a pretext  for 
iifoncealing  their  cowardice  in  the  shelter  of  the  small  depots. 
Jrhese  accomplish  their  purpose  either  by  wrinkling  their  saddle 
blankets  or  by  placing  small  pebbles  between  their  folds.  If  such 
coundrels  can  be  caught  in  the  act,  a terrible  example  must 
jjie  made  of  them. 

When  a campaign  opens,  the  first  care  of  a chief  should 
J>e  to  have  the  mouth-pieces  of  his  curb  and  snaffle  bits  tinned 
r plated;  to  have  all  the  leather  greased  instead  of  waxed,  and 
to  keep  them  so  while  the  war  lasts.  These  two  things  would 
elieve  the  trooper  from  attending  to  a multitude  of  details 
jh vh ich  consume  his  time  uselessly;  prevent  the  horses  from  he- 
mming disgusted  with  rusty  bits;  relieve  the  packs  of  a ridi- 
ulous  number  of  brushes;  and  preserve  the  equipments  in  good 
Condition. 

The  Chief  should  see,  with  his  own  eyes,  that  the  trooper's 
l,, iouse-wife  contains  everything  necessary  for  the  repair  of  his 
lothing  and  saddlery.  He  should  also  assure  himself,  by 
personal  inspection,  that  each  squadron  possesses  a sufficient 
!t  umber  of  pots,  tin  canteens  and  scythes,  and  that  these  articles 
re  all  suitably  packed  on  the  horses. 


l\  SHOEING 

ie  A soldier  cannot  be  too  oareful  of  his  horse’s  feet.  A nail 
'*■  adly  driven,  a stone  caught  in  the  frog,  a hard  substanoe  pushed 


19 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


into  the  hoof,  a shoe  pulled  off  and  lost,  may,  all  at  once,  ren<  ^ 
the  horse  unfit  for  field  service. 

A troop  may,  I admit,  find  itself  without  a blacksmith. 

So  soon  as  a soldier  perceives  his  horse  limping  in  the  slig 
est  degree,  he  should  leave  the  ranks,  dismount,  and  exams 
the  foot  in  which  the  lameness  seems  to  be. 

If  the  cause  of  lameness  is  a stone  picked  up  by  the  shoe 
must  be  removed  by  striking  it  with  another  stone,  from 
narrowest  side  of  the  shoe,  in  order  that  it  may  fall  more  eas 
from  its  place. 

If  it  is  a nail,  it  must  be  withdrawn  by  a piece  of  split  wo 
that  will  clasp  it  between  its  head  and  the  foot,  and  being  turr  ,, 
over,  will  serve  as  a lever,  and  act  like  pincers;  afterward 
foot  must  be  cleaned  out,  and  a little  grease,  if  it  can 
had,  be  applied  to  the  hole  and  left  there,  until  proper  treatm< 
can  be  obtained. 

Should  a soldier  hear  a shoe  clicking  or  rattling,  he  shot 

leave  the  ranks  and  examine  the  horse’s  foot.  If  the  clicking 
caused  by  the  loosening  of  the  nails,  he  must  strike  them  with 
hammer  or  stone  until  the  points  reappear  on  the  outside  of  i 
hoof,  when  he  must  clinch  them  as  well  as  he  can  until  a biai 
smith  can  be  found. 

If  caused  by  the  loss  of  several  nails,  he  must  drive  ore.  w 
light  blows,  into  one  of  the  holds  made  by  the  former  nails, 
order  to  avoid  all  risk  of  pricking  the  horse,  taking  care 

keep  the  point  well  forward  so  that  it  may  come  out  low  ratffi; 
than  high,  and  to  put  this  nail  into  that  part  of  the  shoe  wh 
has  the  fewest  nails.  If  the  soldier  is  a new  man  and  afraid 
try  the  operation,  he  should  ask  an  old  soldier  to  render  h 
the  service,  and  afterward  take  his  horse  to  the  first  blacksm 
he  can  find. 

If  the  shoe  is  almost  off,  so  that  it  would  be  necessary  to  c 
too  many  nails  into  it  to  fasten  it,  the  trooper  should  take 

off,  put  it  into  his  shoe  pouch  and  then  march  on  foot,  leadi 

his  horse  by  the  bridle. 

It  is  to  be  well  understood  that  all  this  is  to  be  done  only 
a distance  from  the  enemy;  for  when  an  engagement  begins 
time  can  be  taken  for  repairing  damages;  but  whether  a ho 
be  shod  or  barefooted,  lame  or  not  lame,  he  must  go  on,  a 
his  rider  must  not  dismount  except  by  order  of  his  captain. 

The  more  hilly  and  stony  the  country  is,  the  more  carefu 
must  the  trooper  attend  to  the  traveling  of  his  horse  and 
any  marked  change  in  his  gait. 

The  file-closers  should  frequently  cast  their  eyes  on  the  grou 
passed  over  by  the  command.  If  they  see  a lost  shoe  they  mi 
pick  it  up  and  restore  it  to  the  trooper  whose  horse  has  dropp  , 
it. 

A shoe  is  seldom  lost  except  through  the  fault  of  the  troop 
If,  before  beginning  the  march,  he  had  examined  his  horse's  fet 
if,  at  the  different  halts,  he  had  inspected  them  carefully,  a 
called  the  blacksmith  when  a nail  was  found  missing,  no  sho 
would  have  been  lost. 

Good  horse-shoers  are  rare.  The  captain  should  carefu 
superintend  the  work  at  his  forge  and  never  hesitate  to  retu  , 
to  the  ranks  as  a trooper  one  who  does  his  work  carelessly,  a 
frequently  pricks  a horse. 

Blacksmiths  are  slaves  of  routine,  and  they  give  too  "‘t 
attention  to  the  bearing  of  the  horse.  Sometimes  they  throw  t, 
horse  on  the  point  of  his  foot — which  may  cause  a thousand  se 
ous  accidents — and  again  upon  his  heel,  which  fatigues  and  wer  , 
out  the  horse  rapidly  by  producing  an  unnatural  action  in  t , 
flexor  tendons  of  the  leg.  A troop  commander,  entering  on 
campaign,  should  satisfy  himself  twenty  times  rather  than  one  , 


20 


THE  SABRE 


tiat  his  men  possess  everything  needed;  not  only  a set  of 
;tra  shoes,  but  also  at  least  double  the  number  of  nails  re- 
ired  to  set  them. 

If  the  season  is  advanced,  he  should  see  that  every  man  adds 
his  ordinary  supply  a certain  number  of  roughened  nails  for 
e on  ice. 

He  should  also  personally  see  that  every  extra  set  of  shoes 
s been  fitted  to  the  feet  of  the  horse  which  is  to  wear  them. 
So  soon  as  his  supply  of  shoes  and  nails  is  exhausted,  he  should 
deavor,  by  all  means,  to  repair  his  losses,  either  by  setting 
lC>  blacksmith  to  work  so  soon  as  an  opportunity  occurs,  or  by 
^king  the  shoes  from  the  horses  sent  to  the  rear,  or  from  those 
led  in  action.  I have  always  noticed  in  a campaign  that  the 
iop  which  counted  the  most  horses  in  the  ranks,  was  the  one 
ose  blacksmiths  were  the  best  and  most  carefully  watched. 

It  is  always  the  fault  of  the  troop  commander  when  the  horses 
s without  shoes. 


THE  SABRE 


How  Is  the  sabre  to  be  used? 

The  sabre  is  the  weapon  in  which  you  should  repose  the 
satest  confidence,  for,  very  rarely  will  it,  by  breaking  in  your 
(j, ,n d , fail  to  render  good  service.  Its  strokes  are  sure  in  pro- 
tion  to  the  coolness  with  which  you  direct  them,  and  control 
ur  weapon.  It  is  the  points  alone  that  kill;  the  others  serve 
yly  to  wound.  Thrust!  thrust!  as  often  as  you  can;  you  will 
jrthrow  all  whom  you  touch,  and  demoralize  those  who  escape 
ur  attack,  and  will  add  to  those  advantages  that  of  being  al- 
ys  at  a parry  and  never  uncovered.  In  the  first  wars  in  Spain 
■ dragoons  made,  with  their  points,  a reputation  which  demoral- 
d the  English  and  Spanish  troops. 

Q.  Should  one,  in  war,  attempt  to  use  all  the  movements 
iscribed  in  the  regulations? 

A.  No;  as  a general  rule  never  attempt  to  attack  an  enemy 
ept  when  he  is  in  front  of  you  or  at  your  side;  whenever  he 
s in  your  rear  parry  with  rapid  moulinets. 

"3-  Which  is  the  most  effective  cut? 

p.  The  back-handed  stroke.  It  should  be  used  only  upon  an 


Iny  who  passes  you,  or  upon  a cuirassier  whom  it  would  be 
uncertain  to  thrust  in  the  flank. 

|.  Where  should  you  strike  him? 

At  the  height  of  the  cravat;  because  it  is  natural  for  a 
latened  trooper  to  lower  his  head,  and  thus,  you  may  strike 
in  the  face;  if  your  blow  misses  its  object  it  may  touch  his 
jlder  or  forearm,  and  thus  disable  him. 

,.  First  grasp  firmly  the  gripe  of  the  sabre,  so  that  the  blade 
not  turn  in  the  hand,  and  tend  to  touch  with  the  flat  side 
ead  of  the  edge;  then  you  can  cut  with  a sawing  motion, 
■h  makes  the  weapon  penetrate  more  deeply 
ivery  cutting  edge  is  a saw,  more  or  less  fine,  which  produces 
effect  in  traveling  horizontally  over  the  object  which  it  at- 
<s.  To  produce  this  effect  at  the  moment  of  striking,  draw 
hand  backwards.  That  is  the  whole  secret  of  the  terrible 
e work  of  the  Mamelukes. 

. What  rules  should  be  observed  in  making  thrusts? 
i.  (1)  To  make  sure  of  the  hand;  (2)  to  make  a good 
ice  of  the  point  of  attack,  the  flank  being  the  most  vulner- 
s;  (3)  if  the  attack  be  made  at  a higher  point,  to  hold  the 
sidewise,  so  that  it  may  penetrate  between  the  ribs;  (4) 
11  drive  the  point  home,  and  instantly  draw  back  the  elbow, 
••Hscially  if  the  adversary  faces  you.  I have  frequently  seen 


21 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


troopers  sprain  the  wrist  and  become  disabled  for  a whole  c ■ 
paign  through  having  made  a thrust  unskillfully.  Not  a diffi 
thing  to  understand,  since  they  oppose  their  single  forearmL, 
a very  considerable  resistance  offered  by  the  weight  and  im  I \ 
sion  of  a mounted  man.  If  they  had  withdrawn  the  arm  I 
would  not  have  been  injured,  and  might  have,  in  a measure,  s' 
covered  themselves  either  to  renew  the  attack,  or  to  resume 
parry.  As  soon  as  you  have  delivered  a thrust,  if  the  en 

does  not  surrender,  give  him  the  back-handed  cut;  it  was  1 
that  Guindet  killed  the  Prince  of  Prussia  at  Saalfeld. 

Q.  How  should  a sabre  be  sharpened  so  that  it  will  cut  w 11 

A.  When  a campaign  is  decided  upon  the  orders  ar 

suddenly.  Each  one  hastens  to  prepare  himself  in  the  si  i 

time  granted  him;  hence  the  little  care  given  to  sharper 
sabres — a great  mistake,  which  is  always  recognized  only  v>  i ■ 
there  is  no  longer  any  means  of  correcting  it. 

It  is  no  trifling  matter  to  sharpen  the  edge  of  a sabre.  n 
French  sabre  has  a bevel  (a  fault  tolerated  by  no  other  pe^ 
whose  cavalry  knows  how  to  use  the  sabre);  the  greater 
angle  of  this  bevel  the  less  deeply  can  the  blade  penetrate.  „ 
in  sharpening  the  blade,  you  increase  Instead  of  diminish 
fault,  you  render  the  blade  almost  useless — a stick  would 
better  than  your  sabre.  , 

Remember,  then,  that  the  sharper  the  angle  of  the  bevel, 
more  deeply  your  sabre  will  cut. 

Under  the  Empire  the  trooper  carried  no  hatchet,  so 
sabre  had  to  replace  it  for  all  the  work  of  the  bivouac;  hence 
blade  and  edge  were  quickly  Injured;  but  the  troopers  who  un 
stood  their  business  soon  corrected  this  abuse  which  they 
been  compelled  to  practice:  (1)  by  making  use  of  the  lo  i 

part  of  the  blade  only,  for  cutting  wood,  pickets,  eto., 

preserving,  as  Intact  as  possible,  the  upper  part,  for  use  In  c 
bat;  (2)  in  always  carrying  with  them  a small,  mild  file,  \ 
whloh  to  sharpen  the  blade  when  It  became  dulled. 

I advise  you  to  use  this  kind  of  a file,  or  a whetstone, 
whichever  is  used,  to  always  work  it  on  the  blade  from  be 
upwards,  taking  the  guard  as  a base,  so  that  the  impercept  ., 
teeth  of  your  saw  may  point  towards  your  hand. 

Two  things  contribute  largely  to  the  rapid  destruction  of 
edge  of  a blade:  The  first  is  the  carelessness  with  whict  „ 

is  pushed  into  the  scabbard,  or  drawn  out  of  it;  the  seconc  r 

the  shaking  and  rubbing  of  the  blade  in  the  scabbard  while  I 
there.  To  remove  the  first  cause,  do  not  drive,  so  to  sp>  r 
your  sabre  into  the  scabbard,  but  return  it  gently,  avoiding  . 
rubbing  of  the  edge. 

The  second  may  be  removed  by  having  the  wooden  ring,  wl  ... 
is  placed  within  the  scabbard  to  proteot  the  blade,  so  well  fi 
that  the  blade  will  be  compressed  by  it  and  prevented  f 
moving  or  swaying. 

As  moisture  is  one  of  the  most  Injurious  things  affec 
sabre  blades,  beware  of  returing  your  sabre  without  wiping  i * 

Not  only  rain  and  blood,  but  even  fog,  may  be  the  cause  1 
rust,  and  the  least  dampness  in  the  air  will  fix  Itself  on  1 
polished  surface  and  enter  the  pores  of  the  blade.  If  the  bl“ 
Is  moist  when  returned  to  the  scabbard  the  latter  also  beco 
damp,  and  there  will  be  difficulty  In  drying  it.  In  war  ii 
a wise  precaution  to  always  keep  your  blade  well  greased. 

If,  as  a result  of  hard  rains,  water  enters  the  scabbard,  T 
descends  to  the  bottom  of  it,  thus  becoming  a permanent  c;  * 
of  rust  to  the  point  of  the  sabre,  remove  the  wooden  ring  f 
put  the  empty  scabbard  In  the  sun  or  near  a fire;  if  the  lal  3 
beware  of  heating  It  so  as  to  melt  the  solder,  but  continue  r 
operation  slowly  until  the  moisture  has  been  evaporated.  Shi  < 


22 


DISCIPLINE 


c.ihis  prove  insufficient,  pass  the  scabbard  briskly  several  times 
jj  through  warm  ashes. 

n Often  a dismounted  trooper,  who  has  his  sabre  in  his  hand, 
, .places  the  point  upon  the  ground.  Very  naturally  the  point  be- 
comes rusted  and  ruined,  so  that  it  can  no  longer  be  depended 
/pon  In  a fight. 

1 Often,  In  bivouac,  a trooper  toasts  a piece  of  meat  upon  the 
I6soint  of  his  sabre,  by  ;which  means  the  temper  of  the  blade  is 
I destroyed,  so  that  he  can  no  longer  rely  upon  it  for  defence. 
Seneral  rule:  Be  as  careful  of  the  blade  of  your  sabre  as  you 

#(»re  of  your  razor. 

in.  * * 

^ Q.  What  should  be  done  with  captured  arms? 

ln.  A.  If  one  has  need  of  them  preserve  them  and  send  them 

*'0  the  rear;  should  they  not  be  required  for  use,  break  them. 

Q.  How  can  you  break  a sabre? 

A.  By  placing  a blade  horizontally  on  two  stones,  one  end 
testing  on  each,  then  throwing  a heavy  body  upon  the  unsup- 
mrted  middle,  taking  care  to  avoid  injury  from  the  flying  frag- 
ments. 

‘ Q.  And  a scabbard? 

' A.  In  the  same  manner;  although  it  may  not  be  broken  It 
/vill  be  unfit  for  service. 


w DISCIPLINE 

» Q.  What  is  discipline? 

I*1'  A.  The  soul  of  armies;  without  discipline  there  can  be  no  army. 

Q.  What  is  the  mainspring  of  discipline,  in  iwar? 

«l  A.  Honor. 

* Q.  How  is  it  to  be  stimulated? 

A.  By  praise  and  blame. 

Q.  If  they  do  not  suffice? 

* A.  Then  punishments,  more  severe  than  those  inflicted  In 
™jeace,  must  be  imposed. 

Q.  Why  this  difference? 

' A.  Because  offences  committed  in  war  differ  from  those  which 
nay  be  committed  in  garrison.  Because  they  have  different  con- 
sequences. Because  men  who  commit  themselves,  if  not  re- 
claimed by  a sentiment  of  honor,  receive  less  consideration  than 
•Cnywhere  else.  Because  the  punishments  that  can  be  Inflicted 
1 .re  not  so  numerous  nor  so  finely  graduated.  Because  the  more 
erious  consequences  offences  may  have,  the  more  necessary  it  is 
l!  hat  striking  examples  should  be  made  to  the  offenders. 

1 In  peace,  you  do  not  have  to  punish  such  offences  as  abandoning 
"i  post,  cruelty,  cowardice,  etc.,  and  you  have,  for  such  offenses 
, s are  committed,  the  graded  punishments  of  confinement  to 

I arracks,  the  guardhouse,  prison,  dungeon,  disciplinary  companies, 
J tc.  At  the  outposts,  nothing  of  that  sort  can  exist,  so  that  It 

.s  necessary,  while  overlookng  mild  offenses  which,  in  garrison, 
m you  Id  receive  punishment,  to  strike  hard  when  punishment  must 
>e  inflicted. 

II  Q.  How  would  you  grade  the  punishments  to  be  inflicted? 

A.  The  reprimand  in  private;  then  in  front  of  the  troops; 

Jatlgue  duty;  confinement  under  charge  of  the  camp  guard;  to 
tJje  dismounted  for  one  or  several  days,  and  marched  with  the  ad- 
I ance  guard;  dismount  the  trooper  and  send  him  back  to  the  army; 
a|  ave  him  driven  out  by  his  peers  and  handed  over  to  the  justice 
, f the  provost  marshal;  these  last  two  should  be  inflicted  only  in 
jo  ase  of  incorrigibility,  mutiny,  or  cowardice. 


23 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


Q.  Will  blame  answer  the  purpose? 

A.  Yes;  often,  because  it  is  administered  publicly,  and  to  me  ’ 
sensible  of  the  gravity  of  the  situation. 

Q.  And  the  rewards? 

A.  As  a disciplinary  force,  rewards  are  much  more  powerfu  3 
than  punishments.  The  more  prolonged  a war  is  the  more  thi  ‘ 
force  increases;  because,  hard  service  having  relieved  you  first  o 
the  bad  soldiers  who  take  advantage  of  any  pretext  to  leave 
then  of  the  mediocrities  of  no  force,  there  will  remain  only  th  ■' 
flower  of  your  ranks  whom  honor  will  control  better  than  fear.  ‘ 

Q.  What  scale  of  rewards  would  you  establish? 

A.  A complimentary  word  spoken  in  front  of  the  regiment 
marks  of  esteem,  repeated  as  often  as  occasion  offers;  the  choic 
of  a confidential  mission  offering  a chance  for  gaining  distinction  ' 
approbration  expressed  in  regimental  orders;  should  a worth 
soldier  be  dismounted,  give  to  him  instead  of  to  any  other 
spare  horse;  the  day  of  a review  call  this  man  out  of  the  ranks  an 
present  him  to  the  general;  promotion;  nomination  for  admissio 
into  the  Legion  of  Honor. 

The  severity  of  the  laws  of  military  discipline  should  be  adaptec 
as  a whole,  to  the  spirit  of  the  people  to  be  governed  by  them  ’’ 
and  in  detail,  to  the  character  of  the  provinces  furnishing  th 
recruits;  to  the  different  characters  of  those  whom  you  commanc  • 
and  to  the  degree  of  comfort  or  privation  existing  in  the  army 

The  application  of  these  laws  is  a matter  which  demands,  mor  ’ 
than  any  other,  perhaps,  the  keenest  powers  of  observation  on  th 
part  of  a commander.  .To  treat  a Frenchman  like  a Dutchman,  t 
punish  one  man  exactly  like  another,  displays  only  ignorance  o r 
laziness  on  the  part  of  authority,  and  cannot  possibly  effect  an 
useful  purpose. 

In  many  cases,  the  application  of  military  law  should  be  mad  ** 
rather  according  to  the  enlightened  conscience  of  the  juror  tha 
to  the  strict  severity  of  the  judge. 

Discipline  is  not  in  itself  the  end  we  seek,  but  a means  c • 

securing  it;  it  is  not  to  be  obtained  by  punishment  only,  for  rt  r- 

wards  pertain  to  it  also;  the  law  should  be  applied  according  t 
the  spirit  rather  than  the  letter.  To  accomplish  that,  the  com 
mander  must  combine  with  the  constant  exercise  of  observatio 
the  greatest  firmness  in  the  execution  of  the  law. 

The  basis  of  all  discipline  is  the  study  of,  and  acquaintanc  ’ 
with,  the  men  subject  to  our  orders.  Every  good  officer  or  nor  " 
commissioned  officer  should  be  able  to  call  by  heart  the  roll  of  hi 

squadron,  and  give  a detailed  history  of  the  military  lives  of  hi  : 

men. 

0-  How  do  you  apply  your  punishments? 

A.  In  war  every  offence  should  be  noted  as  soon  as  com  * 
mitted,  and  the  punishment  should  follow  at  once.  In  that  wa  L 
the  soldiers  will  be  impressed  by  the  example  made,  and  those  re  , 
marks  and  discussions,  common  companions  of  insubordination  i. 
which  soon  degenerate  into  revolt  if  not  forcibly  stopped  in  th  L 
beginning,  will  be  avoided. 

Shirking  is  the  one  vice  to  be  punished  before  all  others;  a ' 
soon  as  it  shows  itself,  smash  it  as  you  would  a glass. 

However  small  the  number  of  men  you  command  there  will  b! 
leaders  among  them.  Some  of  them  go  straight  along  the  righ  i- 
road,  the  others  turn  their  backs  upon  it.  Study  them  bot  , 
constantly,  determine  their  influence,  and  as  soon  as  an  occasio  ir 
presents  itself  reward  the  first — for  they  are  precious  models— 
and  treat  the  others  severely  and  without  indulgence,  for  the 
are  the  very  pests  of  disorganization.  Thus  you  will  depriv 
them  of  the  moral  influence  they  might  otherwise  exert,  and,  i 


24 


DISCIPLINE 


hey  stir  again,  you  will  have  to  deal  with  them  only,  instead  of 
er with  a conspiracy.  ......... 

I repeat  it,  a method  ;which  never  fails,  and  which  is  the  better 
the  higher  the  grade  of  the  officer  who  employs  it,  is  to  have  the 
u lames  of  all  his  men  by  heart  so  that  he  can  call  each  by  name, 
land  prove  to  him  publicly  and  with  a few  words  that  he  knows 
, Eim  and  will  not  lose  sight  of  him. 

Whatever  your  rank,  never  remit  a punishment  which  one  of 
J'our  subordinates  may  order  for  one  of  his  men;  that  would  end 
ill  discipline.  If  you  find  the  punishment  unjust  or  too  severe, 
send  for  the  officer  who  ordered  it  and  privately  direct  him  to 
■ emit  it. 

I!  In  France,  the  soldier  desires  liberty  less  than  that  justice 
yhich  is  the  right  of  all,  and  which  allows  the  balance  to  be  borne 
Sown  by  true  merit  only.  Let  him  suffer  like  his  comrades  and  he 
'toes  not  complain;  let  him  be  a little  less  fortunate  than  they  in 
Prosperity  and  he  cries  out  against  the  injustice;  this  knowledge 
JJjf  his  disposition  should  teach  his  commanders  how  to  deal  with 
iim. 

. If  discipline  does  not  admit  of  the  principle  of  equality,  the 
if  Prerogative  of  command  should  never  exceed  their  just  limits. 
Jin  campaign  let  there  be  as  perfect  equality  in  suffering  and 
Privation  as  in  the  chances  of  being  killed. 

'j  No  officer  should  wear  his  cloak  if  the  soldier  has  not  been 
directed  to  put  on  his;  to  warm  himself  in  a house  which 
P he  soldier  has  been  forbidden  to  enter. 

'J  To  monopolize  for  himself  or  his  horses  a barn  which  would 
(|jhelter  his  men. 

i To  demand  for  himself  an  excessive  portion  of  the  issues 
made  in  bivouac,  while  the  soldier  receives  what  is  barely  nec- 


essary. 

He  should,  under  all  circumstances,  defend  his  men,  whether 
ittacked  by  the  enemy,  or  insulted  or  maltreated  without  reason 
Jpy  another  officer  of  the  army,  or  when  issues  ordered  by  the  Gen- 
ral  are  not  made  as  directed. 

He  must  protect  the  sick  and  wounded,  under  all  circumstances, 
jjnd,  finally,  show  himself  worthy  of  his  epaulettes. 

. Share  with  the  soldier  and  he  will  share  with  you,  and  you 
will  never  be  cheated  in  that  market;  you  shall  see,  some  day, 
vhen  everything  fails  you,  how  this  old  soldier  will  be  proud, 
jiappy  even,  to  offer  you  his  bread  and  his  life. 

Beware  however  of  thinking  that  in  order  to  gain  the  affection 
f your  soldiers,  it  is  necessary  to  be  lax  with  them,  for  you  will 
be  completely  deceived.  I have  known  officers  beloved  by  their 
;oldiers,  and  have  studied  them  for  my  own  instruction;  they 
/ere  just,  very  firm,  independent  of  the  inferior  cliques  which 
ljt\lways  endeavor  to  monopolize  a commander;  on  the  battlefield 
hey  displayed  the  greatest  bravery,  and  in  bivouac,  they  were 
igilant,  unsparing  of  themselves  as  of  others,  generous  with  what 
jhey  had,  and  they  spoke  a language  which  the  soldier  understood; 
There  is  the  secret  of  their  absolute  power,  of  the  fanatical  de- 
otion  which  they  inspired.  Under  them  discipline  was  in- 
stinctive; no  one  ever  thought  of  infringing  its  rules,  but  if  by 
hance  any  one  exhibited  a disregard  of  his  duties,  the  justice  of 
iis  comrades  spared  their  commander  the  trouble  of  punishing 
iim.  Under  the  command  of  a man  of  that  temper  everything 
i easy;  the  regiment  becomes  a family — a family  capable  of 
erforming  prodigies. 

Q.  What  gives  the  greatest  power  to  the  laws  of  discipline? 
«y  A.  The  respect  which  a commander  inspires. 
i«  Q.  What  gives  the  greatest  facility  in  their  application? 


25 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


A.  Subordination. 

Q.  What  assures  subordination? 

A.  An  intimate  knowledge  of  the  authority  of  each  militai  ' 
grade. 

Q.  What  assures  to  orders  their  useful  effect? 

A.  First,  the  briefness  and  firmness  of  the  tone  in  whic 
they  are  given;  second,  inflexibility  in  their  execution.  Orde 
given  and  supported  in  that  way,  are  always  promptly  obeyed. 

Q.  What,  then,  produces  well-ordered  discipline? 

A.  Unity,  and  promptness  of  action. 

Q.  What  produces  unity  of  action? 

A.  L’esprit  de  corps,  which,  in  war,  might  be  more  proper 
called  the  very  life  of  the  regiment.  r 

Q.  In  war  should  one  obey  the  orders  of  all  officers  superir 
to  him  in  rank? 

A.  One  should  be  respectful  to  every  officer,  no  matter  < 
iwhat  arm,  who  is  his  superior  in  rank;  but  one  should  obey  onl 
the  orders  given  by  his  immediate  commanders,  when  they  belon 
to  his  corps,  or  when,  if  not  belonging  to  it,  they  have  been  re 
ognized  by  his  fellow-officers.  t: 

Q.  What  punishment  may  be  inflicted  upon  an  officer? 

A.  A private  warning;  a public  reprimand;  simple  arrest,  whic 
consists  in  marching  in  rear  of  his  squadron  and  being  tempo  - 
arily  deprived  of  command. 

Close  arrest,  which  consists  in  being  deprived  of  sword  an 
command,  being  placed  in  charge  of  the  camp  guard,  and  bein  i 
compelled  to  march  In  front  of  the  trumpets  when  the  reglmer 
is  en  route. 

Being  published  in  regimental  and  brigade  orders. 

Being  sent  to  the  rear. 

Dismissal  by  court-martial. 

Expulsion  from  the  regiment  by  his  peers. 

0-  Should  a regimental  commander  use  all  these  punishment  ’ 
on  his  officers. 

A.  The  commander  of  a regiment  who  is  obliged  to  make  us  - 
of  them  is  the  guilty  one,  and  above  all  punishable;  it  depend 
upon  him  to  prevent  offences  among  officers,  by  raising  at  th 
very  outset  the  pitch  of  their  honorable  sentiments,  their  pe 
sonal  dignity,  to  a height  worthy  of  their  position. 

If,  by  the  most  extraordinary  chance,  there  should  be  foun 
among  the  officers  one  deaf  to  this  law  of  conscience,  who  wi  : 
not  understand  the  nobly  paternal  language  of  his  commande  r 
he  should  be  unhesitatingly  excluded  from  the  ranks  of  th 
combatant  force,  either  by  sending  him  to  the  rear  to  comman 
a small  depot,  or  by  subjecting  him  to  the  justioe  of  his  peers 
Whose  unanimous  judgments,  always  just,  never  fail  of  confii  ’ 
mation  by  the  superior  authority. 

0-  You  recognize,  then,  in  the  corps  of  officers,  noncommls  r 
sioned  officers,  and  soldiers  the  right  of  trying  one  of  the> 
members? 

A.  I recognize  in  every  corps  whose  mainspring  Is  honor,  th 
right  of  preserving  that  honor  unsullied,  and  of  chasing  from  it 
ranks  any  one  of  its  members  who  compromises  it.  Only.  I d<  ' 
mand  that  these  judgments  be  unanimous.  The  tribunal  of  th 
whole  number  is  infallible;  it  is  a second  conscience. 


THE  STUDY  OF  THE  TERRAIN 
Drawing  and  Topography. 

terrains  of  war  are  of  two  kinds — practicable  and  nn 
practicable.  Their  study  should  be  directed  to  three  prlncipi 


26 


THE  STUDY  OF  THE  TERRAIN 


points;  1st,  their  nature,  whether  easy  or  difficult,  with  special 
Preference  to  the  manoeuvring  of  the  different  arms;  2nd,  their 
position,  with  reference  to  offensive  and  defensive  operations; 
3d,  their  development  and  distances, 
it | Q.  What  is  a defile? 

ir  A.  Every  passage  which,  by  contracting  the  way,  diminishes 
the  front  of  troops  in  line  or  column. 

Q.  What  is  a plateau? 

A.  The  summit  of  a mountain,  on  which  position  may  be  taken. 

Q.  What  is  a crest?  .... 

flj  A.  A mountain  top  on  which  a position  cannot  be  taken, 

militarily  speaking. 

ioi  Q.  What  are  declivities  of  a mountain? 

A.  Its  opposite  slopes, 
o Q.  What  is  a causeway? 

ill  A.  A road  raised  above  the  surface  of  impassable  ground. 

«lj  Q.  What  is  a position? 

ec  A.  Ground  iwhich  offers  to  troops  the  means  of  fighting  with 
advantage,  even  with  inferior  forces  (Jacquinot  de  Presles). 

Q.  What  is  the  best  offensive  position? 
lolj  A.  That  which  is  the  most  threatening  to  the  enemy,  and 

ii  most  favorable  for  our  attack  upon  him. 

Q.  What  is  the  best  defensive  position? 
hi  A.  That  which  offers  the  greatest  number  of  impassible  ob- 
:«l  stacks  to  the  attacks  of  the  enemy. 

Si  Q.  Is  it  indispensable  for  a light  cavalry  officer  to  know  how 
to  sketch? 

A.  As  indispensable  as  to  know  how  to  write. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because,  often  with  two  lines  he  can  say  more  and  say 
it  better  than  in  two  pages  of  writing;  because  a few  pencil 
ii  marks  can  be  made  more  quiokly  and  iwith  less  trouble  than  a 
report  can  be  written;  because  they  preserve  and  classify  the  de- 
ls tails  of  a report  much  better  than  can  be  done  by  the  mere 

id  I recollections  of  a long  reconnaissance. 

[hi  Q.  Does  not  sketching  offer  still  other  advantages? 

(i  A.  Yes,  an  infinite  number  for  military  purposes;  it  ac- 

customs one  to  observe  and  see  clearly,  to  appreciate  distances, 
inn  the  nature  of  the  ground,  to  recall  again  to  the  mind  what  has 

ill;  been  observed,  and  especially  to  estimate  the  possibility,  rapidity 

ti  and  fitness  of  proposed  operations. 

Uin  Q.  Are  there  yet  others? 

ml  A.  Yes,  for  the  distinguished  officer — that  of  givng  great 

in  facility  in  judging  the  positions,  the  moral  impressions,  of  the 
[|fl  men  he  commands. 

Q.  An  example  of  personal  local  recollection  will  make  the 

,|t  matter  plainer. 

il  A.  The  enemy  is  some  leagues  distant;  an  officer  sets  out  to 
reconnoitre  him.  He  observes  very  carefully  the  road  he  travels, 
Dul  for,  in  case  of  attack  in  front,  it  will  be  the  most  direct  by  which 
II  to  return;  but,  at  the  same  time,  he  bears  carefully  in  mind  the 
roads,  paths,  the  practicable  ground  upon  the  flanks  which 

Hu  join  the  road  he  passes  over,  in  order  that,  if  cut  off  in  his  re- 
treat, he  may  profit  by  his  knowledge  of  them  to  thwart  the 

manoeuvers  of  the  enemy,  and  by  making  a deto'..'  return  to  his 
support  at  the  point  of  departure. 

Before  him  is  a bare  and  level  plain.  There  are  two  villages  close 
together,  and  they  have  almost  the  same  appearance,  but  the 
church  spire  of  one  is  pointed,  the  other  rounded  at  its  summit, 
I*  and  it  is  upon  the  former  that  he  directs  his  march.  He  comes 
Pi  to  a wood  where  there  are  two  reads  of  equal  width  opening 


27 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


upon  a copse  of  symmetrical  form.  There  is  a boundary  stone 
upon  the  right  of  the  one  he  must  follow;  he  advances,  crosses 
a pool,  and  reaches  a quincunx.  Six  similar  roads  meet  there. 
On  the  right  of  that  which  he  leaves  is  a tall,  dead  tree;  on  the 
left  of  the  one  he  is  to  take  is  a post.  He  continues  his  march; 
a clearing  appears  on  his  right;  the  wood  becomes  thicker  and 
thicker;  still  he  goes  on  until  an  open  stile  appears  in  front  of 
him;  at  the  side  of  it  is  a clump  of  broom  plants  in  flower,  a 
deep  ditch,  newly  dug,  a pile  of  broken  stones,  and  a tall,  soli- 
tary poplar  tree.  On  coming  out  of  the  wood  he  finds  himself 
again  on  an  open  plain.  After  he  has  marched  for  ten  minutes 
the  enemy  appears  in  force  and  compels  his  prompt  retreat.  The 
guide  takes  advantage  of  the  moment  of  surprise  to  make  his 
escape.  The  officer  commanding  the  reconnaissance  is  dependent 
upon  his  recollection  of  the  forms  and  outlines  of  the  objects 
passed  in  coming,  which  will  be  made  all  the  more  vivid  by  the 
habit  of  sketching,  which  has  engraved  them  on  his  memory; 
and  the  practice  of  frequently  looking  behind  him  has  enabled 
him  to  recognize  them  under  their  two  aspects. 

He  knows  that  in  returning  he  will  find  on  his  right  those 
which  were  on  his  left,  and  on  his  left,  those  which  were  on  his 
right.  The  poplar,  the  pile  of  broken  stones,  the  newly-dug 
ditch,  the  clump  of  green  and  yellow  broom  plants,  then  the  open 
stile,  then  the  dark  wood,  then  the  post,  then  the  tall  dead  tree, 
then  the  pool,  then  the  boundary  stone,  then  the  pointed  spire,  are 
the  markers  which  guide  him  back  to  camp. 

The  habit  of  sketching  gives  to  the  memory  a power  which 
might  be  well  called  instinctive — that  of  seizing,  in  spite  of  one's 
self,  and  without  being  distracted  by  other  thoughts,  upon  the 
form  and  color  of  the  objects  which  present  themselves  before 
him.  The  first  example  is  based  simply  upon  the  outlnes  of 
objects.  I shall  now  give  you  one  where  the  colors  will  serve 
as  well  as  their  silhouettes. 

A partisan  at  the  head  of  a hundred  troopers,  leaves  his 
bivouac  at  the  break  of  day.  He  is  in  an  open  plain,  and  desires 
to  conceal  his  march  from  the  enemy.  A black,  thin  line  ap- 
pears on  his  right;  can  it  be  the  enemy?  That  would  certainly 
be  astonishing,  for  reconnaisance  made  in  this  direction  during  the 
night  have  not  encountered  him.  In  the  first  place,  the  front  of 
this  line  is  not  placed  in  a proper  manner,  as  it  in  no  place  faces 
our  troops.  Let  us  see.  The  line  does  not  budge.  Is  it  infantry 
or  cavalry  in  line?  No,  for  the  line  is  not  cut  by  regular  intervals 
of  equal  width,  and  besides,  the  upper  part,  although  nearly 
parallel  to  the  lower,  is,  nevertheless,  notched.  Can  it  be  a 
wood?  No;  the  line  is  too  thin.  What  is  it  then.  Simply  a 
hedge.  It  is  long,  continuous  and  high  enough  to  conceal  a 
column  of  troops.  He  marches  to  it,  skirts  along  it.  keeping  it 
between  him  and  the  enemy.  On  reaching  the  end  of  it,  he  sees 
at  half  a league's  distance  a village  whose  name  the  guide  gives 
him,  and  which  lies  upon  the  road  he  is  to  follow,  but  he  cannot 
reach  it  without  being  perceived.  He  halts,  and  observes  that  the 
mists  raised  by  the  sun  are  more  dense  and  heavy  on  his  right, 
and  are  prolonged  in  a winding  course  towards  the  village.  Their 
gray  outline  becomes  thinner  every  moment,  and  extends  par- 
allel and  pretty  close  to  the  right  flank  of  his  column.  He  decides 
that  it  can  be  produced  only  by  the  presence  of  a small  stream 
running  in  the  bottom  of  a valley. 

He  turns  off  directly  to  the  right,  marches  perpendicularly  upon 
it  so  as  to  mask  his  movement  by  the  hedge  he  is  leaving,  and 
arrives  in  the  bottom,  turns  to  the  left,  follows  the  stream,  and 
Cains  the  village. 


28 


THE  STUDY  OF  THE  TERRAIN 


i After  having  skirted  along  some  orchards  for  a quarter  of  an 
, hour,  the  plain  is  again  in  sight.  To  the  left  a thin  line,  white 
and  short,  disappears  in  the  green  and  brown  tints  of  the  plain, 
and  reappears  again  a league  farther  on.  It  is  the  road  A-B 
j which  he  is  to  travel,  but  the  question  is.  What  direction  does 
f it  follow  between  the  two  points  where  it  is  visible?  A moving 
i wagon  by  the  dust  it  raises  in  its  course,  will  show  him.  He 
. observes  carefully  the  course  pursued  by  the  vehicle,  and  after  it 

I has  passed  beyond  the  point  which  it  is  especially  desirable  to 

i know,  he  moves  toward  it  and  takes  the  road. 

, He  descends  the  hill,  and  discovers  in  the  distance  a iwood. 

■ He  observes  it  attentivly,  and  perceives  that  its  right  side  differs 
[ in  color  from  the  left.  The  first  is  a dark  green  mingled  with 
i bluish  tints;  the  second  is  generally  of  a paler  green;  its 
, shadows  are  not  so  deep,  and  here  and  there  they  are  interrupted 
by  white  tree-trunks.  He  does  not  hesitate  to  march  towards  the 
j left  side  of  the  wood,  which  is  evidently  planted  with  acacias  and 
birches  which  only  grow  upon  poor,  dry  and  firm  soils,  easy  to 
travel  over;  while  the  right  side  is  composed  of  alders  and  willows, 

' which  always  indicate  marshy  and  impracticable  ground. 

1 He  reaches  the  mountain  covered  with  fir-trees,  goes  on,  and 
1 all  at  once  the  dark-green  forest  becomes  thinner,  and  permits 

1 him  to  see  through  the  trees  a tint  of  paler  green  bordering  upon 
1 a blue;  there  is  without  a doubt,  the  location  of  the  ravine  of  X, 

1 at  the  bottom  of  which  runs  the  torrent  of  Q.  He  turns  to  the 
left  and  sees  the  plain  again. 

i The  more  undefined  the  color  of  the  horizon,  and  the  more  it 
i merges  into  that  of  the  sky,  the  more  distant  it  is;  the  more 
clearly  it  is  defined  and  stands  out  from  the  color  of  the  sky, 
and  harmonizes  with  that  of  the  foreground,  the  nearer  it  is. 

This  observation  is  the  basis  of  all  aerial  perspective.  We 
i should  accustom  our  eyes  and  our  judgment  to  make  with  cer- 
tainty, and  to  rectify,  the  estimates  which  this  perspective  indi- 
cates to  us.  It  may  be  easily  done  on  every  march,  for  nothing 
is  simpler  than  to  estimate  the  distance  from  the  point  where 
one  may  be,  to  any  point  whatever  towards  which  he  marches, 
then  to  regulate  the  speed  of  his  march;  on  arriving,  one  can 
tell  by  consulting  his  watch  whether  his  estimate  is  correct  or  not. 

The  air  is  blue,  therefore  the  greater  its  mass  between  you 
and  any  point  whatever,  the  more  that  point  will  partake  of  the 
blue  of  the  sky.  With  a little  attention  in  making  comparisons, 
with  practice,  taking  as  a base  the  general  scale  of  gradations 
of  light  and  shade,  in  going  from  any  point  where  he  may  be,  to 
the  horizon,  he  may  calculate  surely  and  promptly  the  whole  and 
intermediate  distances. 

I The  partisan  quits  the  wood  and  descends  into  the  plain.  The 
enemy  surprises  and  attacks  him,  seizes  upon  the  road  by  which 
he  came,  and  forces  him  to  take  to  some  meadows  on  his  left. 
These  meadows  are  green,  but  to  the  left  their  color  is  almost 
blue,  and  willows  grow  on  their  borders,  to  the  right,  on  the  con- 
i trary,  they  are  of  a deep  green.  The  partisan  withdraws  rapidly 
to  the  right,  for  he  knows  that  when  the  green  of  a meadow  has 
a bluish  tint,  it  is  because  the  meadows  contain  rushes,  which 
always  indicate  the  presence  of  water,  or  turfy  ground,  from  which 
it  would  be  difficult,  perhaps,  to  extricate  his  horses,  if  once 
mired  in  them;  while  meadows  of  a deep-green  color  are  evidence 
)f  firm,  dry  ground.  Continuing,  he  skirts  the  bank  of  a stream 
which  appears  to  be  deep,  and  over  which  no  bridge  is  to  be  seen 
All  at  once  a broad  track  is  seen  to  cut  the  turf  which  borders 
the  stream,  appears  again  upon  the  other  side,  running  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  course  of  the  water.  It  is  certainly  a road, 
ind  must  indicate  a ford.  In  fact,  he  tries  it  confidently,  for 


29 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


the  water  is  not  so  green  at  this  spot.  The  brown,  pebbl 
bottom  can  be  seen,  and  determines  his  route.  Once  separate, 
from  the  enemy  by  this  obstacle,  judging  that  having  bee  ; 
discovered,  his  expedition  can  no  longer  hope  to  succeed,  an.  I 

that  the  chances  of  loss  are  more  numerous  than  those  o ' 
success,  he  makes  a detour,  and  consulting  the  course  of  tb 
sun,  and  the  successive  indications  which  his  memory  of  tlv 
locality  recalls  to  him,  he  returns  to  camp. 

Q.  Should  a light-cavalry  officer  then  learn  to  sketch  I | 
order  to  observe  well,  and  take  a course  of  topography? 

A.  It  is  indispensable,  if  he  wishes  to  become  a distir  , 
guished  officer.  I believe  that  this  course  should  even  err 
brace  some  knowledge  of  colored  aerial  perspective.  In  cu 
tivating  his  talent  for  topographical  drawing,  the  officer  wi 
find  numerous  opportunities  of  being  extremely  useful  to  th  i 
generals  of  the  advanced  guard,  and  of  making  a reputatlo 
whioh  will  hasten  his  well-deserved  advancement. 

Q.  But  this  course  would  be  a long  one,  and  impractloablj 
in  the  present  state  of  affairs. 

A.  That  is  why  one  should  limit  himself  to  acquiring  , r 
ready  knowledge  of  certain  conventional  signs  whch  may  b - 
lodged  in  his  memory  in  a few  days,  be  easily  found  at  thj 

end  of  his  pencil,  and  whose  employment  would  be  eminentll- 

useful  in  strengthening  his  reports  of  reconnaissance. 

Q.  What  is  topography,  properly  so  called. 

A.  It  is  the  basis  of  all  military  operations.  Its  stud 

cannot  be  too  thorough.  Whatever  knowledge  one  may  hav|.\ 
acquired  of  the  enemy,  whatever  force  he  may  have  at  hi! 
disposal,  every  enterprise,  no  matter  what  its  nature,  depenol.: 
for  its  execution  upon  a knowledge  of  the  terrain.  (L.R.A.  1 

Q.  Should  a light-cavalry  officer  put  entire  confidence  i| 
the  maps  furnished  him? 

A.  No;  he  should  consider  them  rather  as  useful  guide! 
than  as  actual  reproductions  of  existing  conditions.  He  shoulj 
never  fail  to  correct  the  errors  which  may  have  slipped  int 
his  maps,  and  to  add  the  useful  details  which  they  do  nci 

give.  He  must  remember  that  the  older  the  map,  the  let, 
exact  it  is;  for,  often  in  a few  years,  villages  disappear 

others  are  joined  and  take  new  names,  roads  change  the  . 

direction,  streams  have  their  courses  modified,  ponds  are  draine1’ 
and  devoted  to  agriculture,  fords  are  replaced  by  bridges,  bridg. 
are  taken  down  and  rebuilt  at  more  distant  points,  lane!, 

become  covered  with  forests,  with  heather,  with  marshe:!! 

fields,  vineyards,  meadows,  interchange  their  uses,  and,  co 
sequently,  their  topographical  features.  It  should  be  also  r 
membered  that  the  small  scale  upon  which  most  maps  a 
constructed  must  often  entail  errors.  So,  I repeat,  an  office, 

should  consider  the  maps  sent  to  him  as  very  useful  guide  Z. 
especially  as  to  the  direction  of  his  march,  but  entire  coi 
fidence  should  not  be  reposed  in  their  details. 

Q.  Indicate  the  conventional  topographical  signs  which  yc 
say  are  easy  to  make  and  remember. 

A.  I shall  do  so,  by  first  tracing  the  signs  separate!; 
then  by  collecting  them  in  a general  example,  which  will  i ; 
employed  in  the  chapters  on  Reoonnaissances  and  Report  . 
An  officer  should  have  a large  sheet  of  paper  in  order  i r 
trace,  according  to  scale,  the  plan  of  his  march.  This  pla  - 
can  almost  always  be  drawn  to  a scale  which  should  not  be  t<  ■ 
small,  because  it  will  be  possible  to  dismount  whenever  ar 
sketching  is  to  be  done.  He  can  even  do  his  sketching  whi. 
mounted,  if  the  sheet  be  folded  beforehand,  in  a convenlei  . 
manner,  so  that  it  can  be  brought  under  the  pencil  succ$r. 


30 


OBSERVATION 


sively  and  partially,  as  needed,  and  that  the  paper  already 
used  be  folded  back  gradually  and  successively,  so  as  to  be 
■eplaced  by  clean  paper  drawn  out;  but  the  small  leaves  of  a 
rocket-book  will  suffice  if  care  be  taken  to  follow  them  in 
■egular  order,  page  by  page,  always  beginning  at  the  top  or 
bottom  the  drawing  of  the  plan.  It  is  upon  leaves  of  these 

limensions — those  of  a pocketbook — that  I give  you  the  second 
jxample  asked  for. 

Q.  What  care  should  be  taken  in  drawing  the  plans? 

A.  1.  In  beginning  them,  to  have  the  scale  so  small  that 
i single  leaf  will  represent  quite  a large  extent  of  country. 

2.  To  draw  very  fine  lines,  so  as  not  to  confuse  those  which 
Trust  be  drawn  parallel,  but  indicate  different  things. 

3.  To  give  particular  attention  to  the  spelling  of  proper  names. 

4.  To  go  over  the  whole  with  pen  and  ink,  when  there  is  time 
lo  do  so,  to  prevent  the  map  being  rubbed  out. 

5.  To  give  distances  corretly,  by  writing  beside  those  re- 
rted,  or  said  to  be  so  and  ,o,  by  the  inhabitants,  the  time 

which  it  took  to  march  over  them;  for  example,  from  one  point 
-f  interest  to  another  one  would  write  one  league  (one  hour  at 
the  walk),  two  leagues  (two  hours  at  the  trot). 

In  comparing  the  plans  I have  given  you,  with  the  topographical 
drawings  you  have  seen,  you  will  find  the  former  very  coarsely 
drawn,  without  doubt;  that  is  just  what  I wish:  by  simplifying 
the  example  the  copying  is  made  easy.  My  object  is  not  to  make 
draughtsmen  of  you,  but  rather  to  put,  in  the  course  of  a few 
lays,  at  your  fingers’  ends,  the  useful  signs  of  a language  new 
o the  most  of  you — signs  which  will  not  disgust  you  by  the 
lifficulty  of  reproducing  them,  and  of  which  you  will  be  able  to 
nake  immediate  use. 


INDICATIONS. 

Q.  What  means  are  there  of  learning  the  movements  of  the 
nemy  ? 

,,  A.  Four.  1st,  reports  of  prisoners,  deserters,  and  travellers; 
1!™"d,  reports  of  spies;  3rd,  reconnaissances;  4th,  indications. 

Q.  What  enables  you  to  draw  inferences  from  indications? 

A.  A knowledge  of  the  general  customs  of  war,  and  of  the 
eculiarities  of  the  enemy.  It  can  be  done  only  by  practising 
onstantly  the  closest  observation.  Indications  are  general  or 
pecial, 

0-  Designate  the  general  indications. 

A.  If  it  is  learned  that  shoes  have  been  distributed  in  the 
antonments,  that  the  troops  are  cleaning  their  arms,  that  draught 
nimals  have  been  collected,  those  are  infallible  signs  of  some 
ind  of  movement.  To  learn  that  great  quantities  of  supplies 
ave  arrived,  that  new  uniforms  have  appeared  in  the  bivouacs, 
proof  that  new  troops  are  going  to  join  the  old  ones  to  unite 
rith  them  in  an  attack  very  soon;  for  It  is  probable  that  the  new 
niforms  are  those  of  a headquarters  staff,  or  billeting  officers, 
hould  provisions  be  collected  at  a particular  place  it  is  proof 
hat  troops  are  to  occupy  it.  If  boats  are  brought  from  a dis- 
ance,  and  collected  in  large  numbers  on  the  banks  of  a stream, 
'llJt  is  evidence  of  an  approaching  attempt  at  crossing;  if  they  are 
“urned,  it  is  evidence  of  an  undisguised  retreat.  If  timbers  are 
jollected  upon  the  bank  of  a stream  where  there  are  no  boats, 
Ms  also  an  indication  of  an  attempt  at  crossing.  If  important 
ridges  are  burned,  it  is  an  indication  of  a long  retreat.  If,  at 
>me  leagues  above  a bridge  which  you  have  just  constructed,  large 


31 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


boats,  heavily  laden  with  stone,  are  discovered,  it  is  an  indicati 
of  an  attempt  to  destroy  your  work,  which  you  can  prevent  01 
by  getting  in  front  of  them  to  ground,  secure  or  sink  them, 
poles  tarred  and  covered  with  straw,  are  placed  at  intervals  alo 
the  enemy’s  line,  it  is  an  indication  of  a signal  for  a general  mo 
ment.  If  ladders  are  collected  in  bivouac,  it  is  an  indication 
an  intended  attack  upon  a fortified  place. 

If,  on  the  battlefield,  the  enemy  conceals  his  movements,  a r 
masses  his  troops  in  deep  and  heavy  columns  of  squadrons,  it 
an  indication  of  an  overwheming  attack.  If  he  deploys,  he  ^ 
taking  up  a position.  If,  in  deploying,  and  in  first  line,  he  r, 
sembles  numerous  columns  upon  a particular  point,  it  is  an  v 
dication  of  the  idea  which  will  govern  all  his  future  movemen  * 
for  without  a doubt  that  point  is  considered  a strategical  o 
If  the  artillery  makes  a retrograde  movement,  it  is  an  indicati 
of  retreat.  If  the  hospitals  and  small  depots  are  moved  fartf  'n 
to  the  rear,  it  is  an  indication  of  a retreat  or  change  of  fro  s 

If  the  bivouac  fires  of  the  enemy  appear  to  be  much  me  - 
numerous  but  smaller  than  usual,  and  purposely  placed  so  as  ic 
make  them  distinctly  visible,  if  they  are  lighted  successively,  a * 
promptly  extinguished  after  having  been  lighted,  it  is  an  indi*  z 
tion  of  weakness  and  retreat.  If  the  enemy’s  cavalry,  in  retre  * 
without  being  vigorously  pressed,  hastily  withdraws  its  line  * 
skirmishers,  it  is  either  an  indication  of  fear  caused  by  the  pre  c. 
imity  of  a defile,  and  dread  of  an  attack,  or  an  indication  of  ( 
ambuscade  into  which  it  desires  to  draw  the  pursuers.  If  t . 
enemy  attacks  at  break  of  day,  it  is  an  indication  that  l,. 

movements  will  be  general,  and  that  he  will  need  the  wh<  r; 
day  either  to  follow  up  his  advantages  or  to  make  good  his  retre 
An  attack  made  in  the  evening  is  an  indication  that  the  or  > 
object  of  the  movement  is  to  make  a reconnaissance  or  to  co'  |r 
a retreat;  the  reality  of  this  second  movement  may  be  me  c 
correctly  determined  if  it  be  executed  by  the  cavalry  only, 
the  reconnaissance  be  energetically  executed,  and  the  enei  r 
remains  for  the  night  in  front  of  the  opening  of  a defile,  it  * 
dicates  a vigorous  attack  on  the  following  day.  If  on  the  cc  * 
trary,  he  retires  and  resumes  his  position,  it  indicates  either  a i 
treat,  as  I said  before,  or  a desire  to  attract  attention  to 
particular  point,  and  to  make  us  less  vigilant  in  regard  to  othe  fc 
The  traces  of  footsteps  are  not  only  an  indication  of  t l: 

direction  taken  by  a column,  but  also  of  its  strength,  and  ev  r 
of  the  leading  idea  controlling  its  march.  If  the  ground  be  beat  "• 
down  evenly,  the  column  is  composed  of  infantry  only;  if  ho  ir 
tracks  are  visible,  cavalry  formed  a part  of  it;  deep  and  wi  k r 
wheel-tracks  would  indicate  that  the  troops  were  accompani  * 
by  artillery.  The  numbers  of  each  arm  were  in  proportion 

the  number  of  well-defined  impressions  left  by  it.  If  the  trac  ^ 
be  fresh,  the  column  passed  not  long  before:  if  they  have  lit  s 
width,  the  troops  were  marching  without  fear  of  attack,  and  * 
route  column;  if  broad  they  feared  an  attack,  for  they  wi  k 
marching  by  platoon  or  squadron  and  preoared  to  deploy.  ‘ _ 
the  grain, and  the  ground  on  the  sides  of  the  road  are  tramp 
down  and  show  wide  and  numerous  traces  of  moving  bodies,  1 r 
cavalry  was  marching  on  the  flanks,  by  squadrons,  and  in  echel*  B 
Behind  the  bridge,  in  a ravine,  near  a village,  the  footprints  * 
show  whether  the  enemy  has  formed  up,  whether  he  has  been  . 
the  lookout.  The  fires  will  serve  as  a check  in  estimating  1 ' 

force  indicated  by  the  footprints,  also  the  time  which  has  elaps 

6inc.e.  the  enemy  left  his  bivouac;  the  quantity  of  ashes  • 

maining,  the  care  he  had  time  to  give  to  the  construction  1 
shelters,  the  remains  of  straw,  fragments  of  vessels,  entrails 


32 


OBSERVATION 


nimals  slaughtered,  will  show  still  better  how  long  he  remained 
1 it. 

Pieces  of  clothing,  saddlery,  equipments,  abandoned  arms,  cart- 
idges  thrown  away,  dead  horses,  blood  stained  clothing,  hidden 
raves,  and  the  care  taken  in  digging  them,  are  all  valuable  means 
arriving  at  a knowledge  of  the  regiments  composing  the 
iclumns;  of  their  fatigue  and  discouragement,  of  the  number 
wounded  carried  away  with  them,  of  the  gravity  of  their 
grounds,  and  of  the  rank  of  the  officers  lost. 

The  dust  raised  by  the  march  of  a column  indicates  not  cnly 
:s  direction,  but  also  its  strength,  its  order,  and  the  kinds  of 
oops  composing  it.  The  greater  or  less  density,  height,  and 
nobility  of  the  cloud  will  show  whether  made  by  cavalry  or 
fantry. 

If  the  reflection  of  the  arms  is  very  bright,  it  is  probable  that 
tie  enemy  is  facing  you,  if  otherwise,  that  he  has  his  back  to- 
wards you.  If  the  hostile  troops  are  very  far  away,  and  you  wish 
,nfj  knoiw  in  what  direction  they  are  marching,  take  two  fixed  points 
i front  of  them  and  on  one  of  their  flanks;  then  you  can  easily 
jdge  by  their  passage  over  successive  distances,  which  separate 
ihem  from  these  points,  their  direction,  and  even  their  rate  of 
larching. 

iJf  The  excitement  or  insolence  of  the  inhabitants  of  an  insurgent 
juntry  is  a sure  indication  of  the  approach  of  the  enemy  and  the 
'•eoples  confidence  in  his  success. 

Q.  Name  some  special  indications. 

A.  Since,  today,  fifteen  years  of  peace  have  removed  the 
^ontiers,  that  communication  between  different  nations  is  frequent 
nd  easy,  that  the  sciences  in  their  latest  developments  are  com- 
mon to  all,  the  special  indications  in  war  are  less  numerous,  because 
ney  belong,  on  the  one  hand,  to  a people  which  has  lost  its 
istinguishing  characteristics,  and,  on  the  other,  to  a science  which 
as  no  longer  secrets  for  any  one.  However,  certain  differences 
o still  exist,  which  I shall  endeavor  to  specialize,  while  pointing 
i")ut  the  amount  or  degree  of  confidence  which  should  or  should 
ot  be  placed  in  them. 

The  Russians,  trusting  to  their  numerous  and  excellent  irregular 
ravalry,  take  few  precautions  for  safety  behind  the  line  which 
forms  in  advance  of  their  army;  hence,  if  you  can  turn  their 
wbossacks  and  conceal  yourself  from  their  lynx  eyes  (which  is  not 
Ifasily  done),  it  is  more  than  probable  that  you  will  succeed  in 
isny  surprise  you  may  undertake  against  their  regiments  of  the 
4ne.  The  vigilance  of  the  Cossacks  is  then  no  sign  of  the 
lertness  of  the  other  troops  of  the  Russian  army.  The  numerous 
w|i firmishers  which  the  Cossacks  put  out  in  their  front  are  no  cer- 
tain indication  of  the  forces  which  they  cover.  The  Cossacks, 
odel  light  cavalry  as  they  are,  true  to  the  real  object  of  their 
■ganization,  always  making  war  in  open  order,  keep  but  small 
iserves;  while  other  European  troops  may  be  counted,  so  to  speak, 
y the  number  of  their  skirmishers;  a squadron  deployed  as 
kirmishers  indicating  as  a rule  in  the  regular  armies  of  Europe, 
force  of  at  least  five  or  six  squadrons  behind  it. 

Experience  in  war  makes  it  easy  to  recognize,  at  great  dis- 
inces,  the  nationality  of  the  troops  opposed  to  you;  the  more  or 
ss  perfect  alignment,  the  form  of  the  columns,  give  to  experi- 
rced  eyes  almost  certain  indications,  even  today,  notwithstanding 
fact  that  almost  all  northern  armies  have  adopted  the  gray 
loak  and  low  shako.  If  the  troops  do  not  wear  their  cloaks  it 
still  easier  to  distinguish  between  them.  The  colors  adopted 
^Jith  few  exceptions,  by  the  continental  nations  are:  Russia,  green; 
ngland.  red;  Austria,  white;  Prussia,  Spain,  Wurtemberg  and 
ie  small  German  States,  dark  blue;  Bavaria,  sky  blue.  Add  to 


33 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


that  the  tints  of  their  accoutrements,  the  colors  of  their  trouse 
heights  of  their  shakos,  the  forms  of  their  masses,  and  there  « F 
be  no  uncertainty. 

The  Cossacks  are  the  best  light  cavalry  in  Europe,  the  one  whi 
most  fully  accomplishes  the  object  for  which  it  is  maintain  1 
(which  should  be  that  of  all  light  cavalry).  That  is  due 
their  possessing  the  combined  instincts  of  the  wolf  and  the  fi  ‘ 
their  habit  of  making  war,  their  fine  physical  condition,  and  t ‘ 
strength  of  their  horses. 

After  the  Cossacks  come  the  Poles,  certain  Prussian  and  Hi 
garian  regiments,  the  French,  the  Belgians,  the  Bavarians,  I ' 
WurtemLergers,  the  Saxons,  the  Germans  of  the  Rhine,  I 
English,  the  Peitmontese,  the  Spaniards,  and  the  Dutch.  We  ■ 
not  so  skillful  as  brave,  which  is  owing  to  a number  of  conditic  ; 
easily  pointed  out  and  still  more  easily  corrected;  but  bravi  '■ 
is  a great  weight  in  the  balance  of  war,  and  only  too  of) 
charged  with  the  duty  of  saving  the  day  or  driving  home  a succe 

The  nations  who  have  a good  and  numerous  cavalry  constan 
harass  the  hostile  army,  which  they  sometimes  succeed  in  ■; 
moralizing,  and,  on  the  field  of  battle,  threaten  their  artillery  w 
captuie;  one  must  then  modify  his  tactics  to  suit  theirs,  a , 
have  no  hard-and-fast  general  rules  of  war  which  would  only  se 
to  keep  him  moving  slavishly  in  a disadvantageous  rut.  For  tf 
reason  one  should  fully  understand  with  whom  he  has  to  deal. 

If  the  Cossacks  attack  at  night  it  is  to  prevent  your  sleepir  J. 
to  exhaust  you  by  sleeplessness  rather  than  to  break  throe  rj 
your  lines;  generally  to  show  a bold  front  to  them  is  all  tl 
is  necessary  to  hold  them  in  check.  If  attacked  at  night  i 
Prussian  cavalry  it  is  a more  serious  affair,  and  it  is  not  o ., 
necessary  to  be  ready  to  receive  them,  but  also  be  prepared  r 
manoeuvre  against  them.  Whenever  the  Austrian  Cavalry  ma  - 
a night  attack  you  are  safe  in  assuming  that  it  is  supported 
infantry. 

If,  in  the  daytime,  the  Cossacks  show  themselves  in  force  ur  , 
one  of  your  wings,  but  without  artillery,  it  is  probable  that  tl 
are  not  supported;  if  they  have  guns,  it  is  more  than  likely  t r 
they  are  strongly  supported,  and  it  will  not  be  long  before  tl 
prove  it  to  you  by  the  rapidity  of  their  attack,  outflanking  y . 
wings  and  threatening  your  lines  of  retreat.  If  the  Prussian  cava 
shows  any  artillery  of  small  calibre,  by  pressing  them  clos  • 
you  will  be  able  to  captue  it.  The  calibre  of  the  artillery  fir 
upon  you  is  a certain  indication  of  the  kind  and  strength  of 
troops  which  it  accompanies. 

The  laws  of  morale  and  of  military  discipline  are  different  n 
every  country,  especially  in  regard  to  the  relations  of  soldiers 
the  inhabitants  of  the  country  occupied  by  the  hostile  troo 
What  among  Frenchmen  would  be  called  leaviig  camp  with 
permission,  and  pillaging,  with  tlie  people  of  the  north  is  sim 
foraging.  The  appearance  then  of  Cossacks,  Prussians,  or  H 
garians  in  a village  must  not  lead  one  to  believe  that  they  h . 
come  there  to  reconnoitre.  No;  they  are  probably  there  only  s, 
pillage:  so  keeo  on  your  guard,  but  draw  no  absolute  com  t 
sions  from  their  appearance  at  that  place. 

If  frequent  Russian  and  Prussian  patrols  take  the  same  road 
several  successive  days,  and  especially  if  their  armies  remain  i 
the  same  position  for  some  time,  it  is  an  indication  of  movem 
towards  the  place  reconnoitred. 

If  the  English  cavalry  knew  anything  about  war,  on  a bat 
field  they  would  perhaps  be  the  most  terrible  cavalry  in  Euro  ■ 

their  wellknown  luxury  in  horses  and  equipments  is  in  harm  • 

with  the  beauty  and  courage  of  their  soldiers:  when  they  sf  1 

themselves  you  may  be  sure  that  their  movements  will  be  unii  . 

their  attack  powerful,  and  their  retreat  orderly.  They  are  selc 


34 


GUIDES 


Jparated  from  their  infantry,  which  assures  their  repose  in  bivouac 
ley  learn  more  of  the  position  and  dispositions  of  the  enemy 
,1,  rough  spies,  whom  they  pay  handsomely,  than  through  rec- 
1(inaissances.  If  you  learn  that  they  are  separated  from  their 
fantry,  do  not  hesitate  to  attack  them  by  night.  When  you 
(0 large,  make  a change  of  front  and  attack  them  in  flank.  This 
tanoeuvre  can  always  be  successfully  practised  against  any  enemy 
<e  the  English,  who  make  a vigorous  and  disunited  charge,  whose 
l„irses  are  not  very  manageable,  and  whose  men,  brave  but  unin- 
tructed,  begin  their  charges  too  far  away  from  the  enemy. 

, If  the  Cossacks,  in  their  retreat,  keep  breaking  up  more  and 
Lore  the  longer  you  pursue  them,  do  not  infer  from  that  that 
i,.iey  have  lost  confidence  and  courage,  it  is  their  way  of  retreat- 
,,  g,  and  a very  dangerous  one  for  their  pursuers,  who  may  very 
H ten  have  good  reason  to  repent  of  their  boldness.  If,  on  the 
jjntrary,  other  European  troops  do  not  rally  promptly  in  retreat 
is  proof  of  demoralization,  and  they  must  then  be  vigorously 
Jshed. 

■ Q.  Because  the  northern  infantry  has  been  charged  and  run 
er,  is  it  therefore  in  your  power? 

A.  The  Austrian  infantry  throw  down  their  arms,  and  every 
i.  ldier  claims  to  be  a Pole;  they  will  faithfully  follow  you  as 

“isoners.  The  Prussian  infantry  throw  down  their  arms,  but  take 
. em  again  promptly  if  they  perceive  help  coming..  .The  Russian 
“fantry  lie  down,  allow  the  charge  to  pass,  rise  and  make 

“newed  use  of  their  arms.  The  Austrian  skirmishers,  clothed 
tf  gray,  and  armed  with  carbines  using  forced  balls,  are  lost 

you  press  then  in  the  open;  do  not  hesitate  to  charge  them; 
•'ey  are  yours,  for  they  will  not  have  time  to  reload  their 

“ rbines. 

“ The  truth  can  be  approximately  arrived  at  in  calculations 
* the  strength  of  the  enemy's  force  by  the  number  of  his 

vouac  fires,  by  knowing  iin  advance  that  each  fire  represents  so 
“•any  men,  more  or  less,  according  to  the  nationalities  of  the 

ftbops  in  bivouac. . .This  difference  is  owing,  above  all,  to  very 
ttstinct  national  characteristics,  and  also  to  the  kind  of  cooking 
ttensils  with  which  the  troops  are  provided.  As  a French 

yivouac  fire  would  indicate  an  average  of  ten  men,  so  a Russian 
<iiuld  indicate  four;  a Dutch,  five;  an  English,  six;  the  Austrian 
K'd  German,  six  each. 

iriilt  is  to  be  understood  that  these  calculations  are  only  approx- 
bate,  and  the  brightness  of  the  fire,  indicating  a greater  or 

;s  number  of  men  to  feed  it,  gives  the  most  reliable  of  all 
it  ta. 


GUIDES 

itii 

™Q.  When  should  guides  be  employed? 

I*IA.  Whenever  one  is  not  perfectly  acquainted  with  the 

l>  mtry  in  which  he  is  operating,  and  especially  when  it  is 

it  ssible  to  mount  the  guides,  so  that  the  rate  of  travel  will 

t be  reduced  to  that  of  a pedestrian. 

1 Q.  Should  guides  be  changed? 

ii  A.  So  long  as  they  are  familiar  with  the  country  they  should 
tin  retained  while  the  expedition  lasts,  especially  if  it  is  a 

icate  one. 

jll!Q.  What  should  be  done  if,  on  an  important  expedition 

roijir  guide  find  himself  in  a country  which  he  does  not  know? 
in  A.  Take  another,  but  keep  the  first  one  until  the  end  of 

si  expedition,  so  that  he  may  not  betray  the  object  of  the  march, 
nilfc.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  with  a guide? 

,|<||A.  Their  strictness  should  depend  upon  the  greater  or 

s importance  of  the  expedition.  The  guide  employed,  either 


36 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


r i 


l : 


in  peace  or  war,  for  work  in  rear  of  the  lines  of  operatio 
should  be  allowed  to  march  freely,  and  at  the  head  of  your  colun 

Q.  And  the  guide  iwho  leads  a reconnaissance? 

A.  He  should  march  near  the  commanding  officer,  urn 
the  special  guard  of  a sergeant  and  a corporal  of  cavalry,  * 
will  watch  him  constantly. 

It  must  not  be  forgotten  that,  in  a hostile  country  especial 
a guide  will  always  try  to  escape  from  you  if  he  can  do 
easily  and  without  danger. 

Q.  If  the  guide  is  dismounted,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Fasten  to  his  left  arm  a long  forage  rope,  the  ot 
end  of  which  should  be  attached  to  the  pommel  of  the  corpor;  *, 
saddle;  the  sergeant,  sabre  in  hand,  and  with  uncovered  holstt  , 
marches  by  his  side. 

Q.  If  the  guide  is  mounted,  what  then? 

A.  Fasten  one  of  his  legs  to  the  stirrup  leather,  so  that 
difficult  ground  he  cannot  leap  from  the  saddle  and  escaX. 
then  give  his  bridle  rein  to  the  corporal,  who  marches  on 
left  and  leads  him  thus  while  the  expedition  lasts. 

Q.  Should  the  face  of  the  guide  suddenly  show  signs 
excitement? 

A.  Warn  him  that  if  he  proves  treacherous  he  will  be 
stantly  shot. 

Q.  If  it  is  feared  that  he  is  leading  the  command  into 
ambush? 

A.  Impress  upon  him  the  fact  that  in  marching  at  the  he 
of  the  column,  if  it  should  be  attacked,  he  would  be  the  f; 
one  killed. 

Q.  Why  employ  two  men  to  guard  a guide  already  so  clos  . 
watched  ? 

A.  Because  the  country  traversed  will  often  be  difficult,  i 
in  marching  in  single  file  the  guide  should  be  both  precei 
and  followed. 

Q.  Should  the  guide  be  allowed  to  march  on  a path  runn 
beside  the  road  travelled  by  the  column? 

A.  Generally  he  should  be  compelled  to  march  with 
column,  especially  if  the  country  is  broken,  or  the  road 
along  the  edges  of  woods,  ravines,  large  ditches,  etc. 

Q.  Should  the  charge  of  the  guide  be  entrusted  to  any  n 
commissioned  officer  that  may  be  available? 

A.  No;  but  only  to  one  of  the  most  intelligent,  who  m 
constantly  observe  the  countenance  of  the  guide. 

Q.  Should  conversation  with  the  guide  be  permitted? 

A.  No;  allow  no  one  to  question  him  or  to  answer 
questions  except  those  whom  you  specially  select  to  communic 
with  him;  these  should  be  selected  from  those  best  acquain 
with  the  language  of  the  country,  and  known  to  be  discreet. 

Q.  On  an  important  expedition,  would  you  question  your  gi 
in  the  presence  of  your  detachment? 

A.  No;  privately. 

Q.  How  should  a guide  be  questioned? 

A.  Very  slowly,  and  while  keeping  him  under  the  clos 
scrutiny.  If  he  does  not  fully  understand  the  questions  addre 
to  him,  be  patient,  and  change  them  so  as  to  receive  ansv 
which  will  be  of  some  use. 

Q.  How  should  a guide  be  treated? 

A.  Very  kindly.  Let  him  want  for  nothing;  and  if,  on  y 
return,  you  are  satisfied  with  him,  and  can  do  him  a service, 
pay  him,  do  not  neglect  to  do  so.  Often  in  the  enemy’s  cour 
peasants,  in  order  to  avoid  serving  as  guides,  deny  all  kne 
edge  of  the  roads.  Be  not  deceived  by  this  lying  but  frigt 
and  take  along  with  you  thesq  pretended  Ignoramuses 
hold  them  until  more  useful  guides  can  be  procured. 


36 


BIVOUACS 


BIVOUACS 

n the  chapter  on  charges  I said  that  seasonablene»s  was 
very  genius  of  war,  and  in  this  I repeat  the  remark.  To 
,ze  the  right  moment  for  sleeping  is  as  difficult  as  to  seize 
* proper  one  for  attacking.  The  whole  mechanics  of  war  is 
ted  to  two  things, — fighting  and  sleeping, — expending  and 
airing  one's  strength.  To  preserve  the  indispensible  equilibrium 
this  balance  is  a science.  Often  it  requires  more  skill  to 
vide  troops  with  strength  than  to  expend  it.  In  presence  of 
enemy  the  science  of  resting  their  troops  is  one  which  but 
officers  possess.  Nothing  denotes  a military  coup  d’oeil  more 
"je  prompt,  skilful,  and  thorough. 

?fo  select  a bivouac  is  to  take  up  a military  position.  To 
2P  in  it,  to  find  one’s  self  mounted  in  it  after  having  been 
led  and  refreshed,  prepared  to  undertake  anything  when  the 
my  advances  to  the  attack  is  to  know  one’s  enemy  thoroughly-to 
w him  by  heart.  To  oppose  rested  and  refreshed  troops  to 
®diers,  weakened  and  dispirited  by  privations  and  fatigues, 
'lo  possess  the  advantage  over  them  and  to  have  all  the  chances 
success  in  one’s  favor.  If  you  add  to  this  talent-  the  fruit  of 
ate  aptness  and  of  a sound  experience — the  dash  which  achieves 
drives  home  a success,  you  are  a remarkably  well-equiped 
cer  for  advance-guard  duty. 

).  What  is  the  first  requisite  for  a good  bivouac  for  the 
ance  guard? 

Its  military  position;  its  difficulty  of  access  for  the  enemy; 
facility  for  our  exit  from  it. 

3.  What  is  the  second? 

\.  The  convenience  of  its  location,  and  an  abundance  of 
'plies.  ..  . .... 

In  war  do  you  always  find  these  two  essential  conditions 
*ibined,  and  if  not,  do  you  delay  locating  your  bivouac  until  you 
e found  them? 

The  exigencies  of  the  advanced-guard  duty  are  always 
ssing:  I calculate  them  cooly,  and  though  not  perhaps  com- 
tely  satisfied,  make  my  choice.  If  it  is  more  necessary  to  post 
'self  than  to  rest,  then  I post  myself.  If,  on  the  contrary, 
'are  urgent  to  rest  than  to  post  myself,  I rest.  But  in  the 
:er  case  I endeavor  to  conceal  my  bivouac,  and  remedy  as 
as  possible  the  insufficient  defence  by  scouting  farther  to  the 
nt. 

J.  How  would  you  hastily  choose  a bivouac? 

<t.  If  I should  discover  a village,  I should  establish  myself 
r by  it,  because  I should  feel  sure  of  finding  in  it  provisions 
forage;  there  would  be  a supply  of  water  for  my  horses,  and 
case  of  bad  weather,  I should  expect  to  obtain  some  shelter. 
But  if  there  Is  no  village? 

v.  After  having,  as  in  tfe  previous  case,  subordinated  my 
iallation  to  the  exigencies  of  the  service,  I should  endeavor 
get  near  a small  stream  where  I should  find  all  the  water 

fed;  near  a meadow,  oat  or  barley-field  which  would  furnish 
|jj|ige  for  my  horses;  close  to  an  enclosure  where  they  could  be 
reiijlarly  and  securely  fastened;  near  a potato-field  which  would 
ply  food  for  my  men;  and  within  easy  reach  of  a wood  which 

Id  furnish  pickets,  shade,  and  branches  and  leaves  with 

ch  to  construct  and  cover  our  shelters  and  supply  the 

■uac  fires. 

1.  What  other  essential  condition  should  be  complied  with? 
. That  the  ground  be  firm  and  consequently  healthy.  That 
t«oj  borders  of  the  stream  should  not  be  miry,  in  order  to  avoid 
ijh!  risk  of  losing  horses  in  leading  them  to  water. 

After  having  chosen  your  ground  what  do  you  do? 

I form  the  squadrons  in  line,  facing  the  enemy,  and  in 

37 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


Ei 


order  in  which  1 wish  them  to  be  placed;  then,  setting  out  rr 
self  mounted,  to  reconnoitre  the  position,  I leave  orders  wi 
the  officer  who  replaces  me  in  command  of  the  regiment  or  r 
tachment,  to  dismount  the  command  and  send  out  foraging  parti 
as  soon  as  he  perceives  that  the  grand  guard  has  halted  upon  t 
ground  which  it  is  to  occupy.  This  signal  having  been  givs 

the  troops  dismount,  unbridle,  and  fasten  their  horses — witho 
mixing  them  up — by  squadron,  platoon,  or  squad. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because  in  war  concentration  produces  order,  and  ord 
gives  strength. 

Q.  Having  fastened  the  horses  with  their  ropes,  what  is  to 
done  next? 

A.  The  bridles  are  placed  behind  them,  tied  up  in  s 
a manner  that  they  may  be  easily  undone  and  placed  on  t 
horses'  heads  quickly,  and  suspended  as  far  as  possible,  from  tre 
limbs  or  pickets,  so  as  to  prevent  their  being  trampled  und 
foot,  lost  under  the  forage  soon  to  be  brought  in,  or  requiri 
a long  search  if  needed  in  a hurry.  This  having  been  done,  01 
half  of  the  troopers,  after  having  suspended  their  belts  from  tl 
tree-limbs  or  pickets,  take  their  scythes  and  hatchets  and 
foraging,  if  the  inhabitants  have  not  filled  the  requisitions  mai 
upon  them.  (See  Provisions  and  Forage) 

The  other  half  remove  their  arms,  hang  up  their  belts,  ar 
complete  the  installation.  They  take  the  fire-arms  off  the  hors 
and  place  them  near  their  bridles  and  belts  and  under  shelter 
it  is  raining. 

Q.  Why  remove  the  arms  from  the  horses? 

A.  Because  if  the  horses  should  roll,  they  would  break  ar  : 
destroy  them.  That  done,  a man  remains  behind  the  horses 
prevent  their  fighting,  which  would  result  in  some  of  them  beir  ; 
wounded;  to  prevent  their  rolling,  which  would  break  the  saddle 
the  others  construct  shelters,  and  if  there  is  wood,  light  fin 
in  front  of  them. 

Q.  What  is  the  first  thing  to  be  observed  in  constructing 
shelter? 

A.  That  its  opening  is  towards  the  horses,  so  that  the  me 
may  always  keep  them  in  view. 

Q.  And  the  second? 

A.  That  the  closed  side  is  towards  the  wind. 

Q.  And  the  third? 

A.  That  the  shelter  shall  be  to  the  windward  of  the  fi 
and  not  to  the  leerward,  that  it  may  run  no  risk  of  being  burnec : 

Q.  The  shelter  once  erected,  what  is  to  be  done  then? 

A.  I lay  a board  or  piece  of  wood  on  the  ground,  at 

front  opening  of  the  shelter;  and  fasten  it  with  pegs  to  reta 
the  straw  upon  which  the  men  sleep,  so  that  it  may  not  come 
contact  with  the  fire,  and  thus  set  fire  to  the  shelter. 

Q.  What  next? 

A.  I place  in  the  shelter,  hanging  at  the  head  of  each  mar  r 
his  belts,  arms,  bridle  and  haversack. 

Q.  Why  do  you  put  all  these  things  there? 

A.  So  as  to  keep  them  from  the  rain,  from  accidents,  an 

have  them  within  easy  reach  of  the  men. 

Q.  How  do  you  light  your  fire? 

A.  The  wood  being  prepared.  I strike  my  hint,  light  tn 

tinder,  place  it  in  a piece  of  paper  loosely  rolled  and  twisted  up  i 
a wisp  of  straw,  and  by  a to-and-fro  motion,  like  that  employe 
in  stirring  a salad,  produce  a flame  which  ignites  the  paper  an 

0.  The  fire  being  lighted,  what  then? 

A.  Bring  water  in  the  pails,  and  put  the  kettles  on  the  fire 


tf 


38 


BIVOUACS 


the  kettles  are  made  of  tin,  they  must  be  entirely  filled,  other- 
se  the  solder  will  be  melted. 

Q.  What  is  done  upon  the  return  of  the  foragers? 

A.  The  forage  and  provisions  are  usually  placed  beside  the 
is, the  different  articles  in  separate  piles.  The  forage  is  fed 
the  horses  a small  quantity  at  a time,  so  that  it  may  not  be 
isted;  the  meat  is  put  into  the  kettles,  and  duties  are  assigned 
the  different  members  of  the  squad.  Some  watch  the  horses, 
ne  feed  them,  some  rub  them  down  with  wisps  of  straw,  some 
^spare  the  soup,  some  clean  the  vegetables,  some  guard  against 
nger  from  the  fires  of  the  neighboring  shelters;  others  go  for 
iish  supplies  of  wood,  others  for  forage;  others  make  necessary 
>airs  to  the  saddlery,  arms  and  clothing,  and  clean  soiled  arms; 

keep  on  the  alert  for  the  sound  of  the  trumpet, 
irhe  camp  duties  regulated,  supplies  provided,  the  soup  on  the 
i,  the  horses  dried,  the  order  is  given  to  lead  to  water,  suc- 
jisively,  by  platoon  or  squadron.  On  returning  from  watering, 
girths  are  unfastened,  and  the  saddles  enclosed  shifted  on 
horses  backs.  That  done,  only  the  men  necessary  to  watch  the 
' ses  feed  them  and  look  after  the  soup-kettles,  are  kept  awake. 
* others  wrap  themselves  in  their  cloaks,  lie  down  and  go  to 
5 sp.  When  the  soup  is  ready,  the  squad  is  awakened  to  eat 
1(1  is  well  as  their  meat;  what  remains  of  the  meat  must  bs 

efully  stowed  aiway  in  the  haversack. 

*lf,  at  daybreak,  “to  horse”  is  not  sounded,  the  horses  are  led 
le  water,  the  saddlery  inspected,  and  that  which  is  injured,  re- 
red;  the  horses  are  groomed  without  unsaddling,  the  saddles 
ng  merely  readjusted.  The  supply  of  provisions  and  forage  is 
lenished,  the  soup  kettles  are  refilled  and  placed  on  the  fire, 
” I all  go  to  sleep,  if  possible.  In  a campaign  one  should  sleep 
} eat  whenever  practicable  to  do  so. 
i"J.  But  if  one  is  not  sleepy? 

aA.  No  matter;  he  must  try  to  sleep  just  the  same. 
rl?.  If  you  have  no  bread  to  put  into  your  soup? 

If  you  have  flour,  make  dough  or  cakes  of  it;  if  not,  take 
grain  you  have,  grind  it  between  two  stones,  and  make  dough 
the  meal. 

If  you  have  no  kettle  in  which  to  make  soup? 

\.  Cut  up  your  meat,  and  toast  it  on  the  end  of  a stick. 

J.  Of  what  should  the  bivouac  guard  be  composed? 
l.  Of  a greater  or  less  number  of  men,  according  to  the 
ngth  of  the  command  in  bivouac;  it  should  never  have  less 
in  h one  non-commissioned  officer,  one  trumpeter,  and  four  privates, 
ml.  Where  is  it  placed? 

t.  At  the  center  of  the  bivouac,  near  the  hut  of  the  colonel, 
Mother  commanding  officer, 
ai  |i.  What  are  its  duties? 

ill.  To  furnish  a sentinel  for  the  entrance  of  the  bivouao,  on 
side  toward  the  grand  guard.  When  the  regiment  is  united, 
guard  is  composed  of  ten  men  and  commanded  by  a non- 
111  ^missioned  officer,  and  furnishes  a sentinel  for  the  entrance  of 
bivouac,  and  one  other  who  is  posted  over  the  arms,  and 
hut  of  the  colonel.  A captain  commands  the  police  guard 
>r  l;he  bivouac. 

I).  What  are  the  duties  of  the  police-guard? 

To  take  charge  of  men  undergoing  punishment,  to  exe- 
Is  orders  of  the  commander  in  regard  to  the  police-guard,  to 
11  >n  the  alert  durng  the  night,  reporting  any  suspicious  noises 
I*  -d,  especially  those  coming  from  the  side  of  the  enemy,  and 
al  mmediately  call  the  colonel  if  necessary.  The  orders  to  the 
imand  are  given  through  the  trumpeter  of  the  guard. 

, i.  Where  are  the  horses  of  the  dismounted  members  of  the 
-d  kept? 


39 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


Q. 

A. 

0. 

A. 


A.  They  remain  with  their  platoons,  where  they  are  tat 
care  of. 

Q.  What  rules  are  to  be  observed  in  feeding  the  horses? 

A.  The  chapter  on  Forage  and  Provisions  will  give  them. 

Q.  How  many  men  may  be  conveniently  accommodated  for 
one  fire  or  shelter? 

A.  From  eight  to  ten,  because  one  kettle  will  suffice  for  th 
cooking,  and  there  will  be  men  enough  to  perform  every  kind 
duty  necessary  for  their  comfort.  Let  the  men  remember  that 
bivouac  a mutuality  of  duty,  an  equality  of  fatigue  duty,  shot 
be  strictly  provided  for,  and  enforced:  and  no  soldier  should 
pect  from  another  any  service  greater  than  that  which  he  is  will 
to  render  in  return. 

Q.  How  do  the  officers  live  in  bivouac? 

A.  By  themselves,  according  to  squadrons,  if  serving 
gether;  if  separated,  they  may  mess  with  their  men;  but  in  t 
case  they  must  not  only  put  all  their  own  provisions,  but  sor 
thing  in  addition,  into  the  kettle  whose  contents  they  share. 
Who  constructs  the  shelters  of  the  officers? 

Themselves,  assisted  by  the  men  who  share  them  with  the 
Who  repairs  their  things? 

Themselves,  or  their  servants.  An  officer's  servant 
obliged  only  to  feed  and  groom  the  officer’s  horse;  if  he  dc  r 
more,  it  is  of  his  own  free  !wi‘ 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  an  officer  or  non-commissior 

officer  in  bivouac? 

A.  If  not  ordered  on  some  special  service,  separating  him  fr 
his  platoon  or  squadron  he  must  sleep  less  than  his  subordinat  . 
see  that  the  horses  feed,  drink,  are  well  secured,  and  are  i 
allowed  to  fight  ore  another;  that  the  supply  of  forage  is  sufficii 
for  the  night;  that  damaged  saddlery  is  repaired:  that  the  sadd 
are  replaced  on  the  horses'  backs;  that  the  packing  is  re;  ; 

justed  if  badly  placed;  that  the  arms  are  sheltered;  that  I 
men  do  not  leave  the  bivouac  except  for  good  reasons;  that  nc  • 
of  them  becomes  drunk;  that  they  do  not  abuse  their  horses:  tif 
their  things  are  so  placed  that  they  can  mount  promptly  at 
first  note  of  the  trumpet;  that  the  old  soldiers  do  not  worry  I » 

young  ones;  that  there  is  no  quarreling;  that  the  orders  of  I < 

commander  are  quickly  and  exactly  executed:  that  the  forag 
bring  into  the  bivouac  nothing  but  what  is  useful  and  indispensa  - 
for  establishing  the  bivouac  and  for  supplying  the  needs  of 
men  and  horses. 

When  “to  horre"  sounds,  the  officers  and  non-commission 
officers  should  be  the  first  ones  upon  the  assembly  ground  of 
squadron,  which  will  be  where  they  dismounted.  Then  the 
will  be  called,  and  they  will  note  if  the  men,  whose  names 
answered,  are  actually  present.  Then  they  will  take  a rapid  ti  i 
through  the  vacated  bivouac  to  see  if  anything  has  been  left 
hind;  if  anything  b*  found,  it  will  be  picked  up,  and  sent  to  t 
man  who  has  forgotten  it.  Sometimes  troops  on  leaving 
bivouac,  set  fire  to  it:  this  is  wrong,  because  the  abandoned  bivoi  r 
may  be  of  use  to  other  troops;  because  the  fire  communicating  w 
the  surrounding  country  may  cause  serious  and  destructive  lossi  ■ 
and  because  the  remains  of  the  bivouac  may  in  many  cases 
useful  to  the  poor  peasants  already  ruined  by  the  war.  It  rr 
happen  that  a bivouac  will  have  to  be  burned  for  military  reaso  [ 
but  even  then  it  should  be  done  only  bv  order  of  the  command 
If  the  bivouac  is  abandoned  before  the  soup  is  ready  to 
eaten,  empty  the  kettles,  but  never  neglect  to  take  them  i 
the  meat  they  contain,  with  you.  When  several  detachments 
different  regiments  bivouac  together,  each  should  have  added 
the  regular  trumpet  calls  a distinguishing  note  of  its  own; 


this  precaution  be  not  taken,  the  individual  movement  of  ea 


40 


FORAGE  AND  SUBSISTENCE 


itachment  should  be  ordeied  verbally,  and  not  by  trumpet  signals. 
Q.  It  sometimes  happens,  then,  that  commands  are  given 
ithout  using  the  trumpet? 

A.  Yes;  especially  whenever  one  wishes  to  conceal  the  move- 
ents  he  is  executing,  or  intends  to  execute;  in  this  case  the 
(ders  of  the  colonel  are  delivered  by  the  adjutant  to  the  superior 
licers,  who,  in  their  turn,  transmit  them  to  the  captains  and 
on. 


FORAGE  AND  SUBSISTENCE 

In  war  it  is  necessary,  above  all  things,  that  the  few  hours 
llowed  the  trooper  for  feeding  his  horse  should  be  employed 
iilely  for  that  purpose;  for  the  strength  of  the  horse  depends 
mon  his  proper  nourishment,  and  upon  that  strength  depends 
e proper  performance  of  our  duties  and  all  our  hopes  of 
taining  distinction, 

a In  war  one  cannot  always  choose  the  forage  for  his  horse; 
t nevertheless  there  are  certain  precautions  which  may  always 
taken  to  guide  in  the  selection  or  improve  the  quality  of  it. 
loir  instance,  it  is  better  to  feed  green  grass  than  new  hay. 

Iie  well-grown  grass  from  a meadow  is  the  best,  and  rye 
ss  is  the  next  in  order,  as  regards  ease  of  digestion,  but 
contains  less  nutriment  than  alfalfa  or  clover, 
f you  can  obtain  nothing  but  clover,  be  careful  in  its  use. 
r cavalry,  which  arrived  In  perfect  condition  on  the  banks 
the  Niemen,  to  open  the  Russian  campaign,  lost  more  than 
thousand  horses  in  a single  night  from  eating  clover.  As 
own  horses  were  among  those  which  succumbed,  I have 
d for  the  privelege  of  speaking  with  authority  on  the  subject. 
If  there  be  time  to  permit  the  clover  to  wilt  before  it  is 
to  the  horses,  a great  source  of  danger  will  be  removed.  Clover 
t the  night  before  it  is  to  be  used  rarely  does  harm.  If 
grass  can  be  obtained,  the  leaves  of  certain  trees  may  take 
i place  of  it;  those  of  the  elm  are  best. 

When  possible  to  procure  grass  that  has  not  been  wet,  take 
in  preference  to  that  on  which  the  rain  has  fallen.  Should 
rain  upon  the  bivouac,  pile  the  cut  grass  in  heaps,  and 
en  the  rain  has  ceased,  use  first  that  which  has  been  kept 
r. 

If  nothing  but  new  hay  can  be  obtained,  choose  that  which 
t s been  most  thoroughly  aired,  and  is  consequently  the  driest;  feed 
inly  a little  of  it  at  a time,  and  after  having  moistened  it 
lightly  with  salted  water, — if  possible — which  will  prevent 
toe  generation  of  gas  in  the  horse's  stomach.  The  hay  usually 
Ikiund  in  barns  is  new,  feed  it  only  in  small  quantities, 
i If  you  have  other  grain  than  oats,  soak  it  for  four  or  five 
ig  urs  in  water,  until  it  swells,  before  feeding  it;  if  that  can- 
1011  jt  be  done,  feed  it  in  small  quantities  only,  and  allow  the 
»i  rse  to  drink  no  water  until  after  the  grain  has  been  digested. 
,ini  Horses  suffering  from  fatigue  seldom  have  good  appetites; 
is  too  much  forage  be  placed  before  them  at  one  time  they 
' 1 1 become  disgusted  and  refuse  to  eat;  be  careful,  then, 
sol  give  them  their  forage  in  small  portions  only.  This  precaution 
nil,  equally  important  in  the  contrary  case  of  gross  feeders;  if 
D eir  forage  be  given  them  in  large  portions,  they  will  be 
mely  to  suffer  from  indigestion,  and  even  founder. 

Is  Should  you  find  a field  of  growing  oats,  reap  them,  and 
■I  rash  them  upon  a piece  of  smooth  ground  or  upon  a cloak, 
en  collect  the  grain  and  winnow  it  by  shaking  and  tossing 
u up  in  a current  of  air.  This  operation,  repeated  several 


41 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


times,  will  cleanse  it  thoroughly,  and  enable  you  to  feed  i 

without  fear  of  the  rough  and  pointed  husks  sticking  to  the  horse' 
throat  to  make  him  cough  and  otherwise  distress  him.  To  preven 
your  horse  losing  his  grain,  put  it  into  a nose  bag  and  let  him  ea 
out  of  that. 

As  a rule,  horses  should  not  be  allowed  to  drink  while  warm 
nevertheless,  if  on  the  march,  and  they  should  become  thirsty  .. 

when  a stream  is  reached  the  commander  of  the  detachment  shouli  ' 
order  them  to  be  watered,  but  without  the  troopers  dismountini  y 
or  unbridling,  the  time  lost  thus  may  be  regained  by  increasini  „ 
the  gait. 

If  you  have  flour,  try  to  make  bread  of  it;  but  if  you  canno  ; 
do  that,  make  cakes  of  dough  with  the  help  of  a little  sal 
and  water  and  bake  them  on  the  live  coals;  or  else  make  ball!  T 
of  dough  and  cook  them  in  boiling  water. 

A trooper  who  knows  his  business  always  carries  in  his  walle 

salt,  pepper,  and  an  onion  or  a clove  or  garlic;  with  these  mean  \ 

of  seasoning  his  food  anything  can  be  made  palatable. 

Never  throw  away  what  is  left  after  you  have  eaten;  wh< 
can  say  that  tomorrow  you  may  not  die  of  hunger? 

In  war  a little  tin  kettle  Is  a fortune  in  itself.  I have  knowr 
troopers  who  never  wanted  for  anything,  yet  carried  with  then-  1 

nothing  but  their  little  kettle;  by  lending  that  they  wer< 

certain  of  a portion  of  whatever  was  cooked  in  it. 

A knife  is  an  indespensable  article  in  bivouac. 

Some  troopers,  under  the  pretext  of  foraging,  take  everything 
they  can  lay  hands  on.  Such  an  offence  should  be  so  severely  pun-  “ 
ished  that  the  mere  recollecton  of  the  example  made  would  prevent 
any  repetition  of  the  dishonesty.  No  mercy  should  be  shown  s 
thief. 

Q.  What  distinction  is  to  be  made  between  “going  foraging'  ; 
and  going  on  a "foraging  expedition”? 

A.  “Going  foraging”  is  simply  to  seek  for  forage  and  sub-  ; 

slstenoe  In  the  vicinity  of  the  bivouac,  or  close  to  the  column  ‘ 

halted  by  tne  commander  for  that  purpose.  "Going1,  on  a 
foraging  expedition”  expresses  quite  a different  thing.  A body 
of  troops  having  exhausted  the  resources  of  their  bivouac  or 
cantonments,  they  are  obliged  to  seek,  at  a distance,  that  which 
is  no  longer  near  by,  and  a foraging  expedition  is  ordered. 
Numerous  detachments  of  all  arms  are  assembled  and  started  ' 
out.  On  arriving  at  the  designated  place  the  cavalry  is  charged  \ 
with  performing  the  outpost  duty.  It  posts  vedettes  and  grand 
guards;  it  even  drives  back  the  enemy,  if  necessary,  while  the 
remainder  of  the  troops  seize  the  supplies  contained  in  the  village,  1 
load  them  upon  wagons,  and  take  them  into  the  camp,  where  * 
a regular  distribution  is  made.  The  best  method  of  foraging 
in  a village  is  to  assemble  the  authorities  of  the  place  at 
once,  and  make  a requisition  upon  them;  if  the  peasants  fill 
the  requisitions  promptly  everything  is  done  regularly,  nothing 
is  wasted,  and  you  have,  in  addition,  your  men  all  together  and 
in  condition  to  meet  an  attack. 

If  there  be  no  village,  and  the  object  of  the  expedition  is 
merely  to  bring  in  a supply  of  grass  for  the  horses,  the  mowers, 
protected  by  our  chain  of  vedettes,  make  the  grass  up  into  trusses, 
tied  securely  with  forage  cords,  fasten  them  upon  their  horses, 
and  return  to  camp  in  an  orderly  manner.  The  supporting 
troops  then  perform  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  escorts  ot 
convoys. 

Q.  What  is  a truss? 

A.  Two  large  bundles  of  long  forage,  of  equal  weight  held 
together  by  a cord  passing  over  the  back  of  the  horse,  so  that 
one  hanging  on  each  side  of  him  they  will  balance  the  other.  On 
arriving  at  the  bivouac,  the  forage  is  all  delivered  at  some  one 
place  and  thence  distributed. 


42 


FORAGE  AND  SUBSISTENCE 


Q.  If  the  enemy  should  attack  the  foraging  party? 

A.  It  must  be  vigorously  defended. 

Q.  If  the  enemy  should  outnumber  the  supporting  troops? 
A.  The  mowers  adandon  their  work,  mount  their  horses 
go  to  the  assistance  of  their  comrades. 

Q.  Suppose  the  trusses  are  already  loaded  upon  the  horses? 

A.  All,  or  a part,  of  the  troopers  engaged  in  mowing, 
irow  down  their  trusses  and  join  the  supporting  troops.  If 
le  enemy  be  repulsed,  the  trusses  are  picked  up  again;  but 
lould  we  be  outnumbered,  although  the  trusses  may  be  lost, 
e men  will  be  saved. 

Q.  Are  the  troopers  detailed  to  do  the  mowing  armed? 

A.  Certainly.  As  a general  rule,  there  is  no  duty  to  be 

Jrfomed  In  war  which  will  permit  the  wearing  of  arms  to  be 
spensed  with.  Whenever  a trooper  is  mounted  he  should 
,|J  fully  armed,  and  leave  nothing  behind  him  which  he  may 
ijive  to  return  for. 

Q.  Is  it  possible  to  calculate  simply  by  inspection  the  number 
rations  of  grain  or  long  forage,  dry  or  green,  contained  in  a pile 
grain,  a stack  of  hay  or  straw,  or  in  a meadow? 

A.  This  question  may  be  answered  by  giving  the  calculations 
ade  by  Captain  Jacquinot  de  Presles,  in  his  excellent  work 
titled  “Course  of  Military  Art  and  History.”  A cubic  metre 
hay,  well  packed,  weighs  about  130  kilogrammes;  a cubic 
etre  of  straw,  about  85  kilogrammes.  It  is  very  easy,  by 
ultiplying  together  the  length,  breadth,  and  the  height  of  the 
>ace  filled  by  the  stores,  to  find  the  number  of  cubic  metres 
ley  contain;  but  should  the  heaps  or  stacks  be  cylindrical, 
e contents  may  be  arrived  at  by  multiplying  the  radius  of 
e circle  forming  the  base  by  the  circumference,  and  taking  one 
ilf  of  that  product  and  multiplying  it  by  the  height  of  the 
ack.  A cubic  metre  of  grain  contains  10  hectolitres,  and  one 
ctolitre  contains  about  12  average  rations,  giving  about 
JO  rations  to  the  cubic  metre. 

A hectolitre  of  wheat  weighs  about  75  kilos. 

A hectolitre  of  rye  weighs  about  70>  kilos. 

A hectolitre  of  barley  weighs  about  65  kilos. 

A hectolitre  of  otats  weighs  aboht  40  kilos. 

A hectolitre  of  Indian  corn  weighs  about  80  kilos. 

Good  land  produces  per  hectare,  a square  of  100  metres, 
iout  3000  kilos,  of  green  forage;  bad  land,  about  1500  or  2000. 
Q.  What  is  a grand  guard? 

A.  An  advance-guard  placed  between  the  main  body  and 
e of  its  detachments,  to  relieve  or  support  the  vedettes  in 
se  of  an  attack  by  the  enemy,  in  order  to  give  the  necessary 
■ne  to  the  detachment  or  cantonment  which  it  covers,  to  prepare 
r defense  or  retreat.  (L.R.A.) 

Q.  Where  is  the  grand  guard  posted? 

A.  Upon  the  route  by  which  it  is  presumed  the  enemy  will 
vance  to  attack  the  bivouac. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  To  delay  the  attack  and  give  the  bivouac  time  to  prepare 
meet  it  in  good  shape.  As  nearly  as  possible  at  the  centre  of 
e line  of  vedettes. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  So  that  the  vedettes  attacked  will,  in  retreating  upon  it, 
i at  the  same  time  approaching  their  supports.  Therefore  the 
notion  of  several  roads  or  paths  is  a favorable  place  for 
sting  a grand  guard.  The  latter  should  bear  to  the  vedettes 
e same  relation  that  the  hinged  end  of  a fan  does  to  the 
per  ends  of  its  outspread  sticks. 

Q.  Who  posts  the  grand  guard? 

A.  The  commanding  officer  himself,  unless  he  has  with  him 


43 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


an  experienced  officer  worthy  of  his  entire  confidence. 

Q.  When  does  he  post  it? 

A.  After  having  reconnoitred  the  ground  thoroughly,  and  ob ! 
tained  the  best  possible  information  concerning  it. 

Q.  How  is  the  strengtn  of  the  grand  guard  determined? 

A.  By  the  number  of  vedettes  required,  allowing  four  mer: 
for  each  vedette  posted.  (L.  R.  A.) 

Q.  How  is  a grand  guard  formed? 

A.  Upon  reaching  the  ground  where  it  is  to  be  posted,  thi  ; 
advance  guard  being  mounted,  the  men  detailed  for  the  granc  ' 
guard  move  out  of  ranks,  and  place  themselves  in  front  of  the 
line,  facing  the  enemy.  The  officers  designated  to  command  them 
cause  them  to  break  into  column  and  march  under  the  direction  o 
the  commander  of  the  advance-guard,  who  has  already  reconnoitrec 
the  ground.  On  arriving  at  the  place  where  the  grand  guard  is 
to  take  post,  they  form  line  and  halt.  Then  the  men  who  are 
to  form  the  small  posts  are  designated,  and  they  move  out  of  ranks: 
to  the  front  and  face  toward  the  enemy.  The  corporals,  or  ole 
soldiers,  who  are  to  command  the  small  posts  of  four  men  each 
move  out  of  ranks  and  recognize  the  men  who  are  to  be  placec 
under  their  command.  This  preparatory  work  having  been  com- 
pleted, fhe  small  post  detachments  are  reunited  and  marched  ofl 
under  the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard,  and  undei  " 
the  direction  of  the  commander  of  the  advance-guard,  or  the  offices 
detailed  to  perform  his  duty;  this  officer  moves  towards  the 
centre  of  the  line  of  small  posts  about  to  be  established,  and 
halts.  The  central  post  is  first  placed  as  well  as  the  vedette 
which  it  is  to  furnish;  then  the  posts  iwhioh  are  to  occupy  the 
line  upon  one  of  the  flanks  move  out  together,  and  are  posted  suc- 
cessively, as  well  as  their  vedettes.  This  duty  performed,  the 
commander  of  the  advance  guard  returns  to  the  central  point, 
inspecting  on  his  way  the  line  of  vedettes  he  has  just  traced, 
and  rectifying  it  if  necessary;  then  he  completes  the  lire  by 
doing  for  the  second  part  of  his  small  post  detachments  what  : 
he  did  for  the  first. 

Q.  Has  he  no  duty  to  perform  in  regard  to  the  posting  of  the 
vedettes? 

A.  Yes;  to  give  to  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard  all  the 
topographical  information  he  possesses  in  regard  to  the  ground,  and  . 
to  communicate  to  him  his  ideas  as  to  the  probable  operations  of  - 
the  enemy,  so  that  he  may  be  fully  advised  as  to  the  point  he 
must  specially  watch.  To  these  details  he  adds  such  orders  as 
he  thinks  should  be  executed  under  such  or  such  circumstances. 

0-  What  dees  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard  do  upon  re- 
turning to  his  post? 

A.  He  dismounts  his  command  and  prescribes  the  duties  of  ; 
the  rounds.  He  orders  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
who  will  have  command  of  them  to  reconnoitre  the  line  of  small 
posts  and  vedettes.  Next  he  accompanies  the  commander  of  the 
advance-guard,  who  indicates  to  him  the  lire  to  be  occupied  by 
the  grand  guard  at  night,  and  gives  him  directions  as  to  his 
line  of  retreat  in  certain  cases.  He  accompanies  this  officer 
as  far  as  the  picket  and  informs  himself  in  regard  to  its  position. 
On  returning  to  the  guard  he  thoroughly  re-examines  the  ground 
passed  over,  so  that  if  the  grand  guard  should  be  attacked  at 
night,  no  matter  from  what  side,  he  could  withdraw  as  well  as 
by  day,  by  taking  advantage  of  his  knowledge  of  the  ground  to 
avoid  the  obstacles  which  might  obstruct  the  retreat  of  one  un- 
informed in  regard  to  them. 

Q.  What  dees  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard  do  on  reach- 
ing his  post  again? 

A.  He  gives  out  the  countersign,  which  is  communicated  to 
the  small  posts,  inspects  the  arms;  receives  the  forage  sent  to  him 


44 


FORAGE  AND  SUBSISTENCE 


from  the  picket  or  the  regiment;  directs  one  half  of  his  horses 
to  be  unbridled  and  fed,  but  not  unpacked,  while  the  men  remain 
near  them.  He  visits  his  small  posts  and  vedettes  frequently, 
and  often  he  even  goes  outside  of  his  line  so  as  to  judge  better 
of  the  opportunity  offered  to  the  enemy  to  make  an  unexpected 
attack.  He  requires  his  vedettes  to  recognize  him  whenever  he 
comes  in  view,  then  he  questions  them  to  assure  himself  that  they 
understand  their  orders,  and  inspects  their  arms  to  make  cer- 
tain that  they  will  not  miss  fire.  He  makes  his  tours  with 
greater  frequency  if  the  enemy  is  near,  if  his  men  are  not  well 
trained,  are  much  fatigued,  or  if  the  weather  is  very  bad.  He 
allows  the  grand  guard  and  vedettes  to  put  on  their  cloaks,  but 
not  to  turn  up  their  collars,  as  that  would  prevent  their  hearing 
distinctly.  In  very  bad  weather  he  reduces  the  number  of  hours 
which  a vedette  has  to  remain  on  post. 

If  the  enemy  is  seen  to  execute  any  movements,  he  warns  his 
icommander;  if  the  movement  is  an  important  one,  he  sends  an 
officer  or  intelligent  non-commissioned  officer  to  explain  it  clearly. 
If  the  vedettes  discharge  their  pieces,  he  causes  his  oommand  to 
bridle  and  mount,  and  goes  in  person  to  the  point  whence  the 
sound  of  firing  seems  to  come.  If  attacked,  he  will  withdraw 

in  good  order,  skirmishing,  and  execute  what  is  prescribed  for 
rear  guards.  If  rounds  visit  him  he  will  receive  them  himself.  He 
sends  out  patrols  which  keep  up  constant  communication  between 
the  small  posts.  These  patrols,  taken  from  the  half  of  the  com- 
mand whose  horses  are  kept  bridled,  are  sent  out  more  frequently 
when  the  small  posts  and  vedettes  are  unusually  distant.  When- 
ever he  leaves  the  grand  guard  he  temporarily  transfers  the  com- 
mand to  the  senior  officer  present,  to  whom  he  gives  detailed  in- 
structions as  to  his  duties. 

Q.  Should  a grand  guard  be  allowed  to  have  a fire? 

A.  Sometimes;  but  it  must  not  light  up  very  much  spaoe, 
and  the  place  for  it  must  be  chosen  so  that  the  enemy  can  see 
as  little  of  it  as  possible. 

Q.  What  is  a small  post? 

A.  A grand  guard  of  the  grand  guard. 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a commander  of  a small  post? 

A.  He  posts  a vedette,  gives  him  the  countersign  and  his 
Instructions,  and  makes  known  to  him  certain  signals  to  be  used. 
Then  he  thoroughly  reconnoitres  the  surrounding  ground  with  a 
view  to  discovering  what  advantages  or  obstacles  it  would  present 


1!  in  case  of  an  attack  upon  the  line  compelling  a retreat  of  the 
:!l whole  upon  the  advanced  guard.  He  must  keep  his  vedettes  con- 
itantly  in  sight  as  well  as  those  on  each  side  of  him,  and  closely 
rbserve  the  country  in  advance  of  the  line  he  is  charged  with 
juarding.  Whenever  his  vedette  makes  a signal  which  he  does 
not  understand  clearly  he  mounts  his  horse  and  goes  to  discover 
the  meaning  of  it.  If  it  proves  to  be  serious,  he  mounts  the  men 
nf  the  small  post  and  sends  to  warn  the  grand  guard.  Should  it 
move  to  be  of  no  importance,  he  reassures  and  reprimands  the 
edette,  and  signals  to  the  small  post  to  dismount,  in  order  that 
his  movement,  indicating  no  cause  for  alarm,  may  reassure  the 
irand  guard. 

If  the  vedette  discharges  his  piece,  the  small  post  mounts  in- 
tantly.  Whenever  the  commander  of  a small  post  leaves  it,  he 
must  keep  within  view  of  his  men,  and  mount  or  dismount  them 
jy  means  of  signals  agreed  upon  beforehand. 

If,  in  looking  over  the  ground  in  front  of  his  vedettes,  he 
fiscovers  any  movements  which  have  escaped  the  notice  of  the 
redette,  he  must  call  his  attention  to  them  either  by  signals  or 
>y  going  to  him  and  telling  him  of  them,  and  reprimand  him 
harply  for  his  inattention.  He  must  frequently  inspect  the  arms 


45 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


in  the  hands  of  his  men,  and  especially  those  of  the  men  posted 
vedettes. 

Sleep  and  rest  are  both  forbidden  to  the  commander  of 
grand  guard  or  a small  post. 

At  daybreak  and  at  nightfall  their  vigilance  must  be  redouble 
for  these  are  usually  the  hours  chosen  for  making  attacks.  Th 
must  see  everything  with  their  own  eyes,  and  prevent  their  mi 
being  seized  by  panics,  which  spread  easily,  call  a whole  army 
arms  and  bring  discredit  upon  the  officer  rommanding  the  po 
where  they  originate. 

During  the  whole  time  that  reconnaissances  are  out  the  hors 
of  the  large  posts  are  kept  bridled. 

Q.  May  a small  post  have  a fire? 

A.  Not  without  special  permission. 

Q.  May  the  horses  be  unbridled? 

A.  Never. 

Q.  What  is  a vedette? 

A.  A mounted  sentinel  posted  in  the  vicinity  of  the  enem  s 

Q.  What  are  his  duties? 

A.  To  watch  with  the  greatest  attention  the  movements 

the  enemy,  if  he  is  within  sight;  to  let  no  noise  escape  his  notiC' 
to  watch  carefully  everything  which  may  be  of  interest  to  tf  e 

guard  of  the  detachment  to  which  he  belongs;  to  signal  to  h 
small  post  notice  of  everything  which  may  appear  threatenin' 
and  to  give  warning  of  an  attack  by  discharging  his  piece. 

Q.  Which  is  the  best  place  to  choose  for  placing  a vedette  ■ 

A.  One  from  which  he  can  see  everything  without  being  seer  r 

thus  a long  piece  of  wall,  a clump  of  trees,  a hedge,  a shallo  : 
ditch,  are  all  favorable  for  masking  a vedette;  he  should  nevi  t 
fail  to  employ  them  for  concealing  his  presence. 

Q.  If  the  point  from  which  a vedette  can  get  the  best  vie  r 
should  be  a bare  hill,  what  should  he  do? 

A.  Place  himself  a little  in  rear  of  the  crest  so  that  the  line  < 

the  crest  will  cover  him  as  much  as  possible,  without  preventir  i 

his  seeing  beyond  it. 

0-  If  a lancer  is  posted  as  a vedette  and  can,  with  a litti  ■ 
care,  conceal  himself,  what  should  he  do? 

A.  Lower  his  lance,  or  remove  his  pennon,  so  that  it  may  nc  r 
betray  his  position. 

Q.  If  the  ground  upon  which  the  chain  of  vedettes  is  place 
is  undulating,  should  vedettes  also  be  placed  in  the  depressions  ■ 

A.  Vedettes  must  be  posted  wherever  the  approach  of  th 
enemy  is  to  be  feared;  thus,  one  vedette  is  placed  upon  a heigh 
to  observe  a plain,  another  at  the  foot  of  a mountain  to  observ 
a gorge,  a wood,  or  a sunken  road,  and  to  protect  the  vedette  wh( 
on  the  hill-tops  might,  if  not  warned,  be  surrounded  before  the  c 
knew  it. 

Q.  What  further  precautions  are  to  be  observed  in  choosin  . 
posts  for  vedette? 

A.  To  take  care  that  the  vedette  placed  in  a depression  i ■ 
able  to  see,  as  well  as  possible,  one  or  two  of  those  on  the  sam 
line  with  him,  in  order  that  he  may  be  warned  by  them  of  an 
danger  threatening  him,  in  oase  of  a movement  by  the  enem}  . 

Q.  What  orders  apply  to  all  vedettes? 

A.  Never  dismount  unless  by  special  permission  of  the  corr  ,, 
mander  of  the  grand  guard,  and  always  have  the  carbine  o 
pistol  in  readiness  to  fire. 

Q.  In  posting  a vedette  what  orders  are  given  him? 

A.  First,  point  out  to  him  the  ground  he  is  to  observe  r 
Indicate  all  the  points  of  special  importance  which  he  Is  t 
watch;  direct  him  to  look  frequently  toward  the  other  vedette 
who,  with  him,  form  the  chain;  next  give  him  a signal  bv  whic  t 
he  warns,  and  is  warned  by,  the  other  vedettes  that  It  I 


46 


FORAGE  AND  SUBSISTENCE 


lecessary  to  redouble  vigilance,  and  be  prepared  for  coming 
events.  Then  give  him  another  signal  with  which  to  warn  the 
iommander  of  his  own  small  post  who,  on  seeing  it,  immediately 
omes  out  to  reconnoitre. 

Q.  Can  the  distance  at  which  the  enemy  is  seen  be  estimated? 
a A.  At  two  thousand  metres,  men  and  horses  are  seen  as  mere 
Siioints;  at  twelve  hundred,  infantry  can  be  distinguished  from 
navalry;  at  eight  hundred,  individual  movements  may  be  distin- 
tuished;  at  seven  hundred,  the  heads  of  the  men  may  be  dis- 
tinguished from  their  bodies;  at  four  hundred,  the  head  of  a 
lan  can  be  clearly  seen.  (Jacquinot  de  Presles) 
mi  Q.  Is  a vedette  permitted  to  leave  or  change  his  post? 

A.  Never,  under  any  pretext,  without  special  permission,  given 
1 advance. 

Q.  Is  he  required  to  observe  anything  besides  the  enemy? 
A.  It  is  his  duty  to  see  everything  that  takes  place;  for  instance, 
F he  should  see  a peasant  come  out  of  the  wood,  enter  it  again, 
10  out  of  it  and  approach  the  chain  of  vedettes,  it  is  probable 
ny hat  he  is  a spy,  and  the  small  post  should  be  signaled.  If  a 
ust  is  seen  to  rise  regularly  along  the  horizon,  it  is  probably 
tnade  by  a marching  column,  and  warning  should  be  given;  if 
is  signal  is  made  by  another  vedette,  it  must  be  repeated  as  a 
learning  to  his  own  small  post. 

til  Q.  When  danger  threatens,  what  should  be  done? 

OS!  A.  The  vedettes  are  doubled.  In  this  case  one  of  them  may 
e sent  back  to  warn  the  small  post,  if  necessary,  while  the  other 
lijmains  in  observation  of  the  enemy;  if  the  vedettes  have  special 
si  rders  to  leave  their  posts  to  reconnoitre  in  front  of  their  line. 
Mi  arrest  suspicious  characters  found  prowling  about,  etc.,  one 
(if  them  will  perform  that  duty  while  the  other  remains  on  post. 

n the  case  of  double  vedettes,  if  the  enemy  advances,  the  vedettes 
tire  numerous  enough  to  form  a strong  line  of  resistance,  and 
kirmish,  while  retreating,  if  not  pushed  back  too  briskly. 

< Q.  What  should  a vedette  do  when  he  sees  himself  about  to 
it 3 attacked? 

A.  Turn  his  horse  to  the  left,  bringing  his  right  flank  toward 
t!  le  enemy,  so  that  he  can  more  quickly  complete  his  left  about, 
id  when  the  movement  of  the  enemy  is  decided,  discharge  his 
itirb  ine. 

Q.  How  often  are  the  vedettes  relieved? 

A.  Ordinarily,  each  one  will  be  relieved  after  one  hour’s  duty, 

15  ) that  the  whole  post  will  be  relieved  every  four  hours. 

Q.  Are  the  vedettes  posted  at  night  in  the  places  occupied 
lairing  the  day? 

r' 1 A.  At  night  the  vedettes  are  brought  nearer  to  the  small 
to  !>sts,  hese  nearer  to  the  grand  guards,  and  these  nearer  to  the 
11  tatachment.  In  daytime  the  horizon  of  a vedette  cannot  be  too 

tended;  but  at  night  it  is  quite  different,  and,  in  order  that  the 

« bdette  may  be  able  to  see,  especially  when  the  night  is  dark, 
e line  of  the  horizon  must  be  brought  closer  to  him.  For 

at  reason  the  vedette  who,  in  the  daytime,  was  placed  upon 
''height,  must  be  posted  in  a hollow  at  night,  and  his  eyes 
5 ust  be  fixed  attentively  and  at  a suitable  distance,  upon  the 
■I  ine  of  the  neighboring  ground  which  cuts  the  line  of  the  sky. 
lould  the  enemy  present  himself,  no  matter  how  dark  the  night 
ay  be,  the  vedette  will  be  able  to  see  him  outlined  against  the 
■ rizon,  and,  if  on  challenging  him  no  answer  is  made,  the 

Idette  will  fire.  A position  for  the  night  should  be  taken  only 

ter  it  has  become  too  dark  for  the  enemy  to  perceive  the 
trograde  movement.  The  positions  for  the  day  should  be  taken 
by  the  vedettes  just  at  dawn,  so  as  to  prevent  the  enemy’s 
essing  at  the  positions  occupied  at  night,  and  from  which  the 
dettes  are  moved  forward.  In  making  this  forward  movement 


47 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


A. 

Q. 

A. 

Q. 

A. 


“to  at°btdoabdees!aken  t0  SC0U‘  Wel'  ‘°  the  f'°"1  to  a^id  fall!, 

0.  What  is  a picket? 

Suard.  Tr°°PS  P'aCed  between  the  detachments  and  the  grai 

Q.  Where  is  it  posted? 

A.  Should  troops  be  bivouacked  in  rear  of  a villaae  t 
Picket  would  be  posted  at  the  opposite  side,  towards  the  enem 
and  a few  hundred  yards  in  rear  of  the  grand  guard. 

Q.  Will  the  men  be  permitted  to  occupy  houses’ 

A.  The  horses  may  be  assembled  and  placed  in  open  barn 
the  men  will  bivouac. 

Q.  Are  the  horses  kept  bridled? 

Only  half  of  them. 

What  is  generally  the  numerical  force  of  the  picket’ 

It  should  equal  that  of  the  grand  guard. 

What  is  its  duty? 

It  posts  one  sentinel  twenty-five  paces  in  its  front,  wi 
orders  to  listen  for  any  suspicious  noises  coming  from  the  dire 
tion  of  the  grand  guard,  and  to  prevent  men  passing  witho 
permission,  from  the  bivouac  to  the  outposts. 

Q.  Does  it  not  also  keep  a sentinel  over  the  arms  of  t 
command  ? 

A.  No;  for  the  arms  remain  upon  the  horses,  and  the  sentim  r 
spoken  of  above,  is  not  far  away.  The  picket  assures  the  safe 
of  the  rear  of  the  grand  guard,  and  furnishes  patrols  which  sco 
in  front  and  on  the  flanks.  If  the  grand  guard  is  attacked,  t 
picket  warns  the  main  body,  supports  the  outposts,  and  retir 
only  when  they  do  so.  The  officers  of  the  picket  are  permiti 
to  take  turns  in  sleeping. 

Q.  Is  it  always  necessary  to  have  a picket  in  rear  of  t 
grand  guard? 

A.  No;  a grand  guard  needs  the  support  of  a picket  on 
when  very  near  the  enemy,  or  when  the  latter  is  likely  to  ma 
an  attack.  When  these  conditions  do  not  exist,  it  is  useless 
double  the  duty;  but  in  such  a case  the  main  body  in  bivou 
will  have  to  exercise  increased  vigilance. 

Q.  What  is  a patrol? 

A.  A detachment  of  flying  vedettes. 

Q.  Of  what  are  patrols  usually  composed? 

A.  Ordinarily  of  two  troopers  commanded  by  a corpori 
or  an  old  soldier.  They  are  much  more  useful  than  vedettes,  a 
may  sometimes  entirely  replace  them.  In  that  case  their  duty 
continuous,  and  their  observation  constant. 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  would  that  be  the  case? 

A.  If  infantry  and  cavalry  bivouac  together,  the  former  wou  . 
furnish  the  sentinels,  the  latter  the  patrols. 

If  a partisan,  harassed  and  in  danger,  has  retreated, 
barricaded  himself  at  a farm,  from  the  tops  of  whose  bui Id in: 
he  can  see  to  a great  distance,  he  posts  no  vedettes,  but  patrc 
the  surrounding  country.  Good  patrols,  conducted  intelligent 
are  generally  much  more  efficient  than  vedettes. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because  the  nature  of  the  duty  admits  of  no  sleepin 
it  compels  men  to  display  all  their  resources  of  intelligence  a 
courage;  and  the  exploration  of  the  country  is  made  more  th< 
oughly  and  to  a greater  distance. 

Q.  How  should  men  conduct  themselves  when  on  patrol? 

A.  March  without  noise  of  any  kind,  carry  on  no  conversatic 
fasten  the  sabre  so  that  the  scabbard  will  strike  against  neith 
the  spur  nor  stirrup:  carry  the  carbine  In  one  hand,  so  that 
will  make  no  noise  by  striking  against  the  swivel,  or  fastenin 


48 


FORAGE  AND  SUBSISTENCE 


the  slingbelt.  Keep  the  horses  on  dirt  roads,  so  that  no 
ise  will  be  made  by  their  shoes  striking  the  stones  of  paved 
ids.  In  daytime  the  men  must  move  along  under  cover  of 
Iges,  walls,  sunken  roads,  and  ravines;  they  must  lower  their 
ices,  so  that  their  pennons  will  not  betray  them;  they  must 
iceal  themselves  in  woods,  and  make  their  observations 
ough  the  openings. 

<V.t  night  they  must  endeavor  to  see  even  in  the  darkness; 
t frequently,  follow  sunken  roads,  and  refrain  from  smoking, 
as  not  to  light  up  their  faces.  If  the  enemy  is  encountered 
y must  not  fire,  but  conceal  themselves,  and  one  of  tha 

trol  must  be  sent,  if  possible  without  risk  of  discovery,  to 

rn  the  grand  guard.  The  men  of  a cavalry  patrol  must  not 

rch  side  by  side,  but  one  behind  the  other,  and  far  enough 
irt  to  enable  them  to  see  well,  to  afford  protection  to  one 

ither,  and,  in  case  of  falling  into  an  ambuscade,  to  prevent 
whole  patrol  being  cut  off  and  captured  at  once. 

The  routes  which  patrols  travel  may  be,  relatively  to  our 

in  of  vedettes,  either  interior  or  exterior;  in  the  latter  case 
ater  vigilance  must  be  exercised,  because  the  danger  is 
ater.  The  exterior  patrols  should  consider  themselves  flying 
a ettes  who  have  the  advantage  over  the  fixed  ones  of  being 
ij  to  reconnoitre  everything  which  arouses  their  suspicions; 

I marching,  halting  and  concealing  themselves  as  long  as  they 
' t think  necessary.  It  is  often  useful  to  send  patrols  of 
] or  two  men  to  distant  points,  where  they  may  remain  in 

ervation  for  several  hours  at  a time. 

i patrol  which  has  ventured  too  far,  and  which  a hostile 
t challenges,  must  be  careful  not  to  reply,  if  they  do  not 

ik  the  enemy’s  language,  or  if,  before  going  out,  they  have  not 

II  ned  a few  words  of  the  language  which,  spoken  in  answer 

* the  challenge,  may  suspend  the  examination,  and  give  them 

I 3 to  turn  about  without  danger,  and  gain  some  ground 

" [he  rear. 

f the  enemy  is  advancing  upon  our  posts  and  is  likely  to 
ve  there  before  they  are  warned  of  his  coming,  the  patrol 
jid  discharge  their  carbines  and  return,  skirmishing,  by 
road  on  which  they  went  out. 

II  ' have  been  told  that  in  the  campaign  of  Portugal  our  cavalry, 
‘ g obliged  to  march  over  rocky  and  sonorous  ground,  put 
lies  of  sheepskin  on  their  horses’  feet  (the  wool  inside),  and 

them  about  the  fetlocks,  so  that  our  patrols  approached 
close  to  the  English  vedettes  without  the  latter  hearing 
•'(i.  This  would  be  a good  thing  to  try  again  under  similar 
imstances. 

1 trooper  on  patrol  may  sometimes  be  surprised  in  spite  of  the 
test  vigilance,  especially  if  he  has  to  traverse  a wooded 
"I  broken  country.  He  should  halt  frequently,  and  carefully 
1 ;h  his  horse's  ears.  The  direction  in  which  they  point 

give  him  valuable  information.  It  is  an  indication  he  cannot 
, d to  despise,  as  it  is  instinctive;  and  if  the  horse  persists  in 
111 1 action,  especially  to  the  point  of  being  frightened,  the 

* e of  it  should  be  discovered,  if  possible.  Two  patrols, 
“ 'ling  outside  of  the  chain  of  outposts,  should  recognize  each 

lr,  if  possible,  without  challenging,  especially  if  the  enemy  is 
■ rn  to  be  in  the  vicinity.  When  patrols  are  sent  out,  the! 
i'fjosts  should  be  informed  in  regard  to  their  numbers,  uniforms, 

! I so  that  there  may  be  no  doubt  or  hesitation  about  admitting 
I'Bi  when  they  return  to  their  own  lines. 

'■t  Are  the  grand  guards  and  pickets  allowed  to  go  out 

■ling? 


49 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


A.  No;  if  the  enemy  is  near  or  a surprise  is  feared, 
supplies  for  men  and  horses  are  sent  out  from  the  main  bod 
Q.  How  are  the  horses  of  a grand  guard  watered? 

A.  A small  number  at  a time.  Those  already  sent  to  w 
must  return  before  others  are  allowed  to  go  out 


DETACHMENTS 


A. 

Q- 

A. 


Q.  How  does  cavalry  march  in  campaign? 

A.  Almost  always  in  detachments. 

Q.  What  is  a detachment? 

A-  Eye.y.  body  ,of  troops  detached  by  order  from  the  a 
corps,  division,  brigade,  regiment,  squadron  or  platoon  to  w 
it  belongs. 

Q.  Are  there  different  kinds  of  detachments? 

Yes. 

What  are  they? 

The  detachments  (properly  so  called)  are  advance-gu 
rear-guards,  pickets,  reconnaissances,  patrols,  foraging  par  : 
escorts  and  partisans. 

Q.  Have  these  detachments  a special  duty? 

A.  Yes:  of  which  the  most  active  viligance  is  the  mainspi  ' 
and  the  safety  of  the  troops  they  protect,  the  object. 

0-  How  are  these  war  detachments  detailed? 

A.  By  taking  a number  of  men  from  each  squadron  pr<  1 
tionate  to  the  numerical  strength  of  each  squadron  presei 

Q.  Why  are  the  detachments  not  composed  preferably  of 
from  the  same  squadron? 

A.  Because,  if  a misfortune  were  to  overtake  the  detachn 
the  squadron  would  find  itself  deprived  for  a whole  campaig 
that  number  of  officers  or  troopers,  while  the  other  squadror 
the  regiment  would  be  complete. 

Q.  To  whom  is  given  the  command  of  these  detachments 

A.  To  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  in  their 
ular  turns,  beginning  with  the  seniors  of  each  grade. 

Q.  Is  this  rule  invariable? 

A.  No;  for  important  duties,  officers  and  non-commissi 
officers  who  have  given  proof  of  their  merit,  zeal,  and  coi 
are  chosen;  seniority  must  fortify  its  rights  by  the  additic 
these  qualities  if  it  does  not  wish  to  experience  the  sham 
surrendering  them  to  younger  men. 

Q.  What  is  the  first  duty  of  the  commander  of  a detachm  I 

A.  To  inspect  his  troops  before  marching;  to  assure  hir  ‘ 
that  the  horses  are  properly  saddled  and  girthed,  well  oa 
and  well  shod,  that  the  men  are  provided  witn  cartridges:  tha 
sabres  are  sharp  and  the  lances  pointed:  that  the  firearm 
in  good  condition  and  furnished  with  new  flints. 

Q.  What  is  his  second  duty? 

To  have  his  detachment  promptly  mounted. 

The  third? 

To  bring  it  into  action  in  the  most  advantageous  ma 
The  fourth? 

To  see  that  it  eats  and  sleeps  at  proper  times. 

Where,  in  any  case — as  for  instance,  a hurried  depa 
in  the  night,  or  in  bad  weather — a commander  cannot  inspec  > 
command  before  beginning  his  march,  rwhat  should  he  do? 

A.  When  the  day  dawns  or  the  rain  ceases,  he  makes  hi 
spection  without  halting,  by  causing  the  command  to  march 
open  files — placing  himself  in  the  interval;  he  calls  the  atte 
of  his  officers  to  any  neglects  discovered,  and  at  the  fi'st 
has  them  corrected  under  the  immediate  suoervision  of  the 
officers. 


A. 

Q. 

A. 

Q. 

A. 

Q- 


50 


DETACHMENTS 


Q.  When  the  column  is  en  route  and  at  a distance  from  the 
emy,  what  should  the  commander  do? 

A.  After  having  formed  his  advance  and  rear  guard  he  starts 
e command  on  the  road  it  is  to  follow.  Then  he  halts  to  cgunt 
5 men,  and  to  make  the  inspection  of  which  I have  just  spoken; 
ures  himself  that  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are 
their  proper  places  and  attentive  to  their  duties;  that  no  one 
mains  behind,  that  none  of  the  horses  are  lame,  that  they  are 
t wasting  their  strength  uselessly,  that  the  rear-guard  maintains 
proper  distance  and  brings  up  all  the  stragglers.  After  having 
irched  for  sometime  in  rear  to  see  for  himself  that  everything 
as  it  should  be,  he  takes  his  place  at  the  head  of  the  de- 
.hment.  After  having  marched  for  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  or  an 
ur  at  most,  during  which  the  horses  will  have  dunged,  a halt  is 
3 to  allow  them  to  urinate;  the  command  is  dismounted; 
girths  are  readjusted;  the  tails  which  may  have  become  un- 
d will  be  tied  up  again;  all  defects  in  dress,  packing,  and  sad- 
ry  will  be  remedied.  Then  the  command  is  remounted  and  the 
irch  resumed,  as  far  as  possible,  with  open  files.  If  marching 
3r  an  undulating  country,  he  halts  at  the  top  of  every  hill  and 
ks  back  to  judge  of  the  regularity  of  the  march.  If  the  gait 
the  head  of  the  column  is  too  rapid,  he  decreases  it;  if  too 
,w,  increases  it.  It  is  bet'er  to  have  it  too  rapid  than  too  slow, 
some  horses  have  strides  so  short  that  they  interrupt  and  break 
gait  of  others,  they  should  be  put  at  the  tail  of  the  column, 
commander  should  endeavor  to  keep  his  men  in  a cheerful 
me  of  mind  by  encouraging  them  to  sing  and  talk. 

If  the  column  is  composed  of  several  squadrons,  he  directs  the 
ferent  commanders  to  keep  their  proper  distances  and  avoid 
t>wding  upon  those  in  front  of  them.  From  time  to  time  the 
j nmand  is  halted  so  that  lost  distances  may  be  regained.  When 
f of  the  distance  has  been  covered,  no  matter  how  short  the 
rch  may  be,  the  command  is  formed  in  column  of  squadrons 
division  distance,  on  one  side  of  the  road,  dismounted  and  a 
t of  half  an  hour  made,  during  which  the  men  eat  their  lunch. 

officers  take  advantage  of  this  halt  to  rectify  the  position 
the  packs.  This  halt  should  always  be  made  so  that  on 
skiving  at  the  camping  place  the  men  will  have  nothing  to  do 
to  take  care  of  their  horses.  If  the  march  is  a long  one, 
esuming  it  the  command  will  move  out  by  its  left;  if  the  march 
in  Ito  last  for  several  days,  each  squadron  takes  its  turn  at  the 
d of  the  column. 

in  3-  What  is  the  rate  of  marching  for  a column  at  a walk? 
hli  A.  About  four  thousand  metres  (3.1  miles)  per  hour,  and  al- 
pa  st  twice  that  at  a trot. 

a Q.  Should  the  command  come  to  a river  too  deep  to  afford 
d footing  for  the  horses,  how  should  it  be  forded? 

\.  With  a wide  front,  so  that  the  mass  will  impede  the  cur- 
l.  The  troopers  on  the  up-stream  flank  are  less  exposed  than 
:hey  attempted  to  pass  singly,  and  those  on  the  down-stream 
k will  pass  more  easily. 

|>.  What  precautions  must  be  taken  by  the  troopers? 

Before  entering  the  water  they  take  off  their  waistbelts  and 
g them  around  their  necks,  the  sabres  fastened  to  the  hooks 
epi  that  they  will  hang  dotwn  their  backs.  The  earbine  is  thrown 
its  r the  right  shoulder,  as  when  preparing  to  mount.  Having 
' sred  the  water,  the  men  draw  their  knees  slightly  backward 
upward,  incline  their  bodies  slightly  to  the  front  and  hold 
snaffle  reins  lightly  in  the  left  hand,  the  right  hand  grasping 
ly  a lock  of  the  mane  about  halfway  up  the  horse's  neok. 
f they  lean  backwards,  hang  to  the  curb  bridle,  or  seize  a lock 
:he  mane  too  high  up;  if  they  fail  to  ease  the  weight  upon  the 


51 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


horse’s  backs — they  are  liable  to  pull  their  horses  over  backwari 
and  drown  both  them  and  their  riders. 

Q.  If  on  the  bank  of  a river  boats  are  found,  but  too  small 
transport  horses? 

The  men  are  taken  over  in  the  boats,  and  hold  the  hor 

by  the  bridle  so  that  they  may  follow  swimmino. 

Q.  Should  a pontoon  bridge  be  encountered? 

A.  The  men  are  dismounted  and  required  to  lead  their  hor 
over  it. 

Q.  If  a ferry-boat  be  found? 

A.  The  men  are  dismounted  before  entering  it. 

Q.  What  does  the  commander  do  on  reaching  the  halting-plac 

A.  After  having  received  the  reports  of  the  officers  and  ni 
oomissioned  officers  charged  with  procuring  lodgings  for  the  co 
mand  in  accordance  with  orders  given  in  advance,  he  forms  1 
command  in  a central  place,  and  gives  the  necessary  ordi 

promptly,  so  that  the  horses  may  be  sheltered  as  soon  as  possib 
He  sees  that  the  horses  are  not  unsaddled  for  three  or  four  hou 
and  that  they  are  not  watered  for  at  least  one  hour  and  a h 
after  the  day's  march  is  ended.  The  officers  are  required  to  vi 
and  inspect  the  horses  and  stables  daily,  and  the  commam 

will  make  note  of  the  squadrons  which  continue  to  have  I 
greatest  number  of  injured  horses.  If  a short  halt  is  mat 

during  which  the  horses  are  to  be  fed  and  watered,  only  one  h 
of  the  ration  of  oats  should  be  fed  and  the  horses  should  then 
watered:  immediately  before  resuming  the  march  the  other  h 
may  be  fed.  If  a detaehment  whose  horses  have  not  been  water  1 
for  some  time  arrives  at  a stream  which  is  likely  to  be  the  I: 
one  met  with  during  the  day,  the  horses  should  be  quickly  water 
without  unbridling,  and  the  march  be  resumed  Immediately  aft 
in  order  that  the  horses  may  not  become  ohilled. 

Q.  Can  all  these  directions  be  observed  in  war? 

A.  In  war  one  has  always  to  do  the  best  he  can.  and  in  f [ 
best  way  possible,  taking  as  a rational  standard  the  regulatic  - 
prescribed  in  peace  for  preserving  the  health  of  horses  and  m . 
Near  the  enemy  and  on  the  alert  a commander  would  keep  , t 
columns  closed  up,  have  his  arms  ready,  take  every  means 
have  his  command  in  readiness  to  meet  an  attack  or  repulse  o; 
no  matter  what  unexpected  event  should  occur. 

If  compelled,  by  bad  ground,  a ford,  a narrow  bridge,  etc., 
march  In  single  file,  the  commander  of  the  column  should  fo 
his  troops  successively  on  the  other  side  of  the  defile,  and 
sume  his  march  only  after  the  whole  command  has  been  prope 
formed  up.  If  making  a night  march  through  a diffcult  * 
wooded  country,  and  there  is  no  object  in  concealing  his  man  r 
the  commander  should  assemble  the  squadron  commanders  a 
give  them  the  following  instructions,  which  each  one  will  repi 
and  give  to  their  squadrons  on  rejoining  them;  the  trumpet 
will  be  placed  at  the  heads  of  their  respective  squadrons.  Tf 
will  repeat  every  signal,  no  matter  whence  it  comes. 

The  “march"  will  signify  "forward”. 

One  note,  “halt”.  Two  notes,  that  the  country  is  open,  z 
that  the  command  will  form  close  column  on  first  squadron.  Th 
notes,  that  a squadron  has  lost  the  road.  Four  notes,  that  . 
has  rejoined.  No  distance  will  be  left  between  squadrons.  1 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  march  in  the  colur 
at  the  heads  and  tails  of  their  respective  squadrons,  and  requ 
the  men  to  ride  head  to  croup,  and  keep  awake.  Each  squadi 
will  have  at  its  rear  an  officer  and  two  non-commissioned  office 
whose  duty  it  will  be  to  see  that  the  following  squadron  does  i 
lose  the  way.  If  at  a difficult  place  they  discover  that  they  , ~ 
not  followed,  they  will  leave  a troorer.  who  will  indicate  1 


52 


DETACHMENTS  PROPERLY  SO  CALLED 


position  by  calling  out.  As  soon  as  the  expected  squadron  comes 
d to  him  he  will  rejoin  his  own.  If  a squadron,  by  keeping  so 
I ir  to  the  rear,  gives  reason  to  fear  that  it  has  lost  the  road, 
ie  officer  in  rear  of  the  preceding  squadron  will  call  out,  and 
isave  the  information  brought  by  the  trooper  left  In  rear  passed 
om  mouth  to  mouth,  until  it  reaches  the  head  of  the  oolumn. 
he  commander  of  the  lost  squadron  will  inform  the  detachment 
iijmmander  of  the  state  of  affairs  by  sounding  three  notes,  which 
ill  be  repeated  by  all  the  trumpeters.  The  detachment  com- 
lander  will  halt  the  command  by  having  one  note  sounded.  A9 
ion  as  four  notes  have  signified  the  rejoining  of  the  missing 
i„|uadron,  the  sounding  of  the  "march”  will  put  the  oolumn  in 
,,  otion  again.  This  order  having  been  given,  the  officers  return 
,i  their  posts,  and  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers  and 

{ umpeters  are  placed  as  has  just  been  indicated. 

Q.  If  the  commander  of  a detaohment,  in  a hostile  country, 
b 'raid  of  reaching  his  bivouac  at  night,  and  finding  no  forage 
, lere,  finds  along  his  route  some  well-filled  barns,  what  should  he 
hij>? 

,i  A.  He  halts  the  detachment,  places  sentinels  at  the  doors 

,j'  the  barns,  dismounts  the  command,  makes  up  convenient 
I usses  of  forage,  which  each  trooper  packs  upon  his  horse.  That 
„)ne,  he  continues  his  march. 

UQ.  Should  a horse,  on  account  of  weakness  or  an  accident, 

, )t  be  able  to  keep  up  with  the  command? 

v . A.  Send  him  to  the  rear  in  charge  of  his  rider,  who  muslt 

ad  him. 

J Q.  Should  the  horse  be  so  severely  wounded  as  to  be  of  no 
Irthur  use? 

A.  The  commander  will  assemble  all  the  officers  and  the 
iterinarian,  and  if  they  decide  by  a unanimous  vote  that  the 
irse  is  incapable  of  further  work,  he  is  killed,  and  his  rider, 
iirrying  his  equipments,  will  be  sent  to  the  nearest  sub-depot  in 
i far. 

11 1 These  are  general  rules,  applicable  to  detachments  of  every 
■ !nd.  Circumstances  may  often  compel  a modification  of  the 
1 anner  of  applying  them.  We  now  pass  to  special  rules. 

mi  * * 

DETACHMENTS  PROPERLY  SO-CALLED 

lo ' 

I Q.  What  is  a detachment  properly  so  called? 
jfiA.  Troops  separated  by  order  from  the  corps  to  which 
j ey  belong  without  being  sent  on  reconnaissance,  guard  duty, 
itrolling,  foraging  escort  or  partisan  duty. 

, Q.  Explain. 

‘ A.  A commander  of  a detaohment  has  his  first  squadron  on 
I ily  at  a place  a league  distant  from  his.  He  receives  reports 
jljilch  leads  him  to  fear  that  the  detached  squadron  Is  not 
rong  enough  to  resist  an  attack  with  which  it  is  threatened: 

' sends  the  second  to  support  it,  and  places  its  commander 
jder  the  orders  of  that  of  the  first.  This  second  squadron 
1 iring  its  march,  is  on  detached  service  properly  so-called. 

Parts  of  commands  left  in  rear,  at  the  small  depots,  are 
” dered  to  rejoin  the  outposts;  they  are  on  detached  service 
operly  so-called  until  they  have  arrived  at  their  destination, 
m 

qv  * * 

lil 

is  I ADVANCE-GUARDS 

‘ General  Steingel,  an  Alsation,  was  an  excellent  hussar  officer; 

; had  served  under  Dumouriez  In  the  northern  campaigns,  and 


53. 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


was  a clever,  intelligent,  and  extremely  vigilant  man.  To  al 
the  characteristics  of  youth  he  joined  those  of  mature  years 
he  was  an  ideal  outpost  general.  Two  or  three  days  before  hi 
death  he  was  the  first  to  enter  Lezegno;  the  French  Geiera 
whol  arrived  a few  hours  later,  found  that  all  his  wants  had 
been  anticipated  and  everything  prepared  for  his  future  operations 
The  fords  and  defiles  had  been  reconnoitred,  guides  employee 
the  cure  and  postmaster  interrogated,  friendly  relations  estat 
lished  with  the  inhabitants,  spies  seit  out  in  various  directions 
the  letters  in  the  post-office  seized,  and  all  those  containin 
military  information  had  been  translated  and  abstracts  of  thei 
contents  made,  and  all  necessary  measures  taken  to  establis 
magazines  of  supplies  for  the  subsistence  of  the  army — Napoleon 
“Italian  Campaigns.” 

What  could  be  added  to  this  admirable  portrait  of  an  office 
of  the  advance-guard?  The  whole  science  of  that  duty  is 
expressed  in  those  few  lines.  Learn  it  by  heart;  repeat  it  tei 
times  a day;  store  it  well  in  your  memory,  make  it  a part  of  you 
thoughts,  absorb  the  spirit  of  it  so  thoroughly  that  at  an 
instant  it  may  be  brought  to  mind,  and  then  endeavor  to  emulat 
the  work  of  Steingel. 

To  deserve  the  title  of  a good  advance-guard  officer  it  i 
necessary,  so  to  speak,  to  be  capable  of  commanding  the  arm 
for  which  one  clears  the  way.  He  should  be  able  to  estimat 
what  is  required  for  the  deployment  of  the  columns  followini 
him,  the  positions  they  will  occupy,  the  wants  to  be  supplie 
and  the  attacks  they  will  have  to  meet. 

The  small  force  which  he  commands  often  occupies  but 
small  portion  of  his  thought,  for  it  is  merely  a point  in  the  grea 
space  which  demands  his  attention.  He  does  not  act  for  it,  bu 
for  that  which  follows  it.  He  is  not  acting  individually,  lik 
an  officer  on  a reconnaissance;  his  troops  are  merely  a part  c 
the  whole,  and  if  necessary  he  must  sacrifice  them,  even  to  th 
last  man,  to  hold  for  his  army  corps,  his  division,  the  key  t 
a pssition,  the  entrance  to  a defile,  etc. 

His  duties  are: 

1st.  To  know  well  the  ground  he  passes  over,  under  It1 

offensive  and  defensive  aspects. 

2d.  To  compel  the  enemy  to  deploy  and  show  his  strength 

3d.  To  discover  his  plans  and  appreciate  their  importance 
and  the  possibility  of  executing  them. 

4th  To  prepare,  so  to  speak,  for  the  accommodation  of  th 

troops  he  precedes,  to  obtain  for  them  everything  needed  in  th  . 
way  of  supplies,  and  to  collect  useful  information  of  every  kino  , 
There  is  no  chapter  of  this  volume  which  an  officer  of  the  advance  . 
guard  may  not  consult  with  profit;  so  I refer  him  to  those  whici 
are  concerned  with  details,  and  shall  confine  myself  to  indi 

eating  briefly  in  this  place  his  duties,  and  to  saying  what  ha 
not  been  said  in  preceding  chapters. 

An  advance-guard  officer  is  left,  more  or  less,  to  himself:  h 
may  be  ordered  to  march  in  such  a direction  and  arrive  promptl 
at  such  a place,  or  to  follow  the  enemy  prudently,  and  profit  b; 
his  mistakes,  taking  every  possible  advantage  of  them. 

Q.  In  the  first  place,  what  Is  he  to  do? 

A.  To  execute  his  orders  vigorously. 

Q.  In  the  second? 

A.  He  feels  his  way,  goes  step  by  step,  takes  such  or  such  ; 
route  only  after  having  well  weighed  the  consequences  of  his  de 
cision,  compared  the  special  duties  of  his  mission  with  th 
relative  importance  of  any  check  he  might  experience,  the  distanc  , 
from  his  supports,  etc. 

His  troops  march  in  echelons,  and  always  so  that  every  sub 
division  from  the  skirmish  line  to  the  last  files  of  the  rear-guart 


54 


ADVANCE  GUARDS 


i ill  be  duly  supported.  Each  platoon,  each  trooper,  even, 
n ccupies  a designated  place,  and  always  the  one  which  will  con- 
hi  ribute  most  to  the  efficiency  of  the  whole  force;  everything  is 
irulculated  beforehand,  nothing  left  to  chance, 
it  Every  indication  is  carefully  studied.  Should  he  come  upon 
abandoned  bivouacs,  he  reads  in  the  smoking,  sometimes  blood- 
s lained,  remains  the  proximity,  numbers,  losses,  fatigue,  and 
ilemoralization  of  the  enemy. 

« Should  he  see  at  the  forks  of  a road  numerous  footprints  of 
■ jen,  wheel-tracks,  footprints  of  horses,  he  halts,  and,  from  their 
i!i|reshness,  from  the  reports  of  the  peasants,  from  the  reconnais- 
sance he  sends  out,  and  by  his  maps,  he  judges  the  intentions 
u F the  enemy. 

Q.  Should  he  come  upon  a defile? 

Ci  A.  He  sends  scouts  along  the  heights  commanding  it,  explores 
with  care,  but  never  without  forming  his  troops  in  rear  of  it, 
li  j>'  as  to  be  prepared  in  case  of  a sudden  attack. 

::  Q.  If  he  passes  through  the  defile  and  fears  that  he  may  be 
a ut  off  and  separated  by  the  enemy  from  his  army  corps  or| 
it  ivision  ? 

A.  He  leaves  a sufficient  force  to  hold  it  until  satisfied  that 
re  danger  of  being  cut  off  is  passed. 

! Q.  If  he  arrives  in  front  of  a village? 

jl  A.  He  halts  his  troops  and  has  the  place  examined  by  the 
m bint  of  his  advance-guards;  if  the  enemy  is  not  there,  he  sends 
ji  ne  fourth  of  his  force  rapidly  through  the  village  to  surround 
:,  by  posting  vedettes  at  all  roads  leading  out  of  it  in  front; 
nese  vedettes  are  instructed  to  fall  back  briskly  at  the  sound  of 
a ie  first  shot  fired. 

Q.  If  he  establishes  himself  there? 
i|i  A.  He  seizes  the  church  steeple,  in  which  he  posts  a sentinel 
, uring  the  day;  locates  his  bivouac  in  a defensive  position  behind 
f ie  houses  on  his  line  of  retreat;  has  provisions  and  forage 
brought  to  it;  barricades  all  the  roads  by  which  the  enemy  might 
ohe  to  surprise  him,  leaving  open  only  a few  small  passages  nec- 
essary for  the  retreat  of  his  small  posts;  he  indicates  the  place  of 
. ssembly  in  case  of  alarm,  examines  all  the  inhabitants  who  can 
ive  any  information,  and  seizes  some  guides  whom  he  keeqs 
Mth  him  in  his  blvouao. 

“ Q.  What  is  an  alarm  place? 

A.  A position  considered  from  a military  standpoint,  the 
lost  suitable  for  a general  assembly  of  the  troops  in  case  of  an 
'Ttack;  consequently,  that  from  which  it  is  best  to  execute  any 
Movement,  either  to  the  front  or  rear.  It  is  upon  this  place, 
‘hell  known  in  advance,  that  all  the  small  posts  not  belonging 
:t  a the  advance-guard,  properly  so  called,  should  immediately 
1 ssemble  in  case  of  an  attack. 

' Q.  If  the  advance-guard  arrives  in  front  of  a village  at  night? 
I! ' A.  The  commander  halts  it  a few  hundred  paces  in  the  rear  of 
ie  village,  and  sends  a few  intelligent  troopers  to  reconnoitre 
J t.  These  creep  silently  up  to  the  first  houses,  halt,  listen, 

® nd  judge  by  the  sounds  heard  whether  the  enemy  is  present  or 
‘ ot.  One  of  them  dismounts,  climbs  over  a hedge,  approaches 
lighted  window,  looks  into  the  house,  and  then  returns  to  his 
orporal,  to  whom  he  reports  what  he  has  seen.  A peasant  is 
eized,  and,  with  a pistol  at  his  head  to  keep  him  quiet,  is 
aken  to  the  commander,  who  questions  him. 

Q.  If  our  advance-guard  ‘encounters  the  enemy  in  the  night? 
A.  If  the  enemy  has  not  discovered  it,  it  halts,  keeps  silence, 
tudles  him,  and  under  certain  circumstances,  attacks  him  unex- 
ectedly,  if  a favorable  opportunity  is  offered. 

Q.  If  the  encounter  occurs  in  the  day  time? 

A.  It  feels  the  enemy,  makes  him  deploy,  attacks  him,  while 
oncealing  its  own  forces  and  always  keeping  them  in  a good 


55 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


defensive  position,  until  the  arrival  of  the  proper  moment  f 
taking  the  offensive  with  its  entire  forces. 

Q.  If  the  enemy,  in  retreating,  endeavors  to  destroy  a bridg 

A.  It  drives  him  away  and  seizes  the  bridge. 

Q.  Should  it  drive  the  enemy  back  upon  a small  city?  - 

A.  It  presses  him  so  lively  that  he  will  have  no  time  to  destr 

the  supplies  in  the  place,  or  carry  off  men  who  could  give  usef  - 
information,  or  take  letters  from  the  post-office,  etc. 

Q.  If  the  commander  of  the  advance-guards  desires  to  gi 

the  city  an  exaggerated  idea  of  his  force,  and  of  the  troops  whii  a 
he  precedes,  in  order  that  the  ieport  may  be  carried  to  the  enen 
and  intimidate  him? 

A.  He  brings  in  by  several  roads,  and  unseen  by  the  inhabi  ■ 
ants,  a few  platoons  which  represent  the  heads  of  columns,  h . 
announces  the  coming  of  large  bodies,  orders  a great  quant!'  s-. 
of  rations,  a large  number  of  vehicles,  and  takes  good  care  ths  n 
the  enemy’s  spies  do  not  get  in  rear  of  him  and  discov  •; 
the  ruse. 

Q.  And  after  having  entered  the  city? 

A.  He  /selects  a good  military  position  and  sends  out  spi<  ■ 
to  the  front  and  both  flanks. 

Q.  If  the  advance-guard  comes  to  a river? 

A.  He  reconnoitres  its  banks  and  fords,  and  destroys  tf  .. 
latter  if  of  a nature  to  assist  the  enemy  in  attacking  or  cuttir  . 
off  our  advancing  army. 

Q.  If,  when  the  advance-guard  reaches  one  bank  of  a rive 

the  enemy  shows  himself  on  the  other? 

A.  The  commander  should  immediately  decide  upon  the  poin 
likely  to  be  used  by  the  enemy  to  effect  a crossing,  and  po:  . 

troops  in  front  of  them  to  resist  the  attempts. 

Q.  If,  at  night,  a weak  advance-guard  is  in  bivouac  in  fror 
of  the  enemy,  and  wishes  to  intimidate  him? 

A.  It  resorts  to  stratagem.  A great  number  of  fires  ai 

lighted  and  kept  burning  brightly  the  length  of  a long  line,  s 
as  to  give  an  exaggerated  idea  of  the  force  using  them.  A detacl 
ment  of  some  fifty  troopers  is  marched  round  and  round  the  fire 
so  as  to  give  the  impression  that  a long  column  is  arriving  t 
reinforce  the  command. 

Q.  If  a night  attack  is  feared? 

A.  After  the  fires  have  been  lighted  the  commander  give 

it  out  that  he  will  leave  in  the  morning,  and  then  during  th 

night  moves  off  silently  and  takes  up  a better  and  unknown  pos 

tion  well  to  the  rear  of  his  bivouac.  The  commander  of  an  advance 
guard  should,  as  a rule,  never  leave  his  troops — the  place  of  corn 
mand;  but  nevertheless,  should  he  consider  it  necessary,  in  order  t 
better  inform  himself  in  regard  to  the  situation,  to  risk  hi  : 

own  personal  safety,  he  must  do  so  only  after  having  wame 
the  second  in  command,  and  given  him  such  instructions  a 
will  enable  him  to  replace  the  commander,  no  matter  what  ma; 
happen. 

Q.  Before  moving  out  from  his  army  corps  or  division,  wha 
should  the  advance-guard  commander  do? 

A.  See  that  he  perfectly  understands  the  orders  given  hin  " 
by  the  general,  which  he  should  obtain  in  writing  if  possible 

he  asks  the  general  to  repeat  such  parts  of  them  as  are  no 
clearly  understood;  compare  his  map  with  that  of  the  general 
and  correct  his  own,  if  necessary;  sets  his  watch  by  his,  and  ar 
ranges  with  him  in  regard  to  the  frequency  with  which  report/  - 
are  to  be  made. 

Q.  If  the  general  leaves  it  discretionary  with  him  as  to  th/  > 
time  of  sending  back  reports? 

A.  Then  he  makes  them  frequently,  sometimes  in  writing 
sometimes  verbally;  but  the  latter,  be  it  understood,  are  entrustec 


56 


RECONN  01 SSANCES 


only  to  officers  or  intelligent  non-commissioned  officers,  after 
having  had  the  message  repeated  to  them  twice,  so  that  they 

are  certain  to  be  delivered  with  literal  fidelity. 

1 “I  have  arrived  at  X, — The  enemy  is  in  force — He  is  in  position; 
it  is  a strong  one;  he  has  infantry  and  artillery. — I need  in- 
fantry.— Shall  I remain  or  withdraw? — My  left  flank  is  turned 

and  I am  obliged  to  fall  back. — I am  losing  a great  many  men. 
— I have  taken  position  at  the  ravine  of  Z. — The  enemy  has 
lalted. — His  infantry  is  withdrawing;  it  is  a trick. — Numerous 
oolumns  are  marching  in  the  direction  of  Q. — They  consist  of 

Cavalry  only. — The  hussars  and  dragoons  which  were  in  front 
t >f  me,  have  been  replaced  by  the  cuirassiers  of  X and  the  hussars 
of  Y. — The  bridge  over  the  rivers  have  been  broken  down. — It 
vi  1 1 take  three  hours  to  repair  them. — I have  captured  two 

Niundred  infantry  and  one  piece  of  artillery  from  the  enemy. — He 
■t  makes  a false  move. — He  is  disconcerted. — He  has  abandoned 
Several  wagons. — -The  enemy  is  in  full  retreat,  and  I am  follow- 
|:  ng  him,  sword  in  hand. — He  will  lead  me  some  distance  this 

ivening. — The  roads  I am  passing  over  are  unsuited  to  the 
>assage  of  your  artillery. — I have  scouted  the  vicinity,  but  can 
i-ind  no  others,  etc.  (See  Reports) 

Q.  If  the  army  is  in  a foreign  country? 

, A.  The  commander  should  try  to  obtain  from  among  the 
rnen  of  the  command  some  who  speak  the  language  of  the  country 
rvell;  if  there  are  none,  he  has  some  ordered  to  join  him,  and 
eeps  them  near  his  own  person. 

1 Q.  What  next? 

, A.  He  makes  a rapid  inspection  of  his  command,  assures 
Simself  that  it  is  in  good  condition,  that  it  is  supplied  with  am- 
munition and,  if  possible,  with  forage  and  subsistance;  if  unac- 
quainted wUh  the  officers  placed  under  his  orders,  he  obtains  from 
' heir  immediate  commanders  what  information  he  can,  verbally; 
j.  hen  assigns  them  to  the  posts  where  they  can  be  most  usefully  em- 
i loyed.  (See  Chiefs  and  Officers) 

n:  * * 

RECONN  01  SSANCES 

. Every  military  operation  rests,  first,  upon  a thorough  knowledge 
H if  the  terrain  in  its  offensive  and  defensive  aspects;  and,  second, 
'pon  that  of  the  position,  strength,  and,  so  far  as  possible,  the 
a Mentions,  of  the  enemy. 

„ It  is  to  obtain  this  knowledge  with  some  degree  of  certainty 
I hat  officers  are  sent  on  reconnoissance.  The  command  of  a re- 
hi  .onnoissance  demands  a union  of  military  qualities  of  every  de- 
scription, and  indeed  necessitates  their  full  employment.  Upon 
j,nknown  ground,  where  one  is  isolated,  he  must  depend  upon  him- 
H plf  alone  and  find  in  his  own  powers  resources  equal  to  the  re- 
oonsibi  I ity  and  relative  importance  of  his  mission.  In  this 
hliusiness  it  is  not  only  a matter  of  seeing,  but  of  seeing  well,  ob- 
irving  clearly,  So  as  to  avoid  furnishing  faulty  or  incorrect  in- 
lit  nrmation  to  the  army  corps  which  regulates  its  movements  by  the 
ill  ports  received  from  you. 

oi|  To  reconnoitre,  one  must  undertake  the  work,  relying  entirely 
ilpon  himself,  for  all  around  him  are  hostile,  and  interested  in  his 
instruction;  and  after  the  completion  of  his  work,  one  must  re- 
nt hrn  without  being  attacked,  much  less  captured. 

Captured!  Frightful  idea!  What  shame  is  suggested  by  the 
Ik  ord!  How  much  more  bitter  still  the  thought,  if  the  commander 
a reconnoissance  remembers  that  he  is  responsible  not  only  for 
f[  e men  of  his  own  command,  but  also  for  those  of  the  brigade, 


57 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


division  or  army  corps  which  his  operations  should  screen  and 
protect. 

The  art  of  withdrawing  from  a reconnoissance  consists,  first, 
in  avoiding  observation  by  the  enemy,  but  if  it  be  impossible  to 
escape  his  lynx  eye  and  prevent  a pursuit,  the  point  then  is  to 
have  so  well  learned  the  country  passed  over  in  advancing,  by 
observation,  information  obtained  in  regard  to  it,  inferences,  and 
by  having  calculated  pretty  accurately  the  disposition  and  ar- 
rangement of  the  troops  which  may  bar  our  passage  that  we  may 
follow  roads  which  will  throw  the  pursuers  off  our  track,  or 
reduce,  the  front  of  attack  so  as  to  make  it  only  equal  to  that 
of  the  defense. 

If,  in  spite  of  these  precautions  the  reconnoissance  is  cut  off, 
after  having  exhausted  all  its  skill  in  manoeuvring,  then  it  has 
recourse  to  the  employment  of  force.  This  will  not  fail  of  suc- 
cess if  each  man  is  convinced  in  his  own  mind  of  this  great  truth: 

A mounted  man  may  pass  wherever  he  is  determined  to  go. 

The  first  care  then  of  a commander  of  a reconnaissance  should 
be  to  estimate  correctly  the  strength  of  his  detachment,  to  hus- 
band it,  to  recuperate  it  in  time  to  always  have  it,  as  much  as 
possible,  wholly  at  his  disposal. 

I repeat  it,  the  strength  of  the  horse  is  the  trooper’s  fortune; 
if  it  be  all  expended  in  an  hour,  what  will  remain?  The  little 
which  ordinary  prudence  might  have  preserved,  might  have  saved 
his  life  and  been  the  means  of  his  obtaining  the  cross  of  honor.  - 
The  officer  on  reconnoissance,  more  than  any  other,  should  bear 
this  fact  in  mind. 

He  who  has  a long  reconnoissance  to  make,  the  duration  of 
which  is  unknown,  should  estimate  exactly  his  strength,  compare  - 
and  adapt  it  to  the  demands  to  be  made  upon  it,  and  expend  no 
more  than  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the  time  being. 

Let  him  not  march  over  soft  ground  which  would  fatigue  his 

horses,  nor  double  his  gait  when  unnecessary:  for  the  first  need 

of  a trooper  or  reconnoissance  is  a good  horse  in  sound  con- 
dition. Let  your  action  always  be  the  result  of  cool,  clear  and 
prompt  reflection.  Let  the  most  minute  vigilance  observe  and 
correct  everything  which  might  delay,  trammel  or  divide  your 
action,  and  thus  remove  the  causes  of  useless  dangers. 

I have  already  said  that  the  conduct  of  a reconnoissance  de- 

mands a union  of  all  the  military  qualities  of  the  light-cavalry- 
man: it  will  be  necessary  then  for  an  officer  commanding  one  to 
study  nearly  all  the  chapters  of  this  book. 

As  to  the  topographical  work  required,  I can  do  no  better  than 
to  quote  literally  General  La  Roche  Aymon:  “Concisely  stated, 
here  are  the  natural  and  artificial  objects  composing  the  lo- 

calities of  the  terrain,  which  should  be  observed.” 


WOODS 

“Their  nature,  extent,  kind  of  soil  on  which  they  grow;  whether 
they  have  underbrush;  their  situation  with  reference  to  the  roads 
by  which  they  are  reached:  whether  there  are  villages  withir 
range  of  them;  whether  many  roads  traverse  or  cross  them;  where 
do  they  come  from  and  where  do  they  lead.” 


MOUNTAINS 

“Their  nature,  wooded  or  open:  rocky,  earthy  or,  pebbly, 

whether  they  command  the  wood,  and  on  which  side;  wtiethe 


58 


RIVERS  AND  SMALL  STREAMS 


ilopes  are  steep  or  aentle;  whether  the  roads  by  which  they 
ire  ascended  run  straight  up  or  wind  along  their  flanks;  if 
:here  are  plateaux  on  their  summits,  (whether  they  are  wooded  or 
/pen,  what  is  their  extent,  whether  the  opposite  slope  is  steep, 
ind  whether  they  are  commanded  by  higher  mountains. 

* * 

RIVERS  AND  SMALL  STREAMS 

‘‘Their  width,  and  direction  with  reference  to  the  road;  the 
lature  of  their  banks — whether  one  commands  the  other;  whether 
.he  stream  passes  through  canons  or  meadows;  whether  those 
meadows  are  always  practicable  or  only  at  certain  seasons  of 
:he  year,  during  frost  or  drought;  the  bridges  and  fords  within 
ihree  miles  to  the  right  or  left,  the  names  of  villages  or  places 
lear  which  they  may  be  found,  and  whether  they  are  suitable 
or  the  passage  of  artillery?” 

* * 

PLAINS 

“Their  approximate  extent;  about  the  number  of  villages  that 
nay  be  seen  on  them;  the  nature  of  the  ground — whether  it  is 
■ imply  made  up  of  fields,  or  rather  meadows,  ponds,  lakes,  or  mere 
iooIs  mingled  together.  It  may  be  easily  seen  how  important 
t is  for  a body  of  cavalry  which  must  move  with  celerity,  without 
eeling  its  way,  to  know  perfectly  in  advance  the  ground  upon  which 
t comes,  in  order  not  to  be  arrested  in  its  movements  by  unfore- 
seen obstacles;  from  this  it  follows  that  officers  and  non-oommis- 
ioned  officers  charged  with  making  reconnoissance  should  satisfy 
:hemselves  as  to  the  means  by  which  the  fields  are  enclosed,  and 
mow  whether  these  fields  are  cut  up  or  subdivided  by  very  wide 
r deep  ditches.” 


ROADS 

“Their  nature,  whether  they  run  straight  or  wind  about;  what 
orders  them  to  the  right  and  left  within  cannon  range;  whether, 
f closed  within  gorges,  they  do  not  become  sunken  roads;  the 
vidth  of  front  with  which  troops  can  march  on  them.” 


CITIES 

"Their  position;  the  surrounding  localities;  whether  they  have 
/alls  and  gates;  whether  one  could  establish  himself  or  take  up  a 
ood  defensive  position  within  them;  the  roads  which  lead  to 
nem.” 


MARKET  TOWNS  AND  VILLAGES 

“Their  situation;  the  surrounding  localities;  the  arrangements 
f the  houses — whether  they  are  separated  by  gardens;  wtiether 

Iie  gardens  are  enclosed  by  hedges,  walls,  or  fences;  the  number 
f solid  houses,  and  their  location,  as  well  as  that  of  the  ohuroh 

59 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


and  cemetery;  whether  the  cemetery  is  enclosed  by  walls;  and,  .. 
finally,  whether  a stream  or  river  runs  through  or  goes  around 
these  towns  and  villages.” 

War  has  its  routine  performances  also,  in  spite  of  the  dangers 
attending  them,  in  spite  of  the  terrible  and  daily  proofs  of  their  ... 
viciousness,  their  fatality.  Why?  For  these  reasons.  The  older 
the  armies,  the  more  powerful  the  sway  of  routine.  If  that  was  , 
the  case  when  the  sound  of  cannon  was  heard  daily,  when  every  r. 
day  was  one  of  practical  instruction,  how  much  more  true  must 
it  be  after  fifteen  years  of  peace,  with  troops  of  all  classes — the 
very  old  as  well  as  the  very  young. 

Routine  is  the  tradional  science  of  mediocrity.  The  axioms 
which  it  bases  upon  an  unreflecting  experience  are  listened  to 
with  admiration  by  those  who  have  as  yet  seen  nothing;  for  they 
recount  for  the  benefit  of  the  inexperienced  things  not  found  in 
their  books,  and  assume  a dignity  and  gravity  for  the  respectful  ?: 
listener  because  of  their  coming  from  mouths  shaded  with  long  • 
white  mustaches. 

Let  us  then  distinguish  between  traditions  and  mere  routine,  % 
and,  while  disregarding  the  latter,  seize  with  avidity  the  principles 
based  upon  the  former. 

One  of  the  routine  faults  which  I have  seen  committed  so  often  ' 
in  our  army,  in  spite  of  the  frequent  and  terrible  lessons  given 
by  its  practioe,  is,  that  one  cannot  make  a reconnoissance  without 
attacking  the  enemy.  This  absurdly  false  principle  naturally  en- 
tails a series  of  consequences  as  false  as  itself.  A large  force  is 
always  sent  on  a reconnoissance,  and,  as  a result,  the  regiments 
are  overworked,  difficulties  are  multiplied  and  movements  delayed; 
finally,  a confidence  in  one’s  strength  and  an  ill-advised  pride  lead  ' 
to  a forgetfullness  of  the  object  in  view,  an  unequal  combat,  an 
embarrassed  retreat,  and  a complete  defeat. 

Many  reconnoissances  are  badly  conducted  because  the  numbers 
engaged  are  too  great  to  see  without  being  seen,  and  yet  too  - 
feeble  to  make  a successful  attack  or  successfully  resist  one.  ‘ 

The  strength  of  reconnoitring  detachment  should  be  great  in 
only  one  case — that  where  it  is  intended  to  make  an  attack;  • 
then  its  number  should  be  as  large  as  possible. 

In  every  other  case  they  should  be  composed  of  a few  men  only 
who,  intelligent  and  well  mounted,  should  be  able  to  go  any-  * 
where,  conceal  themselves  behind  a rock,  a clump  of  bushes,  and,  1 
if  pursued,  are  not  obliged  to  stop,  for  they  can  flee  more  rapidly 
than  the  enemy  can  follow. 

Let  us  then  establish  this  as  a principle;  to  reconnoitre  does 
not  necessarily  involve  an  attack. 

Sometimes  a reconnoissance  will  have  to  attack  the  enenty, 
but  only  for  the  purpose  of  furthering  the  objeot  of  the  recon-  1 
noissance;  but  the  attack  is  not  the  end,  but  the  means  of 
attaining  it.  This  means  should  be  employed  only  when  the 
reconnoissance  cannot  succeed  without  it. 

If  then,  at  the  head  of  two  hundred  men,  you  can  better  observe 
the  enemy  by  concealing  two  of  your  men  in  the  corner  of  a wood 
than  by  engaging  your  whole  force,  employ  the  first  method  in 
preference  to  the  second. 

The  most  successful  reconnoissance  is  that  which  collects 
the  greatest  amount  of  information,  brings  back  all  its  horses  and 
men  in  good  condition;  and  not  that  which,  mistaking  its  mission, 
employs  force  instead  of  skill.  In  my  opinion,  the  officer  who 
resorts  to  the  former  is  gravely  culpable,  and  should  suffer 
exemplary  punishment. 

The  Russian  light  cavalry  does  not  act  like  ours.  During  the 
Russian  campaign  we  had  the  advance-guard,  and  were  marching 
from  Orcha  to  Witebsk.  On  arriving  at  Babinowistchi  we  saw 
near  a wood  a single  Cossack  passing  through  a clearing;  we 


60 


MARKET  TOWNS  AND  VILLAGES 


; halted,  and  formed  up  for  action.  A squadron  was  sent  to  the 
clearing  and  succeeded  in  capturing  two  Cossacks,  whose  horses 
were  exhausted  by  fatigue;  three  others  escaped.  We  remained 
l in  position  for  quite  a long  time  and  carefully  explored 
the  country,  but  found  no  one.  The  prisoners  were  interrogated, 
; and  informed  us  that  five  of  them  had  been  sent  out  on  a 

! reconnoissance  from  Witebsk  to  Orcha,  a distance  of  twenty  leagues 
1 that  they  had  followed  us  the  whole  morning;  that  not  one  of 
" our  movements  had  escaped  their  notice;  the  three  other  Cossacks 
! rejoined  their  troops  with  the  information  they  had  gained,  and 
a few  days  afterward,  at  this  same  Babinowistchi,  a reconnoissance, 
# consisting  of  two  officers  and  fifty  men  of  our  regiment,  was 

! captured  in  a body  by  the  Russians. 

1 A second  fault  due  to  routine,  which  I have  seen  commited 
1 only  too  often  in  our  army,  is  the  sending  out  of  detachments, 

1 generally  composed  of  the  same  number  of  men,  at  certain  specified 
f hours.  When  reconnoissances  composed  of  the  same  number  of 
imen  are  sent  out  at  the  same  hours  every  day,  over  the  same 

i roads,  to  the  same  places,  their  fate  may  be  easily  predicted, 

t Reconnoissances  should,  as  far  as  possible;  march  so  as  to 
be  concealed  from  view.  While  under  cover  their  rate  of  march 
•;  may  be  slower  than  when  on  an  open  plain  over  which  their  course 
i may  be  easily  followed.  Hence,  when  there  is  any  reason  to  fear 
( discovery,  plains  should  be  traversed  at  night;  if  they  must  be 
. crossed  in  daytime,  the  command  should  move  at  the  trot  so  as 
i to  get  out  of  sight  as  soon  as  possible. 

J There  is  always  reason  to  fear  being  betrayed  to  the  enemy  by 
the  peasants  of  the  country.  To  diminish  this  danger  the  detach- 
ments should  avoid  all  villages  which  they  are  not  obliged  to 
pass  through  or  reconnoitre.  To  do  that  the  detachments  should 

Iicarry  with  it  provisions  and  forage  for  men  and  horses,  make  all 
halts  in  out  of  the  way  places,  from  which  they  can  see  to  a dis- 
tance,  and  in  which  dismounted  men  properly  posted  (will  be  a 
sufficient  guard. 

If  a reconnoissance  must  halt  in  a village,  let  it  be  carefully 
explored  before  it  is  occupied.  Place  flying  vedettes  on  the  out- 
Iside  of  it,  upon  the  flanks,  to  arrest  all  peasants  who  may  attempt 
1 1 to  escape  and  give  information  to  the  enemy.  The  halt  should 

I last  only  long  enough  tn  allow  the  place  to  be  examined,  to 
obtain  guides  and  useful  information,  and  procure  supplies. 

| If  the  village  is  situated  in  an  open  plain,  let  the  detachment 
Ibe  assembled  at  the  foot  of  the  church-steeple,  where  the  horses 
: may  be  unbridled  and  fed.  A look-out  will  be  placed  in  the 
steeple  to  give  timely  notice  |of-  the  approach  of  the  enemyj 
KThis  man,  and  the  flying  vedettes  of  whom  I have  before  spoken, 
will  be  able  to  perfectly  protect  the  detachment  from  surprise. 
At  night  the  detachment  will  withdraw  from  the  village,  and, 

if  it  is  desired  to  conceal  its  route,  it  will  go  out  on  the  side 
[opposite  to  the  direction  it  intends  to  take,  and  will  regain  the 
ijilDroper  route,  by  making  a detour.  The  rear-guard  will  take 

orecautions  to  see  that  it  is  not  followed  by  anyone, 
ij  If  the  reconnissance  is  retreating,  followed  by  the  enemy,  and 
is  compelled  to  pass  through  a village,  it  will  do  so  as  rapidly 
as  possible. 

If  the  reconnoissance  has  reason  to  fear  an  attempt  to  surprise 
its  bivouac  at  night,  it  will  light  its  fires  and,  afterward  with- 
drawing, will  go  and  establish  itself,  without  fires  and  without 

loise,  at  some  place  several  hundred  yards  from  the  abandoned 
jivouac. 

If  the  reconnoissance  marches  at  night  and  at  a distance  from 
;he  enemy,  the  guide  should  be  mounted  upon  a white  hoise,  which 
will  distinguish  him,  and  which  can  always  be  more  easily  followed 
:han  any  other  in  the  darkness. 


61 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


If  marching  at  night  and  near  the  enemy,  and  it  is  desired  tc 
conceal  the  movement,  no  white  horses  should  be  allowed  with 
the  advance-guard. 

If  marching  along  a paved  road,  the  detachment  should  keep  t< 
the  dirt  portions  on  the  sides,  so  as  to  muffle  the  sound  of  th( 
horses'  feet  which  might  otherwise  be  heard  at  a great  distance  - 

If  near  the  enemy,  the  men  will  be  forbidden  to  smoke,  as  th< 
fiie  in  the  pipes  might  illuminate  their  faces  and  betray  thei i 
presence. 

Finally,  if,  near  the  enemy,  it  is  desired  to  observe  him  close 
ly,  the  detachment  will  turn  his  position,  then,  halting  the  mair  :. 
body,  detach  two  or  three  very  intelligent  men  who,  like  game  : 
hunters,  will  creep  along  silently  from  shadow  to  shadow,  to  con 
ceal  their  movements. 

Upon  reaching  their  point  of  observation  they  will  discover  : 
every  thing  which  it  is  possible  to  learn,  and  then  return  with 
their  reports,  employing  in  their  retreat  the  same  care  as  ir  ■ 
advancing. 

If  the  commander  of  a reconnoissance,  after  having  well  esti 
mated  the  strength  of  the  enemy,  can,  without  danger,  make  c 
few  prisoners  or  alarm  the  enemy's  camp,  he  should  do  so,  pro- 
vided that  upon  his  departure  from  camp  discretionary  orders  wer< 
given  him.  In  1814,  General  Maison  ordered  an  officer  of  the  Rec 
Lancers  of  the  Imcerial  Guard  to  set  out  for  Lille  with  a hundrec 
men  to  reconnoitre  the  enemy  in  Menin,  and  to  bring  back  minute 
and  definite  information  in  regard  to  him.  The  officer  left  his 
camp  at  2:30  P.  M.,  and  the  sun  was  setting  when  the  steeples 
of  Menin  appeared  in  sight.  He  had  perfectly  masked  the  move-  . 
ments  of  the  detachment,  which  he  concealed  at  a place  about  a hah 
league  distant  from  the  city.  Night,  and  one  of  the  darkest  kind 
came  on  when  he  approached  the  city  with  only  one  platoon,  avoid 
Ing  the  paved  roads,  and  concealed  the  platoon  within  musket  range  . 
of  the  place.  He  then  slipped  into  the  outskirts,  accompanied  by  ■ 
one  officer,  one  non-commissioned  officer,  and  a trumpeter,  dis- 
mounted, turned  his  horse  over  to  his  orderly,  and  concealec 
himself  in  a ditch  near  the  bridge.  The  scouting  detachments 
of  the  enemy  re-entered  successively  and  passed  close  by  him. 

In  spiie  of  the  darkness  of  the  night,  their  silhouettes  stood  ouf 
clearly  against  the  sky-line  so  that  he  counted  them  man  by  man 
and  observed  the  cut  of  the  different  uniforms.  Possessed  of  this 
Information,  whioh  furnished  certain  Indications  of  the  number  anc 
composition  of  the  hostile  forces,  assured  that  all  the  scouting 
parties  had  re-entered,  and  that  nothing  more  was  to  be  feared  or 
this  side  of  the  river,  he  sent  for  a dozen  lancers. 

A peasant  coming  from  one  of  the  houses  discovered  him  and 
wished  to  give  the  alarm;  he  ordered  the  non-eommissiored  officei 
to  seize  him,  which  he  did;  and  holding  a pistol  to  his  head,  lec 
him  to  the  rear.  The  lancers  came  up  silently,  and  at  the  Instant 
when  the  enemy’s  post  was  about  to  open  the  turning  bridge  h { 
placed  himself  at  the  head  of  the  lancers,  charged  the  post,  con- 
fident of  his  own  security,  captured  eighteen  mounted  men,  and 
then  made  a rapid  and  successful  retreat  vlth  t-hem.  He  brought 
back  to  his  General  Information  of  the  most  trustworthy  kind 
and  that  without  having  even  a man  wounded. 

In  1809,  General  Curely,  at  that  time  a captain  and  aid-de-camp 
with  me  on  the  staff  of  General  Edward  Colbert,  was  charged 
with  the  duty  of  reconnoitring  the  march  of  the  Austrian  army 
which  was  retreating  before  our  Army  of  Italy. 

At  the  head  of  one  hundred  troopers  he  preceded  our  division 
at  a distance  of  ten  leagues,  turned  the  flank  of  the  Austrians,  and 
moved  so  secretly  to  their  rear  that  near  the  close  of  the  day 
he  had  his  command  secreted  in  a wood  not  more  than  three  fourth* 


62 


MARKET  TOWNS  AND  VILLAGES 


, of  a league  in  rear  of  the  village  in  which  the  headquaters  of 
the  Archduke  were  established.  A great,  dusty  plain  separated 
him  from  this  village.  Two  or  three  Hungarian  marauders  whom 
he  had  arrested  gave  him  much  useful  information.  A large 
drove  of  cattle,  returning  from  the  fields  and  moving  toward 
the  village,  passed  near  by  his  place  of  concealment;  he  seized 

the  herders  and  kept  the  cattle  in  the  wood  until  it  was  nearly 

dark;  then  moving  it  out  and  putting  his  troopers,  leading 

their  horses,  in  the  middle  of  the  herd,  he  directed  the  whole 
towards  the  village,  under  the  protection  of  the  thick  cloud  of 
1 dust  which  was  raised  by  the  moving  mass.  The  night,  the 

T! : dust,  the  weariness  of  the  enemy’s  troops,  the  absence  of  any 

fear  among  the  Austrians  of  an  attack  from  the  side  from  which 
the  herd  came,  served  the  design  of  Curely  so  well  that  he 

penetrated  the  centre  of  the  village,  and  with  his  own  hand  shot 
one  of  the  sentinels  of  the  Archduke,  the  commander-in-chief. 

At  this  signal  his  men  mounted  their  horses,  and  after  having 
used  their  sabres  for  some  minutes  and  profiting  by  the  aston- 
ishment and  confusion  of  the  enemy,  left  the  village,  and  on 
the  following  day  rejoined  Colbert’s  brigade  without  having  lost  a 
i man  or  a horse.  The  position  of  the  headquarters  of  the  Aus- 
: trian  army,  having  been  definitely  located,  gave  reliable  indi- 

. cations  of  the  whereabouts  of  our  Army  of  Italy,  which  we  joined 
n two  days  afterward,  and  with  it  had  the  combats  at  Karako, 
Pappa  and  Raab. 

After  these  two  examples,  for  whose  historical  accuracy  I can 
vouch,  I believe  it  would  be  well  to  give  one  a little  more  In  de- 
tail, which  we  can  follow  in  the  map  annexed  to  the  chapter  on 
Topography. 

Captain  A,  sent  to  the  headquarters  of  the  division,  receives 
the  following  order: 

“Captain  A will  set  out  at  once  with  one  hundred  men  of  the 
8 Eighth  Hussars. 

He  will  reconnoitre  the  small  town  of  Neustadt. 

If  the  enemy  occupies  the  town,  he  will  try  to  capture  and 
bring  back  some  of  them. 

He  will  obtain  information  of  the  Prussian  army  corps  which 
should  have  arrived  near  that  place. 

He  will  carefully  examine  and  report  upon  the  country  passed 
over,  its  configuration,  the  nature  and  conditions  of  its  roads, 
bridges,  watercourses,  etc. 

He  will  rejoin  by  10  A.  M.  tomorrow. 

General,  etc. 

Bivouac  near  Grossthurm,  5 A.  M.,  June  IS,  1892. 

[ The  captain,  after  having  received  this  order  from  the  general, 
makes  a tracing  of  the  country  he  is  to  pass  over  from  the 
headquarters  map.  Then  he  assumes  command  of  the  detachment, 
which  has  been  detailed  by  the  adjutant.  He  inspects  his  de- 
tachment, sees  that  the  cartridge-boxes  are  in  good  condition,  the 
horses  well  shod,  that  the  wallets  contain  bread  and  oats,  and 

then  moves  the  command  out  in  columns  of  twos.  He  halts,  and 

allows  the  detachment  to  file  by  him.  Three  horses  are  limping, 
two  are  too  weak  to  keep  up,  others  are  known  to  neigh;  some 
dogs  have  joined  the  detachment;  these  are  all  sent  back  and 

left  at  the  bivouac. 

As  soon  as  he  has  got  beyond  the  outposts  and  line  of  patrols, 
he  halts,  has  the  girths  tightened,  removes  the  pennons  from  the 
lances,  slings  musketoons,  turns  back  the  Schabraques  and  places 
some  Alsatians  at  the  head  of  the  column,  with  orders  to  speak 
i nothing  but  German.  Among  the  Alsatians  there  is  an  officer 

whom  he  orders  to  ride  by  his  side,  putting  a non-commissioned 
officer  in  command  of  his  platoon. 


63 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


The  officer  next  in  rank  to  the  commander  will  ride  at  the’ 
tail  of  the  column  to  see  that  it  is  kept  closed  up. 

The  advance-guard  is  composed  of  ten  men,  commanded  by  an 
Alastian  non-commissoned  officer,  and  marches  one  hundred  paces 
in  advance  of  the  detachment. 

As  the  country  is  open,  the  ground  wet,  and  the  march  must: 
be  rapid,  he  detaches  no  flankers  as  they  would  only  fatigue  their  I 
horses  and  delay  the  march  for  nothing. 

The  rear-guard,  composed  of  a corporal  and  four  men,  marches* 
fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  column. 

The  advance-guard  appears  to  hesitate;  the  captain  forms  fours,  i 
and  separates  his  platoons  so  that  they  will  be  a hundred  paces! 
apart  and  on  the  right-hand  side  of  the  road,  their  right  flanks  I 
resting  on  the  ditch.  He  halts  the  column  and  sends  to  inquire 
the  cause  of  the  advance-guard’s  halting;  some  troopers  have  been) 
seen,  but  have  proved  to  belong  to  one  of  our  returning  reconnois- 
sances.  He  questions  its  commander,  but  he  has  been  in  a direc- 
tion different  from  that  in  which  we  are  going,  and  knows  nothing 
of  interest  except  that  some  of  the  enemy’s  patrols — from  twelve 
to  twenty-five  men — have  been  seen  on  the  Ingoisheim  road,  about 
a league  from  where  we  now  are. 

He  closes  his  column  again  and  resumes  the  march.  The 
aspect  of  the  country  begins  to  change;  it  becomes  broken,  and 
some  hills  which  command  the  plain  are  seen  on  the  right.  The 
captain  detaches  three  well-mounted  men  to  follow  the  summits  ( 
of  these  hills  and  flank  the  detachment.  At  the  end  of  two  hours'  - 
marching  the  extremity  of  the  plateau  is  reached.  A large,  rich 
valley  lies  at  his  feet.  A cross-roads,  where  four  roads  join,  is 
seen;  the  first,  to  the  right,  is  metalled,  and  must  be  that  of 
Ingoldsheim;  the  second  is  only  a small  dirt  road,  which  winds  I 
along  the  mountain,  and  seems,  in  crossing  the  plain,  to  lead  to- 
wards the  woods,  which  follow  and  enclose  the  right-hand  side  I 
of  the  valley.  The  third  is  a metalled  road  which  continues  the 
Ingoldsheim  road  on  to  Meustadt  by  the  way  of  Berndorf. 

Consulting  his  map,  the  captain  is  convinced  that  he  is  not 
mistaken;  in  fact,  it  shows  the  extremity  of  the  plateau  and  the 
cross-roads  two  leagues  distant.  He  has  marched  two  hours.  It 
shows  Berndorf  two  miles  in  front  in  the  valley,  and  at  the  left- 
hand  extremity  of  the  plateau,  and  at  that  distance  a village  is 
visible. 

The  officer  says  in  good  German  to  the  peasant,  “Comrade,  have 
you  seen  any  of  our  people?  Who  are  your  people?  Why,  our 
brothers,  the  Prussians.  No;  but  I know  that  some  of  them  have* 
arrived  at  Neustadt  and  Baumdorf.  And  the  French?  Ah,  the 
scoundrels,  they  say  that  ten  thousand  of  their  cavalry  are  at 
Grossthurm.  So  many  as  that?  Yes,  at  least.  Well  we  are  going 
to  rejoin  our  comrades  at  Neustadt;  which  way  must  we  go?  Go 
dow'n  that  road  there.  This  one?  No;  that  goes  to  Ingoldsheim. 
That  one?  No,  that  is  a small  road  which  leads  through  the 
woods  by  Baumdorf;  but  take  the  other,  which  is  metalled,  and 
will  lead  you  to  the  village  which  you  see  yonder.  Yes,  I see, 
the  one  near  the  mountain?  No;  that  is  Bonn,  but  farther  to  the' 
right  in  the  valley.  There?  Yes,  that  is  Berndorf.  Is  it  far  off? 
Two  leagues.  And  from  Berndorf  to  Neustadt  how  far?  In  five 
hours'  riding  you  will  reach  it.  Thanks;  good-by.”  The  captain 
has  then  made  no  mistake.  He  reflects:  the  enemy  is  in  the  1 
vicinity,  he  must  have  some  posts  in  the  valley,  but  as  it  is  now 
broad  daylight  the  movement  of  the  detachment  cannot  be  con- 
cealed, especially  if  it  follows  the  highway;  the  horses  will  soon 
need  rest;  the  woody  curtain  on  his  right  which  follows  the  line  ' 
of  the  valley  and  extends  as  far  as  Baumdorf  may  be  used  to  mask 


64 


MARKET  TOWNS  AND  VILLAGES 


s march,  he  does  not  hesitate,  but  turning  to  the  right  along  the 
irt  road,  he  descends  the  mountain  and  crossing  the  plain  at  a 
ot,  reaches  the  wood. 

He  follows  the  paths  which  he  thinks  run  in  the  direction  of 
ie  march  he  has  to  make.  His  pocket  compass  aids  him,  and,  in 
efault  of  that,  the  sun.  The  valley  which  he  sees  to  his  left 
trough  the  opening  in  the  wood  will  prevent  his  wandering  off 
>o  far  to  the  right.  His  march  is  made  in  silence.  His  men 
mverse  only  in  low  tones,  and  adjust  their  arms  so  that  they 
ill  not  rattle  against  the  buckles  of  their  belts,  strike  their 
irrups,  spurs,  etc.;  here  the  difficulties  of  the  ground  compel 
e men  to  dismount,  but  they  double  the  gait  when  they  remount, 
hese  movements  are  all  executed  without  command,  eaoh  one 
Mowing  the  example  set  by  the  head  of  the  column. 

The  column  marches  as  well  closed  up  as  possible;  the  advance 
id  rear  guards  are  well  drawn  in. 

It  is  five  hours  since  the  command  left  Grossthurm;  the  place 
here  it  finds  itself  at  present  is  unfrequented,  and  the  shade  of 
lie  wood  is  thick.  The  captain  leaves  the  path,  enters  an  open- 
g surrounded  by  heavy  shrubbery,  and  dismounts, 
i Two  sentinels,  looking  in  different  directions,  are  posted  so  as 
i see  everything  without  being  seen;  one  half  of  the  horses  are 
i ibridled  and  fastened  to  trees,  and  allowed  to  eat  grass,  oats 
such  leaves  as  they  can  reach  without  being  untied;  the  men, 
front  of  their  horses,  their  bridles  on  their  arms,  eat  their 
eakfast  in  silence. 

During  the  march,  the  captain  has  not  neglected  to  make  ob- 
rvations  which,  in  case  of  the  non-success  of  his  undertaking, 
II  save  him  if  obliged  to  return  by  the  road  on  which  he  came. 

I le  connected  sketch  he  has  draiwn  in  his  pocket-book,  the  broken 
i anches  left  at  the  entrance  to  the  woods,  his  recollections  of 
e features  of  the  country,  are  all  guides  to  be  used  on  his  re- 
rn.  At  1 P.  M.  the  command  is  remounted  and  resumes  the 
jrch.  The  ground  is  rough,  and  at  6 P.  M.  the  horses  are  very 
inch  fatigued,  when  the  road  to  Baumdorf  is  encountered.  What 
all  the  captain  do? 

He  is  still  two  leagues  from  Neustadt.  He  does  not  know 
lether  the  enemy  occupies  that  place  in  force  or  not;  the  de- 
. ihment  is  tired,  and  if  he  were  obliged  to  execute  a retreat 
s der  the  fire  of  fresh  troops,  he  would  without  doubt  suffer  serious 
■ses;  on  the  other  hand,  should  he  march  directly  on  Neustadt 
! would  arrive  there  just,  at  dusk,  at  a time  when  the  oavalry  is 

r vays  on  its  guard;  if  he  halts  where  he  is  without  resting  or 

i iding  his  horses,  his  prospects  will  be  no  better. 

■ He  conceals  himself  near  the  road,  and  soon  seizes  a man 
ssing  by,  and  tells  him  that  if  he  makes  any  outory*he  will 
!>ot  him  on  the  spot.  “You  come  from  Neustadt.?  Yes.  Are 
1 1 Prussians  there?  Yes.  Cavalry  or  infantry?  Cavalry.  About 
w many  men?  I don’t  know.  Is  there  a village  near  here? 
thin  a quarter  of  a league.  Any  isolated  farms?  Several.  Are 
i well  acquainted  with  them?  Yes.  How  are  their  buildings 

-anged,  and  where  are  they?  There  Is  a rich  one  near  the 

lage,  and  it  can  be  entered  easily,  because  it  has  no  enclosed 
Jrt.  And  the  other?  It  is  three-fourths  of  a league  from  the 
lage  and  half  a league  from  here,  situated  upon  the  border  of 
i wood  and  the  marsh  on  the  side  of  Neustadt;  it  is  not  so 
h as  the  first  named;  it  has  a court  surrounded  by  high  walls 
1 closed  by  a great  gate;  it  is  about  a league  and  a half  from 
ustadt.  Lead  us  to  that  one.” 

Then  the  captain,  having  seen  that  no  one  was  passing  along 
road  rides  along  it  rapidly,  and,  re-entering  the  forest,  follows 


65 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


his  guide,  whom  he  has  secured  by  one  arm  and  placed  in  char 
of  a sergeant  and  corporal.  He  halts  at  two  hundred  steps  fro 
the  farm-house,  reconnoitres  its  approaches,  surrounds  it  quick 
and  resuming  his  march,  enters  the  courtyard. 

A peasant  who  is  trying  to  escape  is  brought  back  to  him 
one  of  his  men  belonging  to  the  cordon  which  he  had  post 
around  the  place.  This  peasant,  -with  all  those  belonging  to  f , 
farm,  and  the  guide,  are  locked  up  in  a cellar,  and  a sentir  < 

posted  at  the  door  of  it.  The  gates  of  the  farm  are  closed,  a 

interior  sentinels  placed  over  those  opening  out  into  the  counti  , 
Four  men  are  placed  in  hiding  at  the  windows,  where  a vii 

to  a distance  can  be  had,  and  on  the  four  sides  of  the  enclosui  i 
The  horses  are  unbridled  and  fed,  and  the  men  also  eat  a 
sleep.  Night  has  come,  no  light  illumines  the  windows,  a 
silence  reigns  in  the  detachment. 

A patrol  of  five  Prussian  troopers  passes  in  front  of  the  hous  ■ 
the  men  placed  at  the  windows  have  given  warning  of  th'  \ 

approach.  Is  it  an  advance  guard?  The  men  have  quickly  bridl 
the  horses,  mounted  them,  and  have  formed  line  in  the  courtyai  ^ 
sabres  in  hand.  The  order  is  given  “In  case  the  enemy  shou  . 
be  in  force  and  wish  to  enter,  to  throw  open  the  gates,  ma 
a vigorous  sortie,  and  take  again  the  route  by  which  the  detat 
ment  came.” 

The  patrol  is  followed  by  no  one;  shall  it  be  captured?  N 
because  some  pistol  shots  would  be  fired  and  carry  the  alai 
to  a distance.  The  patrol  wishes  to  enter  and  knocks  at  the  gal 
no  one  answers;  it  insists;  the  Alsatian  officer,  imitating  as  w 
as  he  can  the  accent  of  the  country,  answers  that  he  will  n 
open  the  door,  and  that,  if  the  patrol  insists  further,  he  w 
complain  to  their  officers  on  the  following  day.  The  patrol  go 
away  swearing.  The  troopers  dismount,  unbridle  their  hors 
and  feed  them. 

The  captain  questions,  one  after  another  and  separately,  t 
people  of  the  farm,  after  having  forewarned  them  that  if  th 
attempt  to  deceive  him  by  their  answers,  their  lives  will  p 
the  forfeit.  He  learns  that  a hundred  Prussian  Hussars  are 
Neustadt;  that  they  have  come  from  Freythal,  a city  formei 
fortified,  still  surrounded  by  a low  wall,  and  about  eight  leagu 
distant;  that  they  are  bivouaced  in  rear  of  the  town;  that  th 
have  a grand  guard  of  twelve  men  on  the  Baumdorf  road,  a 
a post  of  five  men  on  that  of  Weg;  that  they  send  out  patrc  • 
in  the  direction  of  Bonn,  Baumdorf  and  Berndorf;  that  the 
patrols  are  of  from  twelve  to  fifteen  men;  that  they  set  o 
ordinarily  at  four  o’clock  A.M.  and  five  P.M.,  and  return  aft 
an  absence  of  two  or  three  hours. 

At  two  o'clock  in  the  morning  the  captain  has  his  hors: 
bridled,  sees  that  they  are  prope-ly  saddled  and  girthed,  that  t 
wallets  contain  some  provisions  and  a ration  of  oats,  and  th 
some  bundles  of  forage,  well  tied  up,  are  fastened  on  the  valise 
then  releasing  one  of  the  peasants  from  confinement,  he  mak 
him  mount  one  of  the  farm  horses,  and  practising,  in  regard 
him,  what  has  been  prescribed  to  the  chapter  on  guides,  plac 
him  at  the  head  of  the  detachment  and  proceeds  to  conceal  t 
command  in  the  little  wood  a quarter  of  a league  in  rear 
Neustadt. 

His  men  dismount,  hold  their  horses  by  their  bridles  a 
preserve  the  most  perfect  silence. 

At  five  o'clock — that  is  to  say,  one  hour  after  the  time  whi 
it  is  presumed  the  enemy's  reconnaissance  will  set  out — the  c 
tachment  is  mounted,  approaches  Neustadt  as  secretly  as  possib 
then,  when  within  view  of  the  place,  takes  a fast  trot,  dra< 
sabre,  takes  the  gallop,  charges  upon  the  bivouac,  and  carries  < 
men  and  horses.  The  captain  seizes  the  letters  in  the  post-offic 


66 


REPORTS 


and  makes  two  of  the  principal  men — the  postmaster  and  the 
■burgomaster — prisoners.  He  mounts  them  on  two  of  the  captured 
Ihorsco,  and  starting  off  at  a fast  trot  along  the  road  to  Baum- 
dorf,  takes  the  walk  only  when  turning  to  the  right  into  that  of 
tBerndor.f. 

i The  disarmed  prisoners,  mounted  on  captured  horses,  which 
are  led  by  troopers,  march  in  the  centre  of  the  column.  The  ad- 
ivance-guard,  composed  of  one  officer  and  twelve  men,  marches 
rone  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  advanoe;  the  rear-guard,  an  officer 
and  twenty-five  men,  follows  the  column  at  the  same  distance, 
i The  captain  carefully  examines  the  road  which  he  passes  over, 
■and  concerning  which  he  is  to  furnish  exact  information  to  the 
'general.  He  halts  only  a few  minutes  at  Berndorf,  in  order  to  take 
a new  guide  and  make  a few  notes;  then,  fearing  to  go  to  the 
Icross-roads,  recognized  in  his  advance,  knowing  that  it  must  nec- 
fessarily  be  the  principal  objective  point  of  the  enemy’s  reconnais- 
sances he  turns  to  a neighboring  road  on  the  right.,  crosses  the 
‘plain,  and  climbs  the  mountain.  Upon  reaching  its  summit  he 
'establishes  his  command  in  a place  to  one  side  of  the  road,  be- 
hind some  hills  which  will  hide  it  from  view  on  the  side  of 
Ingoldsheim,  and  posting  concealed  sentinels  to  watch  the  plain 
and  the  valley,  he  orders  the  horses  to  be  fed.  During  this  time 
he  questions  his  prisoners,  writes  his  report,  which  will  be  found 
in  the  following  chapter,  and  completes  the  sketch  occompanying 
this  chapter.  When  the  horses  have  finished  eating,  he  remounts 
ithe  command,  and  by  a detour  regains  the  Grossthurm  road,  A 
quarter  of  a league  from  his  bivouac  he  has  the  pennons  placed 
on  the  lances,  and  then,  without  changing  the  order  of  the  march, 
he  approaches  our  outposts  and  returns  to  the  regiment,  presents 
the  captured  horses  to  the  colonel,  and  conducts  the  prisoners, 
dismounted,  to  the  general,  to  whom  he  delivers  his  report. 


REPORTS 

Reports  are  of  two  kinds — verbal  and  written.  The  first  are 
made  on  returning  from  a reconnaissance  or  a mission  and  are  sent 
)y  an  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer  detached  from  the  ad- 
it fance-guard  for  that  purpose.  They  should  be  short,  and  therefore 
11  for  important  missions  they  are  generally  insufficient;  they  should 
always  be  accompanied  by  written  reports,  to  which  they  become 
■in  excellent  complement. 

i I know  that  written  reports  are  difficult  to  obtain  from  officers, 
>ecause  their  early  training  before  the  war  has  not  prepared  them 
or  such  work — a serious  fault  in  a course  of  military  training, 
war  the  inaccuracy  of  an  officer  in  writing,  or  his  delay  in 
amending  in  his  report,  is  a fault  grave  enough  to  deserve  severe 
junishment. 

Reports  are  as  indispensable  to  the  general-in-chief  as  a map  of 
he  country  in  which  he  is  operating;  it  is  by  means  of  them  that 
re  receives  his  information;  without  them  he  can  direot  nothing. 
Q.  What  are  the  most  important  features  of  a report? 

A.  Scrupulous  exactness  in  regard  to  statements,  simplicity, 
learness  of  expression,  neatness  of  the  writing,  and  correct  spell- 
ng  of  proper  names. 

Q.  Should  a report  contain  nothing  but  iwhat  the  writer  knows 
jiimself  ? 

A.  It  may  contain  both  what  is  actually  known  sind  what  is 
nere'y  reported  or  heard,  but  the  two  kinds  of  information  must 
lis  >e  kept  entirely  distinct;  thus,  for  example,  one  should  not  say: 
td  j‘I  have  arrived  at  the  village  of  Loevenstein;  the  enemy  appeared 

67 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HANDBOOK 


there  this  morning  but  retreated  to  the  town  of  GreifTenstein;’1 
but  “I  arrived,  at  half-past  nine  this  evening,  at  the  village  oT 
Loevenstein,  where  I found  no  enemy.  The  burgomaster  told  me 
and  his  report  has  been  confirmed  by  the  individual  reports  oil 
different  people,  that  twenty-five  Austrian  uhlans  (kurtka  greer 
red  and  gold-yellow  schapska),  fifty  curassiers  (white  coats 
facings  and  collars  amaranth),  and  fifty  light  cavalry  (white  coats 
facings  and  collars  sky-blue)  arrived  at  Loevenstein  at  seven  o’clock 
this  morning,  refreshed  themselves,  and  then  withdrew  to  Greiffen- 
stein.  The  uniforms  named  led  me  to  believe  that  the  uhlans 
belong  to  the  regiment  Merfeld  the  cuirassiers  to  that  of  Albert 
and  the  light  cavalry  to  that  of  Colloredo.  Greiffenstein  appears 
to  me  to  be  too  far  away  for  these  troops  to  have  retreated  to  it  > 

"Later  information  leads  me  to  believe  that  these  troops  turnec 
off  the  road  leading  to  Greiffenstein,  at  a point  a league  distam 
from  here  to  go  to  Kirstein,  where,  it  is  said,  there  is  a divisior 
of  Austrian  cavalry.  I shall  allow  my  horses  only  a few  hours  of 
absolutely  necessary  rest,  and  at  three  o'clock  tomorrow  morning 
shall  set  out  to  verify  these  leports.” 

In  this  example,  that  which  is  known  postively — that  is,  the! 
arrival  of  the  detachment  at  Loevenstein — is  affirmed;  that  re- 
lating to  the  movements  of  the  Austrian  cavalry  is  stated  merely 
as  a report,  in  which  confidence  may  be  placed;  that  referring  tc 
the  route  by  which  the  Austrian  cavalry  executed  its  retreat,  is  t 
supposition  of  the  commander  of  the  reconnoissance,  to  which  thi 
general  will  attach  more  or  less  importance  according  to  the  de- 
gree of  confidence  he  has  in  the  officer,  and  its  agreement  with  the 
reports  received  from  other  sources. 

Q.  Should  reports  be  made  frequently? 

A.  That  depends  partly  upon  the  importance  of  the  informatior 
to  be  furnished;  and  partly  upon  the  difficulty  of  transmitting  it- 
thus,  an  advance  or  rear  guard  should  send  reports  more  frequently 
than  would  be  expected  of  a reconnoissance,  because  their  com- 
munication with  the  army  is  easy,  and  the  information  furnishec 
has  a more  immediate  and  pressing  interest.  Often  a reconnois 
sance  is  forbidden  to  send  in  any  reports.  The  oders  received  or 
setting  out  will  determine  the  nature  and  frequency  of  reports. 

Q.  What  precautions  are  to  be  observed  in  sending  in  reports? 

A.  If  I am  far  from  my  division  or  brigade,  and  fear  that  the 
enemy  may  capture  my  messenger,  I select  a well-mounted  and 
intelligent  man  from  the  command,  and  give  him  a tracing  from 
the  map  of  the  country  he  is  to  pass  over.  I indicate  to  him  or 

this  tracing  the  dangerous  places  he  must  avoid,  then,  in  addition 

to  the  written  report,  I give  him  verbally  such  information  as  I 
think  necessary,  which  he  will  repeat  to  the  officer  to  whom  hr 
is  sent.  To  make  certain  that  he  understands  the  message  thor- 
oughly, I make  him  repeat  it  twice,  and  order  him  to  deliver  II 
exactly  as  be  has  received  it. 

The  report  is  written  in  a fine  hand,  on  a small  piece  of  paper 
which  he  carry  in  his  glove.  If  attacked  and  in  danger  ol 
being  oaptured,  the  paper  will  be  swallowed.  The  barrel  of  i 
pistol  is  a good  place  in  which  to  carry  a report;  rolled  into  B 

ball  and  twisted  up  in  another  piece  of  paper  to  protect  it,  II 

is  disposed  of  like  a wad,  and,  if  the  messenger  sees  that  he  can-: 
not  save  it,  as  a last  resort,  he  discharges  the  pistol,  and  thus 
destroys  the  report. 

Often,  when  there  is  danger  of  a messenger’s  being  cut  off  01 
captured  by  the  enemy,  a small  escort  is  sent  with  him  part  ol 
the  way;  but  these  escorts  should  be  sparingly  used,  for  they  j 
weaken  the  reconnoissances  and  impede  their  movements. 

If  it  is  of  great  importance  that  the  report  should  get  to  Its 


68 


COMMANDS  TO  BE  USED  IN  WAR 


address,  and  capture  is  feared,  two  messengers  should  be  sent  by 
> different  routes. 

Q.  Should  a report  go  into  details? 

A.  Yes;  and  for  that  reason  notes  should  be  taken  in  proportion 
ilto  the  duration  of  the  expedition  so  that  they  will  serve  to  make 
i it  clear;  then  nothing  will  escape,  the  statements  are  generally 
1 correct,  and  the  memory  thus  assisted  is  not  compelled  to  make 
■ an  effort  to  recall,  in  a vague  iway,  things  based  only  on  a con- 
v fused  recolle;tion  of  them. 

A report  should  not,  however,  embrace  a lot  of  idle  remarks  of 
interest  to  the  commanding  general.  Often,  an  officer  in 
writing  his  report  gives  a detailed  account  of  his  halts,  his  anx- 
ieties, his  marches,  and  countermarches,  which  is  simply  a waste 
of  time  and  ink.  What  the  general  wants  is  the  result  of  the 
reconnoissance,  in  the  sense  of  the  execution  of  the  orders  given, 
Q.  Write  out  the  report  of  the  reconnoissance  which  is  de- 
scribed in  the  preceding  chapter  as  having  been  made  by  Captain 
V 


1 COMMANDS  TO  BE  USED  IN  WAR.  POSITIONS  TO  BE  TAKEN 
ON  THE  BATTLEFIELD,  AND  MOVEMENTS  TO  BE  EXE- 
CUTED THERE. 

Q.  What  should  be  the  first  care  of  a commanding  officer? 

A.  To  accustom  his  men  to  observe  perfect  silence  at  the  com- 
nand  “Attention!”  This  indispensable  condition  will  be  obtained 
ilfvith  ease  under  the  most  trying  circumstances  if  the  commander 
s able  to  impress  his  men  with  confidence  and  personal  attach- 
:r  nent  for  him. 

Q.  And  the  second? 

4 A.  To  require  every  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  and 
private  to  remain  exactly  in  his  proper  place  in  ranks,  and  not 
o leave  it  under  any  pretext. 

Q.  What  should  be  the  nature  of  commands? 

A.  Clear,  plain,  and  above  all,  suited  to  the  occasion, 
u | Q.  In  order  that  they  may  be  clear  and  distinct,  reach 
in  from  one  end  of  a line  to  the  other,  and  be  as  effective  at  the 
nd  as  at  the  beginning  of  an  affair,  what  precautions  should 

e taken? 

A.  The  commander  uttering  them  should  consider  three  things; 
st,  he  should  know  what  pitch  of  his  voice  is  the  most  sonorous, 
nd  the  least  fatiguing  to  him.  2nd.  The  range  of  his  voice, 
rd.  The  effects  of  accidental  causes — such  as  wind,  physical 

bstacles,  the  roar  of  cannon,  the  breaking  of  the  lines,  the 
<citement  of  the  men  produced  by  favorable  or  unfavorable  events 
ihich  may  disturb  them  or  distract  their  attention — should  de- 
jrmine  the  choice  of  the  place  from  which  the  commands  must 
given,  so  as  to  be  clearly  and  generally  heard. 

0-  And  the  suitableness  of  the  commands  given? 

A.  Ah!  That  is  a display  of  the  possession  of  the  genius  for 

*|ar,  the  distinguishing  mark  of  the  entire  soience.  The  officer 
ho  gives  suitable  commands  only  is  like  the  helmsman  who, 
i a tempest,  when  within  a single  step  of  a rock,  gives  the 
Her  one  thrust  and  saves  the  ship.  On  the  fitness  of  a single 
immand  may  depend  the  safety  of  a whole  regiment  of  cavalry — 
Ityjjs  glory  or  its  shame. 

0-  From  what  then  is  this  instinct  of  fitness  derived? 

A.  First,  from  a strong  character,  which  is  surprised  by 
othirig,  which  acts  the  more  cooly  as  circumstances  seem 
ore  unfavorable;  then  the  habit  of  constantly  observing  the 


69 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


enemy,  which  enables  us  to  know  him  as  well  as  though  we  wer 
in  his  camp,  in  his  ranks;  enables  us  to  divine  the  intentions  o 
his  leaders,  and  soldiers  even,  so  that,  upon  his  making  . 
movement,  we  can  be  perfectly  confident  of  what  will  follow. 

There  are  some  officers  who  think  the  tone  of  command  should 
be  an  artificial  one;  they  are  wrong.  There  is  no  necessity  o1 
assuming  a deep  tone,  and  provider  that  is  not  absurdly  share 
the  only  condition  requred  is  that  it  shall  be  sonorous.  A 
artificial  tone  has  two  inconveniences;  first,  it  tires  the  voic; 
second,  it  is  apt  to  vary.  In  war  the  first  is  a serious  objection 
and  the  second  not  less  so,  for  there  may  be  a thousand  un 
expected,  hurried  occasions,  where,  as  at  night,  in  a hand-to-hanr 
fight  it  is  necessary  that  the  voice  of  a chief  should  be  recognize 
as  soon  as  heard.  Our  men  should  be  accustomed  to  the  unvarying 
inflection  of  our  tones  of  command;  these  inflections  alone  art 
for  ears  accustomed  to  them,  a preparatory  command  for  th 
movements  about  to  be  executed,  and  indications  of  the  rapidit! 
required. 

Thus,  for  example,  if  marching  in  line  and  you  wish  to  hal1 
the  command  slowly,  prolong  the  preparatory  command  “Squac  ^ 
ron!”;  if,  on  the  contrary,  you  wish  to  halt  it  suddenly,  give  th 
command  sharply.  In  commanding  a large  body  of  troops  i 
war  it  is  a good  thing  to  add  signals  to  the  commands.  Thus 
for  example,  in  the  case  cited  above,  at  the  command  "Squadrons!* 
raise  your  sabre  vertically;  at  the  command  "Halt!’’  lower  i- 
and  let  the  rapidity  of  these  signals  correspond  to  the  livelines* 
of  the  commands. 

If  you  give  a command  to  gain  ground  to  the  right  or  left 
at  the  command  "Platoons  right!”  (or  left)  indicate  with  you< 
sabre  the  flank  to  which  you  are  going  to  march. 

This  habit  once  acquired,  may  be  of  the  greatest  utility  i 
certain  cases  where,  commanding  several  squadrons,  the  wind  ma* 
carry  our  voice  away  from  the  troops,  or  the  distance  or  nois 
may  prevent  their  hearing  it;  then  our  signals  will  powerfull 
supplement  the  unheard  words  of  command,  and  alone  direc 
an  important  movement. 

When  the  commander  of  several  squadrons  wishes  to  breat 
his  line  by  platoons  right  or  left  and  continue  the  march,  c 
cause  the  line  to  move  to  the  rear  by  platoons,  right  or  let 
about,  it  is  not  necessary  that  the  command  “Forward!"  whicr 
he  is  going  to  give,  should  be  delayed,  as  the  drill  regulation 
prescribe,  for  peace  evolutions,  and,  consequently  be  given  i 
the  same  time  as  that  of  the  squadron  commanders,  but  it  shoult 
be  given  immediately  after  the  squadron  commanders  comman1 
“March!”  This  promptness  is  the  more  necessary  because  th* 
terrain  of  war  is  so  uneven  that  it  does  not  admit  of  the  math* 
matical  precision  of  movement  practiced  on  the  drill  ground 
some  squadrons  may  be  delayed,  others  waver  in  their  movements 
while,  if  the  command  be  indicated  in  advance,  the  altenticl 
of  the  squadron  commanders  will  be  given  only  to  the  executior 
which  will  necessarily  gain  in  simplicity,  uniformity,  and  exactness 

The  art  of  manouvring  on  the  battlefield  consists  in  bein 
always  prepared,  in  never  being  surprised  or  crowded,  in  spitn 
of  one's  self,  by  the  enemy;  in  profiting  by  all  the  accidents  ol 
the  ground,  by  every  event  that  may  assure  one's  superiority,  i 
is  a game  of  chess  that  is  played;  .to  win  it,  it  is  necessary  t 
study  the  situation  well,  and  move  only  when  the  chances  ar 
all  in  one's  favor.  As  soon  as  an  officer  recognizes  his  oppoij 
tunity,  observation  should  stop  and  action  begin. 

In  war  the  worst  thing  an  officer  can  do  is  to  do  nothing 
hesitation  is  worse  than  ignorance — it  is  the  stamp  of  weaknes 
The  game  is  never  lost,  for  frequently  an  audacious  resolutio 
may  turn  the  tide.  To  determine  what  should  be  undertake 
and  what  should  be  avoided,  is  genius. 


70 


COMMANDS  TO  BE  USED  IN  WAR 


On  the  battlefield  the  true  manoeuverer  has  sized  up  his  enemy 
mg  before  sabres  have  been  crossed.  The  exactness,  uniformity, 
ood  arrangement  of  his  movements,  their  calmness  under  artillery 
re  have  already  given  the  exact  measure  of  the  chief,  of  the 

i (Idler,  with  whom  he  has  to  deal.  These  indications  should 
Lt  be  lost,  but  exercise  a determining  influence  upon  his  actions. 

Let  us  remember  that  the  opinion  we  form  of  our  adversary 
( ; the  counterpart  of  that  he  forms  of  us.  The  more  favorable 
: e make  the  latter,  the  more  we  shall  disquiet  him,  and  even 
Jfamoralize  him,  before  making  a serious  attack.  If  we  obtain 
Jlis  immense  advantage  over  him  by  this  single  fact,  we  shall 
r icrease  our  own  strength  by  that  which  he  has  lost. 

« Q.  On  the  battlefield  is  there  a choice  to  be  made  of  the 
olutions  theoretically  taught? 

A.  Yes;  certainly;  for  several  of  them,  if  used  in  battle,  might 
mpromise  us  dangerously.  Even  out  of  reach  of  the  enemy 
ere  is  no  sense  in  complicated  evolutions,  and  I repeat  that 
these  that  uselessly  fatigue  the  horses  should  be  suppressed 
nj)ar  the  enemy  there  is  still  less  reason  for  these  evolutions, 
cause  they  can  never  be  executed  with  the  calmness  and 
Irecision  that  obtain  on  the  drillground,  and  might  leiad 
our  being  suprised  and  cut  to  pieces  while  in  a dangerous 
rmation. 

Q.  What  do  you  understand  by  complicated  movements? 

A.  All  those  composed  of  two  distinct  movements,  such 
, for  example,  "changing  front  on  the  centre”,  “faced  to  the 
sr  in  line,”  etc. 

Q.  But,  nevertheless  an  occasion  may  present  itself  of  forming 
,«ine  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  rear  of  the  column? 

A.  In  that  case  divide  the  movements.  First  comand,  Pla- 
ons  Right  About  or  Left  About;  then  the  column  facing  in  the 
n iw  direction,  command,1  Front  into  Line;  thus  there  will  be 
ill  f error  or  hesitation,  and  you  will  secure  uniformity  and  certainty, 
ill  |Q.  Which,  then,  are  the  most  certain  movements  in  war? 
u |A.  All  those  whose  execution  is  the  simplest  and  the  most 
lited  which  require  the  fewest  commands,  whose  mechanism 
rs  a familiar  and  ordinary;  and  consequently  are  made  without 
,manding  too  much  mathematical  calculation;  finally,  those 
li  (lich  are  executed  by  uniform  movements  from  the  head  to  the 
M lil  of  the  column,  or  from  the  right  to  the  left  of  the  line, 
lit  iius,  for  example,  being  near  the  enemy,  it  would  be  better  to 
' mmand,  Platoons  Right,  Head  of  Columns  Left,  than  Squadrons, 
>i  ireak  by  Platoons.  .Since  it  is  dangerous  to  break  from  line 
mi  to  column  at  a short  distance  from  the  enemy,  and  to  thus 
Impose  your  command  to  an  attack  in  flank,  you  must,  if  compelled 
ill  i do  so,  make  the  duration  of  this  dangerous  state  of  affairs  as 

ii  lort  as  possible;  therefore,  when  you  have  to  resume  your  front, 
ei!  i will  be  better  to  command,  Platoons,  Right  (or  Left),  Halt; 
i,S  jilumn.  Halt;  Platoons,  Right  (or  Left)  into  line,  Wheel;  as 
ilij  fu  will  not  only  gain  time,  but  come  to  a halt  in  line. 

m 'Countermarches  should  be  avoided,  and,  as  far  as  possible, 
k)  jjvements  by  fours  should  be  prohibited,  because  a single 
ip|  hnon-ball  would  knock  one  of  them  out  of  all  recognizable  shape, 
li.  t the  platoon  be  the  unit. 

Q.  You  have  said  that  changes  of  front  on  the  centre  should 
iy Wit  be  executed;  with  what  would  you  replace  them? 

A.  The  principal  objections  to  formations  or  changes  on  the 
III  itre  are  that  they  necessitate  four  movements  and  the  march 
| columns,  as  well  as  formations  in  inverse  order  which  puts 
til  p whole  order  of  the  regiment  at  the  mercy  of  the  coolness, 
.is  It  of  the  captain  only,  but  of  a chief  of  a platoon  or  single 
yti  i of  men. 

Ill  iln  war  you  almost  always  have  more  space  than  is  needed 
your  deployments,  especially  when  you  are  in  position;  the 


71 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


mathematical  limits  assigned  you  on  the  drill  ground  no  long* 
exists,  so  you  can  have  elbow-room;  it  is  better  to  execute  yoi 
changes  of  front  on  one  of  the  flanks  than  the  centre;  it  is  eve 
better  for  a regiment  of  two,  three,  or  four  squadrons  to  whe« 
In  line  at  a trot,  pivoting  on  one  of  the  flanks,  than  to  whe< 
by  platoons  to  the  right  and  then  partially  reform. 

Q.  I thought  this  movement  was  slower  than  that  given  I 
the  drill  regulations? 

A.  You  were  mistaken,  for  the  points  of  departure  and  arriv; 
and  the  ground  being  the  same,  there  is  no  reason  to  think  sc 
and  under  the  fire  you  will  find  in  it  a great  advantage — that  c 
executing  a single  command,  and  being  formed  during  the  who 
time  of  the  movement. 

As  a general  rule,  when  you  are  near  the  enemy  and  in 
good  formation,  break  it  only  for  good  reasons,  and  then  sul 
divide  your  command  as  little  as  possible,  so  that  each  portic 
may  preserve  an  intrinsic  force  sufficient,  in  case  of  a suddc 
attack  by  the  enemy,  to  oppose  to  him  a respectable  resistanc 

The  terrain  of  war  differs  from  the  drill  ground  in  that  on  i 
the  object  is  not  to  execute  evolutions,  but  to  take  up  position 
There  the  theoretical  letter  of  precept  disappears  to  make  plac 
for  the  serious  business  of  application. 

Look  then  only  to  the  end  to  be  attained.  If  you  can  accor 
plish  it  by  replacing  complicated  evolutions  by  simple  movement 
do  not  hesitate  to  do  so.  Execute  only  those  which  your  me 
know,  so  as  to  speak,  too  well,  and  in  which  it  is  impossible  fi 
your  officers  or  soldiers  to  make  any  mistakes;  for  it  is  necessar 
I repeat,  that  your  foresight  should  always  make  allowance  fi 
excitement,  which  harmonizes  very  poorly  with  difficulty. 

I shall  go  still  further  and  say  that,  as  a man  is  more  a 
customed  to  using  his  right  hand  than  his  left,  so  a regimer 
will  manoeuvre  better  by  the  right  than  by  the  left;  profit  the 
by  this  observation  for  use  in  emergencies  which  demand  the  exe 
cise  of  undisturbed  coolness  and  self-confidence. 

0-  I thought  that  the  regulations  had  provided  for  everythin' 
and  that  nothing  not  contained  in  it  was  to  be  executed  on  tt 
battlefield? 

A.  Upon  that  terrain  must  be  executed  any  evolution  demand* 
by  necessity.  The  regulations  could  not  and  should  not  provlc 
for  every  case  that  might  arise:  consider  it,  then,  as  a class 
model  only,  from  which  one  must  not  vary  without  necessity,  bi 
not  as  infallible  gospel,  outside  of  the  literal  observance  of  whic 
there  is  no  salvation. 

Again,  I shall  take  another  case  which  frequently  occurs  ! 
war;  suppose  your  regiment  marching  in  an  open  plain,  in  ec 
elons  of  squadrons  at  full  distance;  at  some  distance  a defi 
as  wide  as  the  front  of  a squadron  appears  suddenly  in  the  froi 
of  the  first.  It  is  necessary  to  pass  it  promptly.  Would  you  gh 
the  commands  prescribed  in  the  regulations:  Squadrons,  Hal 
Squadrons,  In  Line  March;  On  First,  Squadron,  Form  Clo: 
Column,  March;  then  finally,  Column,  Forward  March?  Would 
not  be  more  speedy  and  simple  to  command  without  halting,  Clo 
Column  on  First  Squadron,  Trot,  March?  There  is  no  haltin  i 
no  time  lost;  the  squadrons,  by  platoons,  right  wheel,  come 
take  their  places  in  the  column. 

Debouching  from  the  defile,  if  you  think  it  advisable,  you  C£ 
resume  your  march  in  echelon,  without  halting,  at  the  comman 
In  Echelon,  At  Full  Distance,  Deploy  Column,  which  is  execute 
by  inverse  means. 

Should  the  defile  be  in  front  of  any  other  than  the  first  squa 
ron,  as  your  squadrons  are  at  full  distance,  you  can  form  tl 
column  on  that  squadron  by  the  same  movements,  doubling  tl 
gait. 


COMMANDS  TO  BE  USED  IN  WAR 


Q.  Which  is  the  best  position  in  action? 

A.  That  which  gives  us  the  advantage  of  the  ground  for  at- 
tack and  defense. 

Q.  In  what  consist  the  principal  qualities  of  a good  position? 

A.  In  having  the  flanks  supported  by  obstacles  Which  the 
enemy  cannot  pass,  a safe  route  of  retreat  to  the  rear,  in  front 
of  it  a train  commanded  by  the  position  which,  while  opposing 
difficulties  to  the  enemy,  permits,  on  the  contrary,  the  instan- 
taneous employment  of  our  troops. 

Q.  Do  you  not  generally  take  position  on  high  ground? 

A.  Yes;  because  one  can  see  better  around  him,  because  the 

slopes  offer  additional  difficulties  to  the  enemy,  and  because  the 

enemy’s  view  not  being  directed  downward  upon  us,  we  can 
establish  our  lines  and  group  our  forces  without  being  per- 
ceived, behind  the  curtain  formed  by  the  crest  of  the  hill. 

Q.  If  the  terrain  on  which  you  find  yourself  forced  to  take 
position  has  some  disadvantages? 

A.  Lose  no  time  in  determining  what  they  are,  and  then  remedy 
them  by  making  a suitable  disposition  of  your  troops. 

Q.  What  are  capital  defects  in  a position? 

A.  A position  may  be  advantageous  as  regards  its  front,  but 

afford  protection  to  only  one  of  our  flanks,  which  is  the  more 

dangerous,  as  an  attack  made  on  our  unprotected  flank  may  throw 
us  on  the  obstacles  which  protected  us,  crowd  us  back  upon  it, 
and  destroy  us.  A position  which  has  not  sufficient  depth  should 
not  be  held  for  it  is  necessary  for  cavalry  to  have  not  only  ground 
enough  to  move  over,  but  also  to  preserve  the  whole  of  its  force 
of  impulsion  when  it  attacks.  The  most  objectionable  position 
Is  one  which  presents  a defile  in  our  rear,  and  the  nearer  the 
defile  the  more  dangerous  the  position.  So,  when  you  are  com- 
pelled to  pass  a defile  in  advance,  mass  your  troops  in  front  of 
it,  bring  up  your  supports  so  as  to  have  a force  strongly  supported 
at  the  exit  from  the  defile,  and  move  well  to  the  front,  so  that 
the  troops  following  you  may  pass  rapidly  without  obstruction, 
and  prevent  the  enemy  driving  you  back  on  the  defile  crowding 
you  into  it,  and  destroying  you. 

Q.  What  do  you  do  on  an  open  terrain? 

A.  March  and  manoeuvre  so  as  to  deploy  and  form  line  rapidly 
in  every  direction.  It  is  very  rare  that  a plain  is  so  fiat  and 
smooth  that  it  has  no  ground  that  can  be  used  to  advantage 
against  an  enemy.  A ditch,  a fence,  wet  meadows,  fields  (whose 
deep  furrows  may  overthrow  horses  crossing  them  perpendicularly, 
some  slight  undulations,  are  appreciated  when  one  comes  to 
crossing  sabres;  take  full  advantage  of  them  to  support  your  troops 
and  work  destruction  to  the  enemy. 

Q.  Where  is  the  light  cavalry  generally  posted? 

A.  Upon  the  wings,  affer  the  lines  have  been  formed. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because  it  scouts  and  protects  them  during  the  battle; 
because  it  disquiets  the  enemy,  and  in  a change  of  front,  its 
mobility  gives  greater  rapidity  to  the  movement  of  the  wings. 

0.  Its  place  once  assigned,  should  it  hold  it  without  stirring? 

A.  No;  its  commander  has  two  things  to  observe;  the  first 
is  his  relative  position  in  the  general  movement;  the  second, 
his  own  special  position.  Thus  provided  he  obeys  strictly  the 
orders  which  concern  his  position  in  reference  to  the  whole  action 
when  not  ordered  to  keep  out  of  sight,  he  may  execute  some 
partial  but  short  movements,  to  distract  the  attention  of  his 
men  from  the  losses  produced  by  the  enemy’s  fire;  or,  when  they 
are  needlessly  exposed,  to  protect  them  by  making  use  of  the 
undulations  of  the  ground  as  a protecting  rampart;  or  to  mask 
his  strength;  or  to  concentrate  his  squadrons,  if  he  forsees  a 


73 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


threatened  attack  on  the  enemy;  and  the  need  of  a new  disposition 
for  deployment. 

Q.  If  disturbed  by  the  enemy’s  fire,  what  should  he  do? 

A.  Select  ground  affording  protection,  and  move  a little  to 
the  front,  fiank  or  rear. 

0-  If  concealed  by  the  curtain  which  he  has  chosen,  the  enemy, 
who  has  guessed  his  position  still  fires  so  as  to  reach  him? 

A.  He  concentrates  on  one  of  his  flanks.  The  best  method 
of  executing  the  movement  of  which  I speak,  either  to  the  front 
or  rear,  is  to  move  perpendicularly  in  line  to  the  point  chosen, 
and.  when  it  is  reached,  move  by  platoons  a hundred  paces  to  the 
right  or  left  and  then  reform  line.  The  batteries,  which  wiil 
think  you  have  reformed  in  your  former  direction,  will  not  change 
their  aim,  and  throw  their  shots,  which  will  pass  to  your  right 
or  left.  To  better  deceive  the  enemy,  your  skimishers  should  be 
left  in  place. 

Q.  Should  a command  be  kept  mounted  during  the  whole 
time  of  battle? 

A.  No;  as  I have  already  remarked  several  times,  one  of  our 
first  duties  is  to  spare  the  strength  of  our  horses  and  not  use 
it  all  up  at  once.  Waste  of  their  strength  implies  ignorance,  or 
worse  than  that,  on  the  part  of  a commander.  The  same  re- 
marks apply  to  camp  guards,  to  the  composition  of  a reconnais- 
sance, etc;  he  is  an  incompetent  officer  who  puts  more  men 
than  necessary  on  duty;  and  on  the  field  of  battle  it  is  only  an 
ignoramus  that  leaves  his  men  mounted  without  necessity,  or 
needlessly  exposes  them  to  danger.  When  you  have  secured  a 
position  where  you  can  see  all  around  you,  so  that  you  cannot  be 
taken  by  surprise  where  the  enemy’s  cannon  balls  cannot  reach 
you,  dismount  your  men;  but  allow  no  one  to  leave  his  horse. 
Remember,  also,  that  whenever  a trooper  dismounts  he  must 
tighten  his  girth 

Q.  If  a squadron  moves  forward  for  any  cause  whatever,  and 
is  concealed  by  the  ground,  but  still  suffers  from  artillery  fire, 
what  should  be  done? 

A.  Open  out  the  files,  and  even  take  distance  between  the 
platoons. 

Q.  May  the  troops  not  be  placed  in  single  rank? 

A.  That  is  sometimes  done  in  war.  but  principally  for  the 
purpose  of  deceiving  the  enemy  as  to  our  real  strength;  it  should 
be  executed  so  that  the  enemy  wiil  not  discover  that  there  is 
no  second  rank. 

Q.  What  is  the  best  formation  in  which  to  appear  upon  the 
battlefield  ? 

A.  In  close  column,  which  has  six  advantages,  which,  properly 
combined,  constitute  the  complete  mechanism  of  the  art  of  ma- 
noeuvring. 1st.  Of  being  able  to  manoeuvre  easily  and  rapidly  in 
every  direction.  2nd.  Of  masking  the  strength  of  the  command. 
3d.  Of  keeping  the  whole  force  in  hand,  to  be  employed  according 
to  circumstances  and  the  nature  of  the  ground.  4th.  Of  deploying 
only  the  necessary  number  of  men  and  keeping  the  reserve  in- 
tact. 5th.  Of  demoralizing  the  enemy,  if  our  numbers  are  superior, 
by  a single  deployment  made  at  the  proper  time.  6th.  Of  using 
the  simplest  and  quickest  movement,  the  most  generally  useful 
deployment — that  in  echelon. 

Q.  How  may  the  enemy  compel  you  to  show  your  strength? 

A.  By  cannonading  you;  because  in  a deep  formation  you  have 
too  much  to  lose  to  delay  deploying  at  once. 

Q.  But  should  you  have  an  object  in  masking  of  your  forces? 

A.  You  can  then  deploy  in  two  lines,  moving  the  second  well 


74 


COMMANDS  TO  BE  USED  IN  WAR 


to  the  rear,  so  that  the  shots  fired  at  the  first  may  riochet  and 
pass  over  the  second. 

Q.  Having  a regiment  of  only  six  squadrons  under  your  com- 
mand, what  orders  would  you  give  in  such  a case? 

A.  On  First  and  Fourth  Squadrons,  Deploy  Column;  the  lines 
being  formed,  the  second  would  wheel  by  platoons  to  the  left 
about,  move  a hundred  paces  to  the  rear,  and  resume  its  front  by 
the  same  movement. 

Q.  If  in  close  column,  and  you  fear  a combined  attack  on  your 
front,  and  one  flank,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  I should  command  Column,  On  First  Squadron,  to  the  Rear, 
Take  Distance.  At  this  command,  all  the  squadrons,  except  the 
first,  wheel  left  about  by  platoons,  move  to  the  rear,  and  face 
again  to  the  front  when  each  has  gained  a distance  equal  to  the 
front  of  a squadron.  In  that  formation  the  column  may  be  faced 
in  every  dilection,  each  squadron  being  kept  entire. 

Q.  If  after  the  deployment  of  a close  column  in  echelon,  right 
in  front,  as  the  regulations  prescribe,  your  left  flank  is  threatened, 
what  do  you  command? 

A.  Squadrons,  On  First  Squadron,  To  the  Rear,  Take  Distance. 
Th  s movement  is  executed  like  the  preceding;  if  the  enemy  ad- 
vances upon  you,  you  command  Squadrons,  Left  Wheel,  Halt,  in 
order  to  face  him  in  echelon;  or,  when  the  movement  is  nearly 
completed.  Forward,  In  Line. 

Q.  But  these  movements  aie  not  in  the  drill  regulations? 

A.  No;  but  they  are  useful  because  they  are  simple,  and  meet 
tfe  principal  demand  of  light  cavalry  in  war — that  of  enabling 
it  to  face  promptly  in  every  direction.  Sometimes,  in  unexpected 
emergencies  in  war,  the  order  of  the  squadrons  in  a regiment  may 
become  inverted.  For  example,  the  first  squadron,  after  having 
been  separated  may  find  itself  crowded  into  the  place  of  the 
third;  if  so,  let  it  take  that  number  at  once.  The  squadron  of 
manoeuvre  is  no  more  the  administrative  squadron  than  the  bat- 
tery firing  upon  the  enemy  is  the  administration  battery;  abandon 
then  the  habit  of  confounding  the  two  things. 

Never  to  manoeuvre  inverted  is  a misfortune  for  light  cavalry; 
for  in  war  circumstances  may  occur  which  will  force  it  to  do  so 
under  penalty  of  destruction. 

Q.  Suppose,  for  example,  that  in  executing  a retreat  in  close 
column,  right  in  front,  an  opportunity  of  facing  quickly  to  the 
rear  occurs,  would  you  execute  a slow  countermarch,  during  which 
the  enemy  might  cut  you  in  pieces? 

A.  No,  I should  wheel  to  the  right  or  left  about  by  platoons. 

Q.  Would  you  deploy  from  that  formation? 

A.  Certainly,  if  circumstances  demand  it. 

Q.  But  you  would  be  in  inverted  order? 

A.  What  matter  the  means?  Shall  the  army  perish  in  order 
to  observe  a principle?  In  acting  thus  would  not  the  emergency 
be  met  better  than  in  any  other  way?  Would  I not  be  able,  in  a 
second,  to  face  the  enemy?  Should  I not  be  perfectly  prepared  to 
make  or  receive  an  attack?  However,  I should  deploy  in  inverse 
order,  so  that,  by  wheeling  my  platoons  about,  the  regiment 
would  at  once  be  in  its  regular  order. 

Q.  And  if  in  close  column,  and  the  platoons  inverted  by  an 
about  wheel,  you  wish  to  break  by  platoons,  would  you  command, 
“Squadrons,  By  Platoons,  From  the  Left?” 

A.  No;  but  “Squadrons,  By  Platoons.”  The  fourth  platoons 
being  on  the  right  of  each  squadron,  I should  re-form  my  column 
with  distance  in  its  natural  order,  since  the  regiment  was  march- 
ing left  in  front.  Our  mistake  consists  in  our  always  regarding 
the  first  squadron  as  the  right,  and  the  last  one  as  the  left;  In 
the  same  manner,  the  right  platoon  of  a squadron  as  the  first, 


75 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


and  the  left  as  the  fourth.  So,  when  forced  into  inverted  order,  the 
first  squadron  is  found  on  the  left  of  the  line  and  the  first  platoons 
on  the  left  of  the  squadrons,  we  no  longer  know  what  commands  to  . 
give.  In  war  and  in  light  cavalry  we  must  always  be  ready,  and  sure 
in  our  action;  hesitation  is  more  than  dangerous;  in  order  to  avoid 
it  in  cases  like  those  cited  above,  fill  the  gap  left  in  the  regulations 
by  agreeing  in  advance  that  in  manoeuvring  the  right  and  left 
of  a line  or  squadron,  whatever  may  be  the  incomplete  order  of 
their  formation,  shall  always  be  the  real  right  and  left,  without 
regard  to  the  regular  numbers  of  squadrons  and  platoons;  and,  . 
consequently,  that  a close  column  having  made  a prompt  about 
wheel  by  platoons  to  face  the  enemy,  the  last  squadrons  and 
platoons  become  the  right,  and  the  first,  the  left;  thus  there  will  .. 
be  no  longer  any  doubt  as  to  commands  and  their  execution. 

Unfortunately,  I have  many  times  seen  the  case  occur  in  war 
where  a cavalry  regiment,  risking  itself  in  a plain  beyond  reach 
of  its  supports,  was  briskly  attacked,  turned,  cut  off  by  superior 
forces  and,  after  a valiant  and  even  desperate  resistance,  on  ac- 
count of  a defence  conducted  according  to  the  precepts  of  the 
regulations,  compelled  to  execute  a retreat,  or  rather  individual 
“devil  take  the  hindmost"  flight,  during  which  it  was  used  up 
before  supports  could  arrive  to  assist  it  and  help  it  to  rally. 

Q.  Should  a similar  case  occur,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Follow  the  example  of  the  infantry,  which  can  face  in 
every  direction  and  form  square. 

Q.  How? 

A.  As  a matter  of  course,  a colonel,  finding  himself  in  an 
open  plain  cut  off  from  his  supports  by  forces  superior  to  his  own 
and  having  no  hope  of  erecuting  his  retreat  safely  in  echelon  or 
in  line,  would  ploy  quickly  into  close  column;  for  he  has  no 

chance  except  in  a deep  formation,  where  he  will  expose  less  sur- 
face, few„r  men,  and  have  them  all  In  hand,  for  making  a more 
powerful  and  effective  opening  in  the  enemy’s  ranks. 

The  very  foundation  of  the  art  of  manoeuvring  in  war  is  such 
a habit  of  judging  ground,  so  just  an  appreciation  of  distances, 
that  it  becomes,  so  to  speak,  instinctive,  and  that,  at  the  first 
glance,  an  officer’s  estimates  are  so  correct  that  he  need  never 

recur  to  them,  and  that  any  movement  ordered  may  be  immediately 
executed,  without  having  to  correct  it.  This  coup  d’oeil  should 
at  the  same  time  calculate  the  space  the  squadrons  will  occupy,  - 
and  that  upon  which,  when  formed,  they  will  have  to  act;  it 

is  for  this  reason  that  a commander  should  march  personally  some- 
times at  the  head,  sometimes  on  the  flanks  of  the  column,  al- 
ways going  to  the  summit  of  the  undulations  of  the  ground  to 
verify  his  estimates.  When  this  has  been  done  he  returns  to 

the  place  of  command. 

One  of  the  best  methods  of  learning  the  terrain,  of  appreciating 
its  heights,  its  depressions,  its  obstacles,  its  facilities,  is  to  fol- 
low with  the  eye  the  undulations  and  variations  in  the  line  of 
march  of  the  enemy’s  skirmishers.  This  line  shows  to  the  trained 
eye  more  effectively  than  any  other  means  t>he  terrain  upon  which 
you  will  have  to  operate,  as  it  passes  over  gradually  in  all  its 
development,  both  as  regards  the  whole  and  its  details. 

This  knowledge  is  so  important,  and  the  observation  which  I I 
recommend  so  simple,  that  in  order  to  obtain  it  in  certain  cases  I 

it  is  necessary  to  drive  in  the  enemy's  skirmishers,  so  that  their  I 

retreat  will  furnish  the  information  we  desire. 

In  a nutshell,  the  art  of  war  is  the  assemblage  and  employ-  • 

ment  of  superior  forces  upon  a decisive  point. 

The  advantage  of  assuming  the  offensive  is  that  it  compels  the  ] 
enemy  to  regulate  his  movements  by  ours,  and  thus  demoralizes  ; 
him.  The  defensive  is  useful  only  to  gain  time.  A position  In  ] 


76 


C BARGES 


iwhich  there  is  danoer  of  being  cut  off  from  our  supports  should 
'never  be  taken  up. 

We  should  never  charge  home  without  being  supported,  nor  do 
anything  which,  in  case  of  a reverse,  may  prove  more  disastrous 
than  the  hoped-for  success  could  possibly  have  benefited  us. 

The  best  formation  for  attack  is  that  in  echelon  for  the  lines 
support  one  another  successively;  the  flanks  are  protected;  it  is 
impossible  for  the  enemy  to  manoeuvre  against  our  wings  without 
bur  being  in  readiness  to  receive  him;  and  in  case  of  a oheok 
our  retreat  is  provided  for  and  supported. 

However  numerous  may  be  the  troops  acting  together,  there 
must  be  unity  of  action,  and  consequently  but  one  commander. 
Each  detachment  is  a part  of  the  whole  and  must  act  only  as  a 
imember  of  the  same  body.  In  cavalry,  centralization  of  action, 
jrcducing  all  its  rapidity,  gives  it  also  all  its  power. 


CHARGES 

Q.  On  what  does  the  success  of  a charge  depend? 

A.  On  seizing  the  right  moment  for  making  it. 

Q.  Is  it  difficult  to  seize  this  moment? 

A.  I repeat  it,  the  art  of  doing  the  right  thing  at  the  right 
;ime  constitutes  the  very  genius  of  War. 

Q.  What  are  we  enabled  to  do  by  acting  at  exactly  the  right 
noment? 

A.  1st.  To  surprise  the  enemy.  2nd.  To  attack  him,  generally, 
vhen  he  has  lost  confidence,  or  is  beginning  a wrong  movement, 
id.  To  attack  him  with  troops  more  united  and  horses  fresher 
:han  his.  4th.  To  hold  on  with  greater  tenacity  than  he  oan. 

Q.  What  should  be  done  by  a chief  iwho  is  ordered  to  charge? 
A.  An  approach  as  near  as  possible  to  the  enemy  at  a moder- 
ite  gait,  with  his  squadrons  well  aligned,  draw  sabre,  and  then 
harge  immediately. 

Q.  I thought  sabres  were  to  be  drawn  before  moving  forward? 
A.  That  is  an  error.  The  later  you  draw  sabre  the  better. 
rhe  success  of  a charge  on  the  enemy  is  dependent,  for  the  most 
art,  on  the  powerful  and  imposing  moral  effect  produced.  It 
hould  then  be  all  prepared  in  advance,  and  nothing  should  be 
eglected  which  can  render  this  effect  as  surprising  and  complete 
s possible. 

If  a line  draws  sabre  before  advancing,  it  indicates  the  coming 
movement  to  the  enemy  too  long  in  advance,  and  he  recognizes 
nd  prepares  to  meet  it,  and  the  chance  of  surprising  him  is 
ast,  lost. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  the  charging  regiment  keeps  its  sabres  In 
he  scabbards;  if  it  leaves  the  enemy  in  doubt  as  to  the  importance 
f the  movement  to  be  executed,  the  blades,  all  drawn  forth  at 
nee  and  flashing  in  his  eyes,  will  no  longer  permit  him  to  re- 
ed upon  the  danger  which,  sometimes,  in  spite  of  him,  will 
hake  him  and  compel  him  to  retreat.  Then  the  moral  effect 
reduced  upon  the  enemy  thus  attacked  may  react,  for  the  op- 
osite  reason,  upon  the  attackers,  through  the  same  movement. 

The  trooper  who  carries  his  sabre  a long  time  in  his  hand  loses 
is  high  regard  and  enthusiasm  for  his  weapon;  but  if  this  same 
ooper  seizes  his  weapon  only  at  a command  given  vigorously  by 
is  chief,  and  only  at  a moment  when  he  is  to  make  use  of  it, 
a grasps  it  with  greater  strength,  more  spirit,  and  strikes  with 
velier  force.  The  charging  trooper  is  an  enthusiast,  inspired  by 
sentiment  bordering  on  intoxication;  do  not  chill  this  feeling,  so 
vely  and  responsive;  in  prolonging  it,  in  producing  it  by  fits 


77 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


and  starts,  you  will  destroy  it.  To  draw  his  sabre,  drive  his 
spurs  into  his  horse’s  sides,  and  strike  the  enemy,  should  be 

a single  act. 

Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  squadron  and  platoon  commanders  in 
a charge? 

A.  To  march  well  aligned  upon  one  another  and  make  the 

troops  they  command  keep  their  alignment,  by  calling  by  name 
those  who  hang  back,  until  the  moment  the  command,  Charge 

is  given;  then  they  must  think  only  of  being  the  first  to  pierce 
the  enemy’s  line. 

Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  file-closers  in  a charge? 

A.  They  push  before  them  the  second  rank,  forcing  it  tc 
keep  its  alignment  until  the  command,  Charge.  If  any  coward: 
hang  back  they  push  them  on  vigorously.  Once  entered  upon  thi 
melee  their  duty  as  file-closers  ceases,  and  they  use  their  sabrei 
to  the  best  of  their  ability. 

Q.  Should  the  men  shout  in  charging? 

A.  Yes;  they  should  shout,  Forward  but  only  at  the  command 
Charge.  The  word  Forward  should  be  shouted  as  loudly  and  a: 
much  together  as  possible. 

Q.  How  should  the  trooper  charge? 

A.  Bent  forward  upon  his  horse  so  as  to  be  concealed  by  thi 
horse's  head  and  neck,  expose  less  surface  to  bullets,  to  see  les: 
of  the  dangers  in  front,  and  give  greater  spring  to  his  horse 
This  first  position  also  adds  much  force  to  the  moral  effect  whicl 
the  trooper  produces  (when,  in  striking  the  enemy  with  a shout 
he  rises  suddenly  to  his  full  height  on  his  shortened  stirrups  ' 
and  appears  to  him  in  this  threatening  manner. 

Q.  Must  a charge  be  made  quickly? 

A.  The  most  rapid  attacks  are  always  the  most  certain,  am 
the  least  dangerous  for  those  who  execute  them.  They  shoulc 
be  pushed  with  more  or  less  perseverance  upon  such  or  such  people 
who,  more  or  less  than  others,  risk  their  cavalry.  As  soon  a 
the  Hungarians  or  Prussians  begin  a retreat,  there  is  no  half-wa; 
measure;  you  must  decide  to  either  pursue  vigorously,  sword  i1 
hand,  or  abandon  the  charge  immediately  and  rally  in  force. 

Q.  Which  are  the  best  charges  to  make? 

A.  Those  which  take  the  enemy  in  flank,  because  they  d' 
him  double  injury,  first  by  demoralizing  him,  and  second  by  over 
throwing  him  by  the  force  of  impulsion,  which  is  all  in  you  > 
favor.  It  was  in  a charge  similar  to  this,  made  with  so  mucll 
courage  and  intelligence,  that  Colonel  Bro,  at  Waterloo,  recap 
tured  from  Ponsonby’s  brigade  one  of  our  eagles  taken  by  th 
English. 

Q.  The  speed  of  the  horses  should  then  be  kept  down  until 
the  charge  begins? 

A.  Yes:  but  when  the  charge  is  once  sounded  there  should  b 
but  one  gait— the  gallop. 

0.  What  rule  should  govern  in  charging  infantry? 

A.  Charge  rapidly  and  home;  if  the  enemy  is  disconcerted,  i! 
the  lines  waver,  his  ranks  open,  enter;  if  he  closes  up,  charge 

bayonets,  and  fear  prevents  the  reloading  of  their  arms,  tur 

around  the  square  and  threaten  it  on  all  sides;  deafen  him  wit 
noise  and  cry  “Prisoner”;  this  word  is  understood  in  ever 
language.  If  it  shakes  him,  enter;  if  he  surrenders,  no  mor 

sabre  blows,  but  have  the  arms  thrown  down,  divide  the  prisoner 
immediately,  and  conduct  them  to  the  rear.  If,  on  the  contrary 
protected  by  an  obstacle  you  have  not  perceived  he  receives  yo 

cooly  and  is  not  shaken,  but  reloads  his  weapons,  you  canno 

hope  to  break  the  ranks;  retire  then  at  full  speed,  bending  lo\ 
in  the  saddle,  to  rally  out  of  range  of  his  bullets,  to  threat* 


78 


ff  1 1 aii* 


CHARGES 


him  again  at  his  first  deployment.  To  act  otherwise  would  dis- 
play pure  obstinacy  and  ignorance  of  war. 

6 Should  you  have  to  charge  on  infantry  in  line? 

A.  Try  to  attack  one  of  its  wings;  you  will  receive  but  few 
shots;  you  will  throw  it  into  disorder,  and  you  will  get  it  cheaply, 
if  you  cannot  do  that,  and  the  line  is  a long  one,  pierce  its 
cen  trCi 

Q.  Should  it  become  necessary  to  charge  a square? 

A.  Attack  one  of  its  angles. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because  the  enemy  can  bring  to  bear  upon  you  only  an 
oblique  fire,  which  is  much  less  dangerous  than  a direct  one. 

Q.  What  is  the  momentum  of  a trooper  charging? 

A.  The  weight  of  the  trooper  multiplied  by  his  velocity  is 
equivalent  to  a weight  of  about  800  pounds,  which  should  be 
rresistible. 

Q.  What  is  the  best  time  to  charge  infantry? 

A.  Whenever  it  is  moving  in  line,  or  in  column  with  distance, 
or  whenever  it  has  been  well  shaken  by  artillery  fire. 

Q.  What  time  should  be  selected  for  charging  infantry  in 
column  ? 

A.  When  the  column  is  lengthening  out  and  the  ground  you 
have  to  pass  over  to  reach  it  is  favorable  to  your  horses;  charge 
it  then  in  flank,  and  in  piercing  it  you  will  separate  the  two 
extremities. 

Q.  If  the  enemy  surrenders,  what  is  to  be  done? 

A.  After  having  made  them  throw  down  their  arms  you 
withdraw  from  them  as  quickly  as  possible,  and  form  your  squad- 
rons between  them  and  the  enemy  who  may  attempt  a rescue. 

Q.  Should  the  enemy’s  cavalry  threaten  to  charge,  what 
should  be  done? 

A.  Try  to  take  up  a position  in  front  of  which  there  are 

some  obstacles,  invisible  to  the  enemy;  let  him  rush  upon  you, 
and  when  he  reaches  these  obstacles,  which  will  surprise  and  dis- 
unite him,  charge  him  in  your  turn,  and  take  advantage  of  his 
disappointment  and  physical  embarrassment  to  overwhelm  him 
on  ground  unfavorable  to  him. 

Q.  If  the  terrain  be  free  from  obstacles? 

A.  Determine  if  the  enemy  is  beginning  his  charge  at  too 

great  a distance  from  you,  with  reference  to  the  unity  and  rapidity 
of  his  attack;  if  he  makes  this  mistake,  await  him  without  stir- 
ring, and,  when  he  arrives  within  disiance,  in  a breathless  con- 

dition charge  him.  That  is  the  movement  we  executed  at 
Waterloo  against  Ponsonby’s  brigade. 

Q.  If  the  enemy  has  not  taken  too  much  space? 

A.  Advance  when  he  has  completed  one  fourth  of  his  charge, 
and  charge  upon  him. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  In  order  to  have  a force  of  impulsion  equal  to  his,  and  a 
uniformity  one  fourth  greater. 

Q.  If  attacked  by  heavy  cavalry? 

A.  As  soon  as  you  discover  his  design,  ploy  quickly  into  one 
or  several  close  columns,  according  to  the  time  at  your  disposal, 
and  then  charge  the  centre  of  the  advancing  line;  turn  back  as 
soon  as  you  have  pierced  it;  then  by  deploying  and  making  a 
half  turn,  you  can  take  in  rear  these  great  heavy  troopers,  whom 
you  will  surround  and  overthrow,  one  by  one,  at  very  little  cost  to 
yourself.  There  is  still  another  way  of  meeting  the  charges 
of  heavy  cavalry.  Suppose  you  have  four  squadrons.  As  soon 
,B  as  the  enemy  begins  to  move,  command,  Two  First  Squadrons, 
T*  Platoons  Right  Wheel,  Gallop,  March;  then.  Head  of  Column 

Left,  then  Platoons,  Left  Into  Line  Wheel,  Charge.  The  two 


79 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


Last  Squadrons,  Platoons  Left  Wheel,  Gallop,  Forward;  then 
Head  of  Column,  Right,  Right  Into  Line,  Wheel,  Charge. 

In  this  way  the  heavy  cavalry,  which  cannot  change  direction 
easily,  will  be  enclosed  in  the  space  between  the  two  lines  on 
their  flanks  and  rear,  and  cannot,  without  difficulty,  extricate 
themselves  from  the  critical  position  in  which  they  are  placed. 
The  attack  will  be  still  more  effective  if  our  second  line,  unmasked 
by  this  evolution,  charges  the  cuirassiers  in  front. 

In  these  movements,  as  in  almost  all  those  which  require 
rapidity  of  execution  and  unusual  commands,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  chief  should  prepare  for  them  some  little  time  in  advance 
and  forewarn  his  subordinates  of  what  he  intends  to  do,  and  indicate 
to  each  the  part  he  will  have  to  act,  under  such  or  such  circum- 
stances. 

Q.  Under  ordinary  circumstances,  what  is  the  best  formation  in 
which  to  charge? 

A.  In  echelons.  In  case  of  success,  the  first  echelon  shakes 

the  enemy,  the  second  breaks  his  ranks,  the  others  are  engaged  only 
so  far  as  may  be  necessary.  In  case  of  a reverse,  the  last  echelons 
always  offer  a point  of  support,  and  give  confidence  to  the 
troops  which  are  being  pursued. 

Q.  Before  charging  upon  cavalry,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Feel  it  as  a skilful  fencing-master  feels  his  adversary 
before  making  an  assault;  execute  some  simple  manoeuvres  by 
the  flank,  such  as  platoons  right  or  left  wheel,  while  preserving 
carefully  the  proper  distances,  so  as  to  re-form  in  a compact 
and  well  dressed  line,  at  the  very  first  command. 

Theaten  the  enemy’s  wings,  and,  if  he  begins  to  attempt  an 
unskilled  or  complicated  manoeuvre,  seize  the  opportunity,  which 
may  last  for  only  a few  seconds,  and  charge  home  upon  him. 

A movement  which  I have  always  seen  succeed  is,  when  two 
lines  observe  each  other  without  budging,  and  each  awaits  the 
moment  for  attack,  to  ploy  one  of  our  flank  squadrons  into  column 
of  platoons  and  push  it  forward  at  a full  trot,  perpendicularly, 
to  within  a hundred  paces  of  the  enemy,  with  orders  to  outflank 
him,  and  then  immediately  re-form  line  by  wheeling  the  platoons 
into  line,  and  stand  fast.  Rarely,  indeed,  would  the  enemy  move 
against  this  single  squadron  whose  performance  will  puzzle  and 
disquiet  him,  but  should  he  move  and  expose  his  flank,  charge 
with  your  remaining  squadrons,  and  you  will  have  a great  chance  '.i 
of  succeeding. 

This  movement  is  in  itself  the  whole  art  of  war  on  a small  scale. 

If  while  one  portion  of  our  troops  charges  the  enemy  another 
threatens  his  line  of  retreat,  you  are  sure  of  demoralizing  him  r 
and  producing  a decided  effect  upon  him,  because  your  men  act 
with  one  fixed  idea  and  the  enemy's  are  divided  and  distracted 
by  several. 

Q.  The  drill  book,  I believe,  direots  artillery  to  be  charged 
by  cavalry  as  foragers? 

A.  The  formation  is  a good  one  when  the  ground  Is  smooth  I 
and  the  pieces  exposed;  but  what  the  drill  book  does  not  say  is, 
that  even  upon  smooth  ground  it  is  necessary,  before  attempting 
to  charge  a battery,  to  havp  the  ground  reconnoitred  by  a few 
bold  and  well-mounted  scouts,  not  numerous  enough  nor  close 
enough  together  to  tempt  the  enemy  to  waste  projectiles  on  them. 
Without  taking  that  precaution  one  risk  being  brought  up  standing 
before  attaining  the  obiect  desired,  and  being  obliged  to  retreat 
with  no  other  result  than  the  loss  of  some  of  his  men.  This 
precaution  was  taken  by  General  Colbert  at  Wagram,  when  the 
Emperor  ordered  him  to  charge  the  Austrian  centre;  and  it 
was  which,  by  saving  his  brigade  from  useless  losses,  enabled 
him,  an  hour  later,  to  take  so  brilliant  a part  in  the  final  victory. 

All  terrains  in  war,  and  especially  those  upon  which  bat- 


80 


CHARGES 


teries  are  placed,  are  not  smooth;  the  elevations  necessary  to 
enable  the  pieces  to  be  pointed  generally  indicate  corresponding 
depressions,  sunken  roads,  ravines,  undulations  in  front  of  them 
which  it  is  necessary  to  know  and  take  advantage  of,  to  protect 
the  advance  of  the  troops  and  shelter  them  from  projectiles  from 
the  outset  of  the  charge.  When  once  begun,  in  this  case  more 
than  any  other,  is  rapidity  of  gait  a guarantee  of  success. 

One  more  thing  well  to  remember  is,  that,  if  the  battery  you 
charge  is  well  supported  by  infantry,  the  charge  should  be  so 
directed  as  to  keep  the  guns  between  you  and  the  infantry. 
The  fear  of  killing  their  artillerymen  will  stop  the  infantry  fire. 

The  best  method  of  capturing  a battery,  especially  in  undulating 
ground,  is  to  make  a false  attack  with  one  half  of  your  troops 
and  charge  the  guns  with  the  other. 

Q.  On  arriving  at  the  battery  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Charge  the  supporting  troops  vigorously,  cut  down  the 

gunners,  but  spare  the  drivers  and  make  them  turn  the  pieces 
about,  and  keep  up  the  retreat  in  a bold  and  united  manner. 

Q.  Should  the  drivers  show  an  unwillingness  to  go,  and  hang 
back  in  hopes  of  being  rescued? 

A.  Threaten  to  run  them  through  with  your  sabre. 

Q.  Should  this  threat  produce  no  fear? 

A.  Throw  them  to  the  ground.  Let  two  troopers  take  the  bridles 
of  the  two  lead  and  the  two  wheel  horses  to  lead  them;  other 
troopers  will  beat  the  horses’  sides  with  the  flat  of  their  sabres, 
and  thus  force  them  along. 

Q.  If  it  is  impossible  to  save  the  pieces,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  The  theorists  order  them  to  be  spiked;  to  do  that  spikes 
and  hammers  would  have  to  be  provided  before  the  charge;  but 
if  these  have  not  been  supplied  to  the  troopers,  they  will  simply 
try  to  throw  the  pieces  over  into  a ravine,  carry  off  the  limbers  or 
shoot  the  horses,  break  the  sponge-staves,  then  yield  the  ground 
for  a while,  not  rallying  too  far  away  and  return  again  in  force  to 
endeavor  to  carry  off  the  guns. 

Q.  How  should  a charge  be  made  on  a road? 

A.  If  the  object  be  only  to  pierce  the  line  and  deploy  after- 
wards in  rear  of  it,  form  your  column  in  mass  upon  as  large  a 

front  as  the  width  of  the  road  will  permit,  and  charge  in  column. 

This  maneouvre  may  be  considered  as  the  passage  of  a defile 
rather  than  a charge  properly  so  called;  for  the  charge  is  only 
a secondary  matter — serves  only  to  open  a passage. 

Q.  If  the  object  is  not  to  pierce  the  line? 

A.  You  provide  for  your  retreat  and,  as  a general  rule  in  a case 
>f  this  kind,  you  form  your  squadrons  in  column  with  large  distances 
(a  hundred  yards,  for  example).  The  head  of  the  column  should 
be  only  half  as  wide  as  the  road,  in  order  that  the  retreating 
squadrons  may  have  room  to  pass  those  in  support  without  throwing 
them  into  confusion.  You  order  in  advance  that  the  retiring  squad- 
rons shall  go  successively  a hundred  paces  in  rear  of  the  last  ones, 
io  re-form;  then  you  order  the  columns  wholly  or  partially  formed 
co  always  rest  their  right  on  the  ditch,  leaving  free,  on  their  left, 
that  part  of  the  road  to  be  used  by  the  retiring  squadrons  in  com- 
ing back. 

The  squadron  forming  the  advance-guard  has  its  two  leading 
alatoons  fifty  paces  distant  from  each  other;  the  other  two  remain 
jnited.  You  then  direct  that,  so  long  as  the  march  is  undisturbed, 
the  subdivisions  will  mantain  the  gait  of  the  head  of  the  column, 
'.arefully  preserving  their  distances  from  one  another.  As  soon 
>s  the  leading  squadron  falls  back,  the  one  which  follows  will 
is  soon  as  it  has  been  passed  by  the  first,  charge  upon  the  enemy  to 
irive  him  back  and,  if  successful  in  its  attempt,  will  take  the  of- 
ensive  at  once,  and  so  with  the  others.  In  this  manner  an  enemy 
ixhausted  by  his  efforts  may  be  successively  attacked  with  renewed 
mpulsion  by  fresh  and  unblown  horses.  You  also  direct  that  the 


81 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


columns  will  rally  at  once,  at  the  sound  of  the  trumpet,  in  order 
that,  if  threatened  on  your  flanks,  your  command  may  be  quickly  .'. 
reunited. 

These  orders  given  and  well  understood,  you  place  yourself  at 
the  head  of  the  first  squadron  and  begin  your  march.  You  launch 
your  first  squadron;  if  it  should  be  driven  back,  launch  the  second,  i 
and  so  on.  Should  the  terrain  open  out  and  admit  of  your  deploy- 
ing, sound  the  rally  and  form  echelons  on  the  sides  of  the  road,  t 
keeping  on  it  always  at  least  one  squadron,  to  cover  your  retreat 
in  case  of  necessity.  If  the  enemy  attacks  your  flank,  sound  the 
rally  just  the  same,  face  to  the  front  on  the  road,  keeping  the 
ditch  as  a point  of  support,  and  then  maneouvre  even,  if  the  place  - 
offers  facilities,  or  indicates  the  necessity,  for  doing  so. 

Q.  What  should  be  done  by  a colonel  of  cavalry  when  he  sees  - 
that  he  will  soon  have  to  make  a charge? 

A.  If  possible,  have  the  girths  tightened  and  let  the  men  drink  - 
a little  water. 

Sonqetimes  it  is  a good  thing  to  brace  up  the  nerves  of  your  men,  * 
if  they  are  to  charge  infantry  or  artillery,  by  exposing  them  for  a 
short  time  to  the  enemy’s  cannon  balls  and  the  bullets  of  his  sharp 
shooters.  Troops  who  have  suffered  somewhat  charge  with  more 
vigor  than  those  who  have  not.  Not  only  have  they  a revenge  to 
take,  a compliment  to  return,  but  it  is  then  easy  to  persuade  them 
that  to  charge  is  often  less  dangerous  than  to  remain  in  position 
and  that  a prompt  and  vigorous  effort  will  relieve  them  from  the 
wearing  strain  experienced  in  serving  as  a target  and  suffering 
losses  of  men  in  detail,  without  any  corresponding  glory  or  revenge. 

A general  of  the  greatest  merit  of  deservedly  high  repute,  the 
one  to  whom  the  victory  of  Jena  is  due,  has  often  told  me  that 
when  preparing  for  an  affair  he  systematically  teased  his  officers 
and  that  this  spurring  gave  them  all  the  more  dash  when  they  threw 
themselves  upon  the  enemy.  That  being  admitted,  one  can  readily 
see  that  a cavalry  officer  who  sees  the  moment  approaching  in 
which  he  will  have  to  deliver  heavy  blows,  should  keep  his  subor- 
dinates in  the  right  mood  and  gradually  raise  their  moral  tone  to 
the  height  of  the  attendant  circumstances,  which  will  fail  to  surprise 
them  when  they  show  their  most  unfavorable  sides,  and  which  they 
will  meet  with  all  their  faculties  under  perfect  control:  having  the 
coolness  to  judge,  the  dash  to  act. 

General  Rule. — A charge  once  begun,  push  it  home  and  held 
fast;  you  will  succeed.  In  all  things  there  is  a period  of  growth, 
full  development,  and  decline;  this  moral  as  well  as  physical  truth 
naturally  indicates  your  only  rational  course  and  your  chances  of 
success.  Every  charge  has  its  moment  of  dash,  followed  by  the 
melee,  then  the  moment  of  hesitation,  and  last  that  of  retreat. 

Be  firm  during  the  second  and  third  moments  and  the  victory  is 
yours;  and  if  you  take  full  advantage  of  it  this  o'.cs.  the  enemy  wifi 
be  demoralized  and  never  obtain  his  revenge  during  the  campaign. 

In  1806,  while  traversing  Upper  Silesia  with  the  7th  Hussars, 
in  which  I had  the  honor  to  be  a sub-lieutenant,  a few  leagues 
from  Ratisbon  I encountered  the  ruins  of  an  old  Gothic  castle. 
From  an  artistic  point  of  view  it  was  very  uninteresting,  and  I was 
retiring  when,  above  the  gate,  I saw  coarsely  sculptured,  two  stags' 
struggling  upon  the  trunk  of  a tree  thrown  over  a torrent.  Above,' 
it  was  written  in  old  German,  "The  most  persistent  will  win.'l 
This  device  so  impressed  me  that  it  has  never  been  forgotten 
Let  it  be  yours  in  the  hour  of  a charge. 

The  steadiness  of  a charge  is  prolonged,  and  its  vigor  doubled 
by  the  confidence  inspired  by  the  proximity  of  supporting  troops 
These  should  maintain  the  gait  of  those  making  the  charge,  nc 
matter  how  rapid  it  may  be;  follow  as  rapidly  as  they  move 
halting  only  when  they  halt,  and  then  post  themselves  near  b> 
and  in  a threatening  position. 


82 


SKIRMISHERS  AND  FLANKERS 


i Almost  all  the  failures  of  charges  are  due  to  the  slowness  or 
ignorance  of  the  supports.  A charge  badly  supported,  no  matter 
how  bravely  it  may  have  begun,  becomes  only  a bloody  affray; 
while  one  well  supported  is  always  victorious  and  decisive. 
Remember,  then,  that,  in  shortening  the  retreat  of  a charging 
Force,  by  having  the  supports  close  at  hand  the  possibility  of  a 
Failure  is  prevented. 

By  supports  I do  not  mean  the  first  line  only  which  follows 
and  supports  the  charge,  but  also  the  lines  echelonned  in  rear,  which 
some  forward  rapidly  and  within  short  distances,  to  seize  upon 
oositions  as  fast  as  they  are  gained. 

If  a charge  is  made  only  to  reconnoitre  the  enemy  and  force 
him  to  deploy,  a reserve  is  not  necessary;  but  when  the  attack  is 
ilike  an  arrow,  whose  head  must  enter  and  fix  itself,  the  supporting 
troops  should  drive  it  home. 

If,  in  a charge,  the  commanding  officer  does  not  permit  his 
troops  to  calculate,  in  advance,  their  retreat  and  the  obstacles 
in  the  way  of  it,  it  is  because  he  has  already  done  it  for  them. 
Therefore  he  must,  as  far  as  possible,  guard  against  developing 
his  front  in  advance  of  a defile,  marsh,  ditches,  etc. 

# * 

SKIRMISHERS  AND  FLANKERS 

Q.  What  do  you  understand  by  skirmishers  and  flankers? 

A.  The  advance-guard  of  troops  moving  to  the  attack  or  in 
•etreat;  those  who  first  come  in  contact  with  the  enemy,  throw 
down  the  gauntlet  to  him,  threaten  him,  prevent  ail  repose, 
seek  to  discover  his  designs,  to  learn  his  strength,  to  weaken* 
she  force  and  results  of  his  serious  attacks;  those  who  support 
-he  retreat;  and,  finally,  those  who  surround,  like  the  pawns  of 
i chess  board,  our  first  line  with  a vigilant  and  protecting  curtain. 

Q.  When  do  you  send  your  skirmishers  forward? 

A.  Whenever  I encounter  the  enemy  or  believe  him  to  be  near 
Ine. 

\ 0-  Should  they  open  fire  upon  him  as  soon  as  they  see  him 
!;vithin  good  range? 

i A.  They  must  never  fire  except  by  order  of  their  chief. 

' Q.  And  when  their  ammunition  is  becominq  exhausted? 

A.  They  must  send  back  to  the  regiment  for  a fresh  supply; 
or  firing  once  ordered  must  never  be  Interrupted. 

Q-  What  stops  the  firing? 

A.  An  order  from  the  chief;  and  under  no  pretext  whatever 
hould  a carbine  or  pistol  shot  be  fired  after  that. 

Q.  What  precautions  should  a skirmisher  observe? 

A.  To  aim  carefully  and  fire  only  at  suitable  ranges. 

Q.  What  should  be  the  position  of  a skirmisher  on  horseback? 

A.  The  horse  being  well  girthed,  the  trooper  will  wear  his 
leaddress  well  secured  by  the  chin  strap;  the  cloak  rolled  and 
rossed  over  his  chest;  the  stirrups  short,  to  enable  him  to  rise 
,n  them  and  thus  gain  greater  range  for  his  shots  and  not  be 
onstrained  by  his  horse’s  head  in  directing  them;  the  spurs  near 
he  horse’s  sides,  so  as  to  turn  him  quickly;  the  knees  close; 
he  upper  sling  of  the  sabre  belt  very  short,  so  that  the  hand  can 
;uickly  seize  the  gripe  of  the  sabre;  the  holsters  uncovered;  the 
ront  of  the  schabraque  turned  back  on  the  thighs;  the  carbine 
1 the  hand. 

Q.  I thought  the  sabre  was  to  be  held  dangling  by  the  knot? 

A.  A theoretical  error  to  be  carefully  avoided,  if  one  does  not 
rlsh  to  embarrass  his  movements  and  cut  his  knee  or  puncture 
is  foot. 

Q.  And  when  the  skirmisher  Is  threatened  with  a charge? 

83 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


A.  He  must  drop  his  carbine,  shorten  his  reins,  draw  hi| 
pistol  from  the  holster,  put  it  into  the  bridle-hand — where  i 
is  held  horizontally  between  the  thumb  and  first  finger,  th 
stock  to  the  right — draw  sabre,  and  await  or  anticipate  the  charge 

Q.  And  if  the  enemy  charges? 

A.  To  receive  him  with  the  sabre.  If  an  opportunity  o 
using  the  pistol  occurs,  fire  it,  dropping  the  sabre,  for  the  moment 
on  the  sabre  knot;  then  throw  the  discharged  pistol  to  the  left 
as  I have  indicated  in  the  chapter  on  Arms,  and  quickly  seiz 
the  sabre  gripe.  The  charge  finished,  return  the  sabre  to  it 
scabbard,  reload  the  pistol,  replace  it  in  the  holster,  and  recom 
mence  skirmishing  with  the  carbine,  taking  care  to  fire  at  officer 
in  preference  to  soldiers. 

Q.  What  precautions  must  the  skirmisher  observe? 

A.  They  have  all  been  pointed  out  in  the  chapter  on  Arms 
When  the  trooper  is  unable  to  dismount  for  a long  time,  he  mus 
test  his  saddle  to  see  if  it  is  secure,  and,  in  case  the  girth  become 
slackened,  to  execute  his  wheels  to  the  rear  so  as  to  prevent  it! 
turning  under  him. 

Q.  Should  a skirmisher  always  retreat  by  turning  to  the  lef 
about?  ... 

A.  Theory,  in  thus  instructing  you,  has  intended  to  indicat 
the  necessity  of  always  keeping  the  sabre  hand  toward  the  enemy 
To  carry  the  inference  farther  would  be  a dangerous  error.  Ii 
fact,  in  citing  a case  often  presenting  itself,  that  where  a sktr* 
misher  is  charged  and  passed  on  his  right,  would  he  then  tun 
to  the  left  about,  so  as  to  permit  his  enemy  to  attack  him  or 
the  side  he  thus  presents  to  him?  No;  he  should  turn  quickly 
to  the  right,  follow  his  enemy  to  get  alongside  of  him,  am 
endeavor  to  attack  him  on  his  (the  enemy’s)  left. 

Q.  And  if  he  overtakes  him? 

A.  Give  him  a thrust  in  the  left  flank.  If  his  enemy  does  no 
fall  or  surrender,  give  him  a second  one.  If,  by  the  two  rapic 
movement  of  his  horse,  he  should  pass  the  enemy,  he  shouU 
give  him  a back-handed  cut  across  the  face.  If  the  enemy  sur 
renders,  make  him  throw  away  his  arms,  take  his  horse  by  thi 
bridle,  and  lead  him  swiftly  to  the  rear.  In  every  attack  th« 
success  of  the  trooper  will  depend  upon  the  correctness  01 
his  eye  and  the  coolness  of  his  judgment. 

General  Rule. — Whenever  we  follow  an  enemy  we  should  pres- 
him  closely,  taking  him  on  his  left,  because  he,  being  defenceless 
is  at  our  mercy  if  our  horse  goes  better  than  his.  In  fact 
we  can  use  against  him  that  which  he  cannot  use  agains 
us — the  combined  length  of  our  arms  and  weapons.  Should  he 
on  seeing  his  desperate  situation,  try  to  turn  quickly  to  the  right 
catch  him  in  the  movement,  drive  your  horse's  chest  against  hi) 
horse's  flank,  and  you  will  overthrow  him  without  difficulty. 

Q.  Should  the  skirmisher’s  carbine  become  unslung  and  fall 
what  should  he  do? 

A.  If  the  enemy  is  near  he  must  at  once  make  use  of  hi) 
pistol,  and  pick  up  his  carbine  after  the  enemy  has  withdrawn 

Q.  The  skirmisher  once  in  place  on  the  line,  should  he  half 

A.  He  should  make  slight  movements,  especially  by  the  flank 
when  loading  his  arms  or  close  to  the  enemy. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because  he  will  prevent  any  one  from  aiming  at  him  as  ac 
curately  as  if  he  remained  motionless. 

Q.  Should  a trooper  dismounted  in  a charge  regard  himsel 
as  captured? 

A.  No;  not  if  he  preserves  his  composure  and  is  determiner 
not  to  be  taken. 

Q.  What  should  he  do  then? 

A.  That  entirely  depends  upon  the  state  of  the  charge  ant 
his  own  situation.  In  certain  cases,  as  soon  as  he  is  dismountet 


84 


SKIRMISHERS  AND  FLANKERS 


he  should  endeavor  to  remount.  If  he  cannot  do  so  he  should 
lean  his  back  against  his  horse  and  defend  himself,  or  boldly  seize 
by  the  tail  the  horse  of  a comrade,  who  will  then  slacken  his 
gait,  and  thus  bring  him  back  to  the  lines,  while  his  comrades 

1 will  boldly  cover  his  retreat.  If  that  is  not  possible,  he  must 

lie  on  the  ground,  especially  if  the  enemy  is  not  armed  with 
; lances,  and  counterfeit  death.  He  need  not  fear  being  trampled 
by  the  horses;  they  will  all  leap  over  him  without  touching  him. 
„ The  charge  having  passed,  if  he  finds  himself  on  ground 
; occupied  by  the  enemy,  but  in  sight  of  us,  he  will  determine 

. at  a glance  the  nature  of  the  surrounding  ground,  our  proximity, 
our  strength,  finally,  wihether  he  has  a chance  of  escaping  by 
gaining,  within  sight  of  us,  a ditch,  ravine  or  wood.  Then, 
if  this  inspection  is  favorable,  he  will  make  a dash  for  the  side 
, of  the  ravine,  ditch,  or  the  wood,  throwing  away  his  sabre  scabbard, 

' and  keeping  the  blade  in  his  hand.  If  the  enemy’s  troopers 

come  upon  him,  he  will  avoid  them  by  turning,  lying  down, 

; striking  their  horses’  heads,  thrusting  at  a trooper  whose  horse’s 
bridle  he  holds  with  his  left  hand,  and,  if  he  overthrows  him, 
j he  will  leap  upon  his  horse.  In  that  way  he  will  give  us  time 
: to  come  to  his  assistance. 

* If  these  chances  do  not  present  themselves  and  further  defence 
, is  of  no  use,  he  will  surrender.  But  as  soon  as  night  comes  he 
will  endeavor  to  make  his  escape,  especially  if  in  a friendly 

country,  or  if  his  captors  belong  to  a retreating  army. 

' In  the  campaign  of  1809  we  had  just  charged  the  Austrian 
J Uhlans  of  Prince  Charles.  A non-commissioned  officer  of  the 
: 20th  Hussars  had  been  captured  by  them  and  was  being  taken 

to  the  rear  by  a Uhlan,  who  was  also  leading  two  horses.  This 

1 non-commissioned  officer,  thinking  of  means  of  escaping,  saw  to  his 
Jelight,  a pistol  lost  by  some  one,  lying  on  the  battlefield.  It 
-yvas  loaded,  he  knew,  for  it  was  at  full  cock;  to  pick  it  up,  kill 
the  Uhlan,  and  return  to  us  with  the  two  horses,  was  the  work 
■ if  an  instant  for  this  brave  non-commissioned  officer. 

The  day  after  the  battle  of  Wagram,  a young  Lorain  sub-lieutenant 
>f  the  20th  Chasseurs,  captured  an  Austrian  officer,  whom  he 

vas  leading  to  the  rear  with  all  the  consideration  due  to  mis- 
ortune  and  after  having  received  the  word  of  the  captive  that  he 
vould  not  try  to  escape.  The  troopers  of  the  officer  charged  upon 
.orain,  who  was  compelled  to  make  a prompt  retreat;  but  his 
lorse  stumbled,  .fell  and  rose  again  almost  immediately.  Lorain 
inhorsed,  but,  recovering  himself,  leaned  back  against  his  horse 
o defend  himself,  when  the  Austrian  officer,  in  violation  of  his 
ledge,  seized  him  from  behind  to  disarm  him.  The  young  French- 
man broke  his  jaw  with  a pistol  ball;  then  running  aroutid  his 
orse  and  making  use  of  him  as  a breast  work,  he  gained  time 
or  us  to  come  to  his  rescue  and  bring  in  his  prisoner. 

Many  prisoners  are  made  because  men  lose  their  coolness 
nd  courage  and  no  longer  appreciate  the  means  of  escape  lying 
■ ithin  their  reach. 

Whenever  a trooper  is  dismounted  his  comrades  should  go  as 
uickly  as  possible  to  cover  his  retreat.  Some  should  attack  the 
nemy;  others  take  the  arms,  equipment,  and  saddlery  of  the 
ismounted  man;  the  others  help  him  off  the  field. 

Q.  What  should  a line  of  skirmishers  do  when  they  move 
'rward  ? 

A.  Preserve  the  line  so  that  no  large  gaps  can  occur  in  it 
trough  which  the  enemy  might  rush;  leave  no  trooper  of  the  line 
^supported;  not  lengthen  the  line  unnecessarily  and  cover  too 
uch  space  for  no  good  purpose,  as  that  would  diminish  its 
rength  and  endanger  its  flanks. 

Keep  the  line  as  nearly  parallel  as  possible  to  that  of  the  enemy, 
d follow  his,  so  to  speak,  with  mathematical  exactness,  regulating 
s movements  by  his. 


■ni  * 


it  n 


85 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


Observe  carefully  and  successively  the  ground  which  the  enemy 
occupies  or  abandons,  in  order  not  to  be  embarrassed  on  arriving  or 
the  same  ground. 

Judge  in  advance  of  the  nature  of  the  ground  as  a whol< 
and  in  detail  by  the  undulations  or  breaking  of  the  enemy's 
line  of  skirmishers  in  retreating. 

Remember  accurately  the  ground  passed  over  at  each  instant 
This  close  observation  is  all  the  more  necessary  if  one  has  t( 
cross  shallow  streams,  ravines,  defiles,  etc.,  in  order  to  avoid,  ir 
oase  of  a hasty  retreat,  being  embarrassed,  or  being  thrown  int< 
a cul-de-sac,  from  which  escape  would  be  impossible  and  whicf 
would  lead  to  certain  capture. 

Gain,  as  far  as  possible,  the  highest  points  of  the  ground,  so  a: 
to  see  a greater  distance,  and  better  discover  the  enemy's  dis 
positions. 

Give  prompt  warning  as  soon  as  any  one  discovers  a body  o 
the  enemy,  whose  presence  was  unsuspected,  forming  an  ambus 
cade,  preparing  for  or  executing  any  movement  whatever,  eithe' 
offensive  or  defensive. 

If  a skirmisher  can  see  without  being  seen,  he  will  halt  a' 
once  and  continue  to  observe  without  showing  himself,  will  maki 
signals,  but  will  not  stir  until  the  arrival  of  an  officer,  who  wil 
come  to  reconnoitre  in  person  and  give  him  further  orders. 

Should  some  of  the  skirmishers  see  that  the  enemy  is  waverinf 
and  that  his  retreat  can  be  decided  by  a vigorous  charge,  the; 
will  signal  the  line  and,  at  the  same  time,  advance  rapidly  upor 
the  enemy  in  order  to  produce  confusion  in  his  ranks,  and  takt 
advantage  of  the  opportunity  to  capture  some  of  his  men. 

If  the  artillery  is  in  an  exposed  position,  they  will  attacl 
that  in  preference  to  any  thing  else. 

Q.  In  case  of  a retrograde  movement,  should  the  skirmisher: 
retire  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  book? 

A.  When  the  drill  book  ordered  the  retreat  to  be  execute: 
successively  by  rank,  it  was  desired  to  execute,  on  the  drill  ground 
a manoeuvre  which  would  teach  the  troopers  that  they  shout: 
mutually  support  one  another  in  a retreat,  and  not  strip  the  whob 
line  at  once.  This  movement  should  then  be  considered  in  th< 
light  of  the  Idea  which  gave  rise  to  It;  but  in  war  this  ide. 
should  not  prevail  In  the  execution  of  a movement  which  wouli 
be  both  impracticable  and  dangerous. 

When  a line  of  skirmishers  is  withdrawn  the  movement  shoulc 
not  be  begun  or  maintained  according  to  the  odd  or  even  number 
of  the  men,  but  the  weakest  horses  should  go  first  so  as  to  leav 
the  best-mounted  skirmishers  as  a rear  guard.  The  line  shout 
be  divided  into  two  egual  parts  as  far  as  possible,  and  throughou 
its  whole  extent. 

Q.  Should  one  of  our  skirmishers  be  cut  off  by  the  enemy 
what  should  he  do? 

A.  If  well  mounted  and  he  sees  too  much  danger  in  attemptini 
to  rejoin  by  a direct  route,  after  having  abandoned  his  carbine 
placed  his  sabre  horizontally  in  his  bridle  hand,  the  hilt  to  th 
right,  the  blade  held  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  havim 
taken  his  pistol  in  the  right  hand,  he  will  move  out,  and,  hus 
banding  the  strength  of  his  horse,  pointing  the  pistol  toward  thos 
following  him,  he  will  soon  be  able  to  rejoin  his  own  troop  b 
making  a detour:  for  the  enemy  will  not  pursue  him  to  any  grea 
distance,  especially  in  a broken  country. 

The  movement  of  skirmishers,  unless  contrary  orders  are  giver  l 
Is  always  regulated  by  that  of  the  troops  which  they  cover  i 
They  must  always  as  far  as  possible,  keep  the  same  distanci 
from  these  troops,  whether  moving  to  the  front  or  rear.  However 
when  covering  a retreat,  they  must  hold  all  the  defiles  and  tak 
care  to  pass  them  in  such  a manner  as  to  prevent  the  enemr 
capturing  any  of  their  troops.  They  must,  therefore,  watch  th  i 


86 


SKIRMISHERS  AND  FLANKERS 


movements  of  our  troops  as  well  as  those  of  the  enemy.  This 
double  duty  is  indispensible  to  the  proper  performances  of  their 
work  and  the  safety  of  their  own  movements. 

They  will  gradually  close  in  as  they  approach  the  defile;  then, 
to  avoid  confusion,  they  will  cause  part  of  their  number  to  pass 
through  and  immediately  occupy  the  other  extremity,  and,  facing 
about,  execute  a well  directed  fire  upon  the  enemy  in  order  to 
protect  the  retreat  of  their  comrades  still  engaged  in  the  defile; 
If  the  troops  they  cover  continue  their  march,  they  will  overtake 
them  by  doubling  the  gait. 

, The  more  rapid  the  retreat  the  less  the  line  of  skirmishers 
must  be  extended.  It  is  necessary,  even,  to  preserve  better 
order  and,  consequently,  greater  facility  of  movement,  when  the 
shortened  line  of  defence  no  longer  compels  the  employment  of 
’a  long  line  of  skirmishers,  to  assemble  in  platoons  those  not 
(needed,  and  add  them  to  the  supporting  troops. 

If  a road  is  thus  gained  only  a few  skirmishers  should  be 
left  back  to  form  a rear  guard;  for  otherwise  it  might  happen  that 
fthe  great  number  would  be  a disadvantage,  and  would  cause  the 
wounding  of  one  another  in  using  their  firearms. 

The  skirmishers  should  be  directed  to  fire  upon  groups  instead 
of  individuals,  as,  in  that  way,  a ball  which  misses  its  target 
may  yet  hit  some  one.  For  similar  reasons,  skirmishers  should 
preserve  their  intervals,  as  they  will,  in  that  way,  afford  poorer 
targets  for  the  enemy  to  fire  at. 

When  the  order  is  given  to  retire,  no  one  must  be  allowed  to 
disobey  it,  even  though  an  attack  were  certain  to  succeed. 
Sometimes  troopers,  through  an  excess  of  courage  or  obstinacy, 
(continue  the  combat;  they  should  be  severely  punished,  and,  if  guilty 
of  a repetition  of  the  fault,  they  should  be  abandoned  to  their  fate 
because,  often  in  order  to  support  or  protect  them,  an  entire  army 
becomes  re-engaged  in  a battle  which  may  keep  it  employed  and 
harassed  uselessly  for  a whole  day.  For  one  imprudent  man  ten 
thousand  are  compromised. 

Q.  How  should  a skirmisher  charge? 

A.  I have  indicated  that  In  the  chapter  on  Charges. 

Q.  What  should  our  troopers  do  when  skirmishing  with  Infan- 
try? 

A.  Try  to  draw  them  into  an  open  place,  then  charge  home 
upon  them  and  cut  them  in  pieces. 

The  Cossacks  often  assemble  to  charge,  but  they  disperse 
in  retreating.  Our  skirmishers  generally  do  the  opposite,  what- 
ever may  be  the  advantages  of  the  ground.  The  Cossacks  are 
ght;  we  are  wrong.  In  fact,  we  have  often  seen  our  troopers, 
n retiring,  crowd  upon  one  another  so  as  to  prevent  any  one 
sing  his  weapons,  obstructing  one  another  and  stopping  all 
rogress;  also  delaying  the  march  of  poorly  mounted  men  and 
feeping  these  unfortunates  at  the  tail  of  the  column,  to  be  sabred 
md  captured  while  serving  as  shields  to  their  guilty  companions. 

A confused  mass  of  retreating  men  is  always  sabred,  for  two 
'ery  simple  reasons;  the  first  is,  that  the  troopers  engaged  in  it, 
>y  crowding  too  closely  together,  prevent  all  measures  of  individual 
defence,  and  make  it  impossible  to  halt  and  turn  about;  the  second 
s,  that  the  attacking  trooper,  who  looks  straight  to  the  front 

Bind  has  no  fear  for  his  flanks,  rushes  on  with  all  his  impelling 
orce,  with  the  greatest  boldness  upon  this  helpless  mass,  which 

Iie  sabres  without  danger  to  himself,  and  drives  as  far  as  he  wishes. 
It  is  not  thus  with  a retreat  conducted  individually.  Each 
nan  preserves  all  his  defensive  force.  He  is  equal  in  every  respect 
,;o  the  attacker,  who  carefully  avoids  rushing  recklessly  upon  him, 
decause  his  attention  is  divided,  his  flanks  are  threatened,  and  the 

Ilanger  is  as  great  for  him  as  for  his  antagonist.  A retreat  of 
bat  kind  is  never  pushed  boldly  or  followed  very  far.  The  slow 
lorses  can  execute  it  as  well  as  the  fleetest;  it  disquiets  the  at- 


87 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


tacker,  checks  him  at  the  important  point,  and,  by  sudden  face  to 
the  rear,  allows  the  offensive  to  be  taken. 

From  time  immemorial,  nations  with  the  true  cavalry  spirit 
have  acted  in  a similar  manner.  Polybius,  in  describing  the 
passage  of  the  Trebia,  tells  us:  "Nevertheless,  Sempronius  sounded 
the  retreat  in  order  to  recall  his  cavalry,  which  did  not  know  how 
to  manoeuvre  against  the  cavalry  in  their  front.  In  fact  they 
were  fighting  the  Numidians,  whose  custom  it  was  to  retreat 
in  dispersed  order  and  return  vigorously  to  the  charge  when 
the  enemy  least  expected  them  to  do  so.' 

Q.  Should  orders  always  be  conveyed  to  skirmishers  by  the 
trumpet  as  prescribed  in  the  regulations? 

A.  Do  nothing  of  the  kind,  unless,  as  rarely  happens  in 
war,  you  are  upon  perfectly  smooth  ground,  executing  a general  i 
movement,  or  unless  you  wish  your  enemy  to  know  your  plans 
as  well  as  you  do. 

Skirmishers  are  essentially  irregular  in  their  march,  and  their 
movements  entirely  subordinated  to  those  of  the  armies  en- 
gaged, and,  above  all,  to  the  configuration  of  the  ground.  The 
signals,  numerous  as  they  are,  would  not  nearly  suffice  were  you  to 
depend  entirely  upon  them. 

For  example,  what  signals  would  you  use  should  you  wish  to 
refuse  the  right  w.ng,  advance  the  left  wing,  make  a change  of 
front,  hold  back  the  centre,  etc.,  or  any  one  of  fifty  other  move- 
ments the  necessity  for  which  may  occur  at  any  moment? 

Suppcse  that  our  left  wing  has  gained  too  much  ground  to  the 
front;  if  the  retreat  were  sounded,  the  whole  line  would  obey,  and  . 
you  would  rectify  nothing  by  the  movement  of  the  whole,  but 
might  commit  a serious  fault. 

General  Rule. — Use  the  trumpet  only  in  the  few  cases  where 
you  wish  the  whole  line  to  attack  or  retreat  toge  her.  Whenever 
you  have  any  special  orders  to  give  (which  will  frequently  be 
the  case),  send  them  by  a non-commissioned  officer  or  deliver  them  i 
yourself.  Let  those  orders  be  short  and  plain. 

Example. — Tell  Sergeant  Gueridon  to  halt  his  men  until  the 
right  of  Sergeant  Mozet's  squad  arrives  at  the  angle  of  the 
small  wood. 

Tell  Sergeant  Cannois  to  withdraw  to  the  small  stream,  cross 
it,  and  remain  there  until  further  orders. 

Tell  Sergeant  Cnabrier  to  assemble  his  men  and  hold  the  small  t 
bridge. 

Tell  the  left  wing  not  to  move  forward  until  I am  seen  cross- 
ing the  highway. 

Say  that,  If  I sound  the  retreat,  Leysac  will  recross  the 

ravine  near  the  rye-field,  Piat  near  the  mill,  Cortie  near  the 

three  poplars,  and  stand  fast  in  rear  of  it. 

Say  to  Lieutenant  Carden  that,  as  soon  as  he  sees  the  re- 
treat executed,  he  iwill  assemble  his  skirmishers,  without  sound  of 
trumpet,  and  move  at  a fast  trot  to  the  farm,  where  he  will  I 
take  position,  etc. 

A commander  of  skirmishers  should  be  very  careful  about  the 

signals  he  orders  to  be  sounded;  otherwise  he  may  not  only  make 

his  own  men  execute  wrong  movements,  but  also  lead  other  i 
skirmishers,  not  under  his  orders,  into  error. 

A skirmisher  should  know  his  enemy,  and  detect  his  ruses.  If 
he  shows  but  few  men,  and  those  far  apart,  it  is  probable  that 
they  have  concealed  supports. 

If  he  extends  one  of  his  wings  unusually  far,  he  doubtless  in- 
tends to  make  a real  or  false  attack.  If,  in  retreating,  he  closes 
intervals,  he  is  about  to  pass  a defile  or  attempt  a charge.  If, 
without  reason,  he  refuses  one  of  his  wings,  he  wishes  to  draw 
the  troopers  in  front  of  that  wing  into  a trap.  If  he  refuses  his 
center,  it  is  for  the  purpose  of  enveloping  you.  If  his  skirmishers 


88 


SURPRISES  AND  AMBUSCADES 


lisappear  suddenly,  take  care;  stop  short,  and  try  to  learn,  as 
oon  as  possible,  the  cause  for  this  sudden  disappearance;  it  is 
lossible  that  it  precedes,  by  only  a few  moments,  a serious  at- 
tack upon  your  centre  or  one  of  your  wings. 

There  are  some  ruses  employed  by  skimishers  which  I have 
ften  seen  successful. 

At  the  beginning  of  our  Polish  campaign  our  dragoons  were 
worsted  in  an  encounter  with  the  Cossacks  a result  due  to  the 
alse  theories  of  a celebrated  general.  The  Cossacks,  emboldened 
y their  success,  attacked  these  troopers  with  confidence  and 
ury.  Our  cuirassiers  wore  white  cloaks  like  those  of  the 
Iragoons;  they  were  made  to  put  them  on,  and  were  then  moved 
orwarded  into  the  first  line.  The  Cossacks,  thinking  they  were 
ealing  again  with  our  dragoons,  charged  them  impetuously  but 
oon  had  good  cause  to  repent  of  their  act.  The  dragoons,  ration- 
lly  reorganized,  faithful  to  their  former  brilliant  reputation, 
nade  our  arms  famous  in  Spain  and  in  the  following  campaigns, 
ook,  in  every  affair,  the  most  terrible  and  glorious  revenge. 

I have  seen  cur  hussars,  when  fired  upon  by  the  enemy,  counter- 
ed death,  or  act  as  though  wounded.  The  enemy,  seeing  them 
all  forward  upon  the  saddle,  ran  to  capture  them,  but  the  hus- 
ars,  rising  in  their  saddles  and  firing  point-blank,  carried  off 
heir  assailants  and  their  horses. 

It  is  not  a matter  of  indifference  for  an  officer  commanding 
kirmishers  to  know  with  whom  he  has  to  deal.  In  all  armies, 

1 spile  of  the  successive  renewal  of  the  personnel,  there  exist 
i ome  regiments  whose  old  well  established  reputations  have  never 
egenerated.  Of  these  are  in  Russia,  Austria,  and  Prussia,  the 
tossacks  of  the  Guard,  those  of  the  Don,  Blanckenstein  Hussars, 
he  Dragoons  of  La  Tour,  Merfeld  Uhlans,  some  regiments  of 
'russian  dragoons,  black  hussars,  etc.,  who  perform  more  ski II- 
iilly  than  others  the  duty  of  advance  guard.  Upon  the  names 
nder  which  they  became  famous  in  our  wars  have  been  grafted 
thers  since  the  peace,  and  many  of  them  bear  the  names  of 
ft  heir  colonels;  but  the  stock  is  the  same,  and  war  has  not 
nbaptized  them  for  us.  Our  old  soldiers,  on  seeing  the  red  vests, 
ne  blue  trousers  with  red  bands,  red  shakos,  sky-blue  pelisses, 
reen  and  amaranth  coats,  yellow  schapskas,  black  and  sky-blue 
olmans,  will  at  once  recognize  the  regiments  wearing  them,  and 
ill  manoeuvre  accordingly. 


ft  n 


SURPRISES  AND  AMBUSCADES 


To  surprise  an  enemy  requires  a combination  of  skill  and  dash. 
The  effect  of  a surprise  is  demoralization. 

Outpost  warfare  is  a succession  of  surprises. 

JAn  officer  who,  with  inferior  forces,  frequently  surprises  his 
lemy,  is  sure  of  speedily  ruining  him. 

Although  the  iword  surprise  comprehends  almost  every  offensive 
reration  pertaining  to  outpost  duty,  we  shall  include  under  this 
tie  only  that  which  it  is  generally  agreed  to  designate  by  that 
ime. 


es.  I 
lefti 

ESS  » 
till 
IE  1 
o Jw 
1*5  S 
- Vr 


0. 

A. 

o. 

A. 

Q- 

A. 

0. 

A. 

Q. 


What  is  a surprise? 

An  unexpected  attack. 

What  should  it  be? 

It  cannot  be  too  sudden  or  too  determined. 
What  precedes  it? 

A rapid  march  or  an  ambush. 

What  is  an  ambush? 

Troops  placed  in  a concealed  position. 
What  is  the  best  kind  of  an  ambush? 


89 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


A.  One  which  the  enemy  is  least  likely  to  suspect  or  discover 

Q.  Should  it  always  be  arranged  upon  the  route  taken  by  tin 
enemy? 

A.  The  less  time  required  for  pouncing  upon  the  enemy,  thi 
better,  but  there  are  cases  in  which  it  would  have  to  be  preparer 
at  some  distance  from  his  route. 

Q.  Name  them. 

A.  Those,  for  instance,  where  it  is  desired  to  attack  thi 

rear  or  centre  of  an  enemy’s  convoy  passing  through  a defile 
It  is  probable  that,  before  traversing  this  dangerous  place,  thi 

enemy  would  scout  its  approaches;  but  when  he  has  been  marchin; 
for  a long  time  it  is  unlikely  that  his  exploration  will  extend  to  . 
very  great  distance.  in  such  a case  the  ambush  should  be  lai< 
well  beyond  the  ground  covered  by  his  scouts. 

Q.  There  are,  then,  two  kinds  of  ambushes! 

A.  Yes,  which  might  be  respectively  called  instantaneous  an 

prepared. 

Q.  Give  an  axample  of  the  first  kind. 

A.  In  the  early  part  of  1814  we  were  retreating,  under  th 

command  of  General  Maison,  from  Breda  upon  Antwerp.  Th' 
steeples  of  the  city  were  already  in  sight.  The  enemy’s  advance 
guard  was  pressing  our  rear-guard  so  closely  that  the  infantry 
cavalry,  and  artillery  of  the  two  armies  were  mingled  togethe 
and  fighting  hand  to  hand. 

Two  of  our  guns  were  about  to  be  captured.  Reckinger,  ai 
officer  of  our  lancer  regiment,  found  himself  with  only  a dozei 
men,  marching  with  the  extreme  rear-guard;  instantly  making  u 
his  mind,  he  disappeared  at  a garden.  Our  infantry,  mixed  ui 
with  a furious  enemy,  continued  its  retreat,  but,  overpowerei 
by  numbers,  lost  its  two  guns.  The  enemy  cried  Victory!  gatherer 
around  the  horses  and  guns,  and  turned  them  upon  us;  the  intrepii 
Reckinger  then  sallied  out  from  his  ambush,  and,  in  three  mir 
utes  afterwards,  the  guns,  and  the  Prussians  in  charge  of  them 
were  ours. 

Q.  What  are  prepared  ambuscades? 

A.  Those  planned  in  advance,  which  form  part  of  a movemen 
that  has  been  studied  and  calculated.  Thus,  for  example,  i 
commanding  an  advance  guard  strong  enough  to  act  on  th 
offensive,  and  knowing  well  the  ground  upon  which  I am  goini 

to  drive  back  the  enemy,  I know  that  portions  of  his  flank  ma 

be  attacked  at  such  or  such  a point,  I send  forward  the  troop 
detailed  to  make  these  attacks,  and  direot  them  to  conceal  them 
selves  at  certain  places;  signals  being  agreed  upon  in  advance 
and  the  hour  for  making  the  attack  being  designated,  I combing 
my  offensive  movement  with  theirs. 

If  the  effect  produced  by  an  ambush  depends  upon  the  sudder.  j 

ness  and  determination  with  which  the  attack  is  mad”,  its  succes  ; 

depends  on  two  indispensable  conditions — namely  a perfect  know  ( 
edge  of  the  enemy  and  of  the  ground.  In  fact,  to  surprise  a 
enemy  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  know  his  strength  and  th 
disposition  of  his  troops.  To  ambush  him,  it  is  not  only  necessar 
to  select  a suitable  place,  but  to  reach  it  without  being  di! 
covered  or  giving  the  least  suspicion  of  our  march.  Troops  goin 
to  form  an  ambush  should,  then,  march  compactly,  silently,  an 
by  the  most  concealed  roads. 

I cannot  forego  citing  here  an  example  of  an  ambush  upon  4 
large  scale.  In  1812  we  were  aproaching  Smolensk,  near  whic 
the  enemy  was  intrenched.  The  weather  was  superb.  The  bivouac  . 
of  our  army  were  upon  the  heights  commanding  the  city.  Th  ; 
Emperor  ordered  General  Morand.  so  justly  celebrated,  to  carr 
the  suburbs.  We  saw  this  intrepid  division  descend  into  j 
ravine,  turn  to  the  left  around  a hill,  and  close  up  and  forn 
unnoticed  by  the  enemy,  behind  a mill.  All  at  once,  as  thoug 


90 


SURPRISES  AND  AMBUSCADES 


by  enchantment,  this  division  was  hurled  upon  the  oity.  In  the 
twinkling  of  an  eye  suburbs,  artillery  outworks,  all  were  in  our 
possession.  Our  whole  army  clapped  their  hands.  Never  in  my 
life  have  I seen  a more  magnificent  spectacle,  nor  one  which 

left  upon  my  mind  a more  profound  impression  of  the  majesty 

of  war  and  of  the  power  of  genius  and  courage. 

The  spot  to  be  selected  for  an  ambush  depends,  more  or  less, 
upon  the  clearness  of  the  day  or  night.  When  concealed  by 
the  shades  of  night  or  by  fog,  no  other  curtain  is  needed,  but 

the  darkness  or  fog  should  be  impenetrable.  When  that  is  not 

the  case  you  will  have  to  make  use  of  woods,  walls,  or  a ravine 
to  conceal  your  movements  from  observation.  Always  calculate 
their  height  or  depth  so  as  to  prevent  the  visualray  from  the 
enemy  falling  upon  you  and  discovering  the  tops  of  your  head- 
dresses and  arms.  The  least  accident  of  that  kind  might  be- 
tray your  presence  and  lead  to  your  destruction.  Remember  the 
hare  which,  because  he  had  placed  his  head  in  a hole  and  could 
see  nothing,  believed  himself  unseen. 

Often  the  impatience  of  the  troops  discloses  the  place  of  an 
ambush.  Are  they  coming?  says  some  one,  and  some  curious 
fellow  advances  to  the  edge  of  the  wood,  or  raises  his  head  above 
the  wall,  or  speaks  in  a loud  tone.  From  that  moment  the  fruit  of 
your  labors  and  trouble  is  lost;  you  are  discovered  and  perhaps  ex- 
posed to  great  danger. 

Remember  that  troops  in  ambush  are  always  in  the  air,  in  a 
critical  position;  that  they  are  risking  everything  for  the  sake 
of  success.  A detachment  of  fifty  men,  which,  well  directed, 
might  have  thrown  into  confusion  a column  ten  times  its  strength 
and  made  a very  important  and  decisive  diversion  is,  if  dis- 
covered, lost. 

The  place  selected  for  an  ambush  should  always  be,  so  to 
i speak,  a fortification  to  be  closed  at  our  pleasure  on  the  side 
toward  the  enemy  and  open  on  the  line  of  retreat.  The  ground 
which  separates  it  from  the  enemy  should  be  favorable  for  move- 
ments at  the  gallop,  that  to  the  rear  well  reconnoitred,  and  cal- 
culated for  the  front  of  the  troops  in  case  of  a check. 

I am  speaking  here  of  ambuscades  composed  of  small  bodies, 
which  in  spite  of  all  precautions,  may  lead  to  more  serious  af- 
fairs than  were  expected.  As  to  those  composed  of  superior 
forces  they  have  to  look  out  for  only  one  thing — that  is,  to  see 
that  no  one  escapes. 

After  a success  they  have  time  to  decide  whether  to  advance 
or  retreat  by  such  or  such  a road,  all  being  egually  well  known. 

To  sum  up,  it  is  proper  to  arrange  ambuscades  for  the  pur- 
pose of  capturing  reconnoitring  parties,  attacking  columns  and 
convoys,  checking  an  advance-guard  displaying  too  much  boldness, 
cutting  off  and  destroying  a weak  rear-guard,  and  surprising  a 
bivouac  too  confident  of  its  security,  works  badly  placed  and 
poorly  guarded,  troops  faultily  disposed  and  placed  in  exposed 
situations  on  the  field  of  battle. 

Night  is  the  most  favorable  time  for  arranging  ambuscades,  but 
it  is  not  the  only  thing  that  favors  such  an  operation.  The 
weather  is  to  be  taken  into  consideration,  and  cold,  snow,  rain, 
or  a high  wind  would  be  of  great  assistance. 

11  0.  Why? 

A.  Because,  in  cold  weather,  the  men  whom  you  attack  are 
less  active,  not  so  well  prepared;  their  cloaks  are  almost  always 
folded  about  ttiem  and  render  their  hearing  less  acute;  the  rain 
; wets  their  priming  and  makes  their  arms  miss  fire.  A high  wind 
greatly  favors  a secret  march,  especially  if  it  comes  from  the 
direction  of  the  enemy,  because  it  prevents  the  tramping  of  the 
horses  being  heard.  In  attempting  a surprise  profit  by  these 


91 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


hints.  If  you  can  choose  your  route  turn  the  enemy  on  the  side 
opposite  to  the  wind.  In  attempting  to  surprise  infantry  choose 
rainy  weather.  If  making  a night  attack  wait  for  the  moment 
when,  the  reconnaissances  having  returned,  there  will  be  less  vigi- 
lance, and  the  command  is  generally  asleep. 

Q.  In  a night  surprise  of  a bivouac,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  As  a matter  of  precaution  in  such  an  attack  the  commander  ' 
should  wear,  and  make  his  men  wear,  something  by  which  they 
can  recognize  one  another,  such  as  a white  handkerchief  on  the 
left  arm,  a small  branch,  a shako  plume,  etc.;  this  sign  should  be 
visible  in  the  darkest  night.  By  taking  this  precaution,  all  the 
more  useful  if  the  enemy  wears  a dark  uniform  and  of  the  same 
cut  as  ours,  our  troops  will  avoid  sabring  one  another.  That  done 
the  chief  explains,  not  only  to  tbe  officers,  but  to  all  the  men, 
the  plan  of  attack,  and  designates  two  routes  of  retreat:  one 
by  the  road  leading  directly  from  the  enemy  to  our  army  on  which 
his  grand  guards  will  be  posted,  which  are  to  be  sabred  and  cap- 
tured in  passing;  the  other,  the  road  by  which  the  troops  have 
marched  to  their  present  position. 

In  addition,  he  agrees  upon  four  trumpet  signals,  the  shortest 
and  the  ones  to  which  the  men  are  the  most  accustomed. 

The  first  will  mean,  Sabre,  take  no  prisoners. 

The  second,  Make  prisoners. 

The  third,  Retire  by  the  direct  road. 

Fourth,  Retire  by  the  road  you  came  on. 

At  the  last  two  signals  the  signs  used  for  recognition  will 
disappear;  the  troops  will  retreat  quickly  and  assemble  at  the 
outlet  from  the  village. 

At  Atsh,  near  Comorn,  in  Hungary,  we  were  surprised  by  the 
insurgents.  The  sign  of  recognition  which  the  Hussars  had 
adopted  was  the  unfolded  white  cloak.  It  served  to  give  unity  to  ; 
their  attack  which  met  with  great  success.  But  when  we  got  into 
condition  for  fighting,  this  sign  was  fatal  to  those  who  showed 
it.  Their  troops  soon  perceived  this  and  lost  no  time  in  discard- 
ing it.  This  action  protected  their  retreat,  and  it  was  secured 
while  our  troops  were  fighting  among  themselves,  mistaking  one 
another  for  the  enemy. 

A night  surprise  may  be  more  or  less  hazardous;  by  this  I 
mean  that  which  is  undertaken  by  troops  not  supported  and  in- 
ferior in  numbers  to  those  attacked.  A surprise  has  always  one 
special  object,  that  of  terrifying  the  enemy,  destroying  him,  or  both  I . 
at  the  same  time.  If  the  surprise  is  effected  by  a small  party 
and  its  special  object  is  to  terrify  the  enemy,  it  should  use  its 
pistols,  and  its  attack  should  be  sudden.  The  men  should  shout, 
gallop  about,  make  no  prisoners,  and  retreat  rapidly. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  the  surprise  is  made  by  a large  force,  well  i, 
supported,  and  it  wishes  to  capture  the  enemy,  it  should  move 
silently,  manoeuvre,  seize,  in  regular  order  the  important  points 
such  as  the  barrack  or  lodging  of  the  colonel,  the  outlets  from 
the  village,  bivouac,  etc.,  and  carry  off  at  once  the  horses  and  i 
the  grand  guards.  If  killing  is  unavoidable,  let  it  be  done  with  i 
sabre  points. 

Q.  Which  is  the  best  side  on  which  to  surprise  a bivouao? 

A.  That  opposite  to  the  grand  guards. 

Q.  As  soon  as  the  attack  has  succeeded,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Make  the  disarmed  prisoners  file  out  quickly  on  their  I 

horses,  which  will  be  led  away  under  a good  escort  that  will,  j 

under  no  pretext,  wait  for  the  detachment,  but  regain  the  army  i 

as  soon  as  possible. 

Q.  If  the  attack  fails  and  we  have  to  retreat? 


92 


SURPRISES  AND  AMBUSCADES 


A.  Withdraw  the  detachment  quickly,  and  without  halting. 
Leave  the  best  mounted  men  for  a rear  guard  and  move  them  on 
a false  route  to  throw  off  the  right  track  those  who  may  follow. 
These  troopers  should  keep  up  a steady  fire  to  conceal  the  noise 
made  by  the  marching  of  the  detachment,  and  when  they  think 
that  their  ruse  has  succeeded,  and  that  those  they  are  covering 
are  out  of  danger,  they  will  make  a detour  and  rejoin  the  detach- 
ment. 

If  the  enemy's  bivouac  has  been  well  selected  and  entrance  to 
It  is  difficult,  special  means  for  surprising  it  will  have  to  be 
adopted.  The  principal  thing  to  be  done  is  to  get  the  enemy  on 
to  ground  less  favorable  to  him  than  that  which  he  occupies.  To 
do  that,  divide  your  force  into  two  parts  of  unequal  strength, 
place  the  stronger  in  concealment,  and  send  the  other  to  skirmish 
with  the  enemy’s  grand  guard;  if  this  succeeds  in  drawing  him 
out  of  his  bivouac  he  must  be  vigorously  charged  by  the  troops 
forming  the  ambuscade. 

A night  attack  may  have  a less  important  object  as,  for  instance, 
increasing  the  fatigue  of  the  enemy,  or  preventing  him  from 
sleeping.  In  this  case  but  few  men  are  needed,  as  the  operation 
will  be  limited  to  the  carrying  off  of  a few  vedettes  or  small 
posts,  and  discharging  pistols  along  the  line. 

Q.  If  the  enemy  should  undertake  to  surprise  you,  what  do 
you  do? 

A.  It  is  indispensable  for  an  officer  of  the  advance-guard,  who 
establishes  himself  in  a bivouac  and  fears  that  the  enemy  may 
attempt  to  surprise  him,  to  take  certain  precautions  at  the  very 
moment  of  installing  himself.  These,  named  below,  are  especially 
necessary  if  his  force  is  small  and  distant  from  supports. 

He  should  select  a sheltered  bivouac  fortified,  so  to  speak,  by 
a ditch,  fence,  barricades,  etc.,  so  as  not  to  be  approached  at 
a gallop,  or  attacked  unexpectedly.  Movable  barricades  should 
close  all  the  approaches  to  the  bivouac  which  are  not  naturally 
defended,  and  should  be  so  placed  as  not  to  be  discovered  or  car- 
ried away  by  the  enemy.  The  bivouac  should  be  as  much  con- 
sentrated as  possible. 

Orders  should  be  given  that,  in  case  of  an  attack,  the  men  are 
lot  to  run  to  their  horses,  but  defend  themselves  on  foot. 

Assign  to  each  man  the  post  he  is  to  take  at  the  sound  of 
Ihe  first  shot.  Put  out  the  fires,  or  light  them  in  a false  position. 
<eep  a part  of  the  horses  bridled,  and  many  of  the  men  awake, 
-et  every  trooper  have  his  bridle  on  his  arm,  his  cartridge-box  on 
lis  person,  and  his  carbine  in  his  hand. 

Q.  If  the  bivouac  is  in  a farm-house? 

A.  Close  it,  and,  the  instant  the  attack  begins,  make  a few 
if  the  men  bridle  the  horses  while  the  others  fire  through  the 
vindows,  until  the  defences  are  about  to  be  forced;  then  mount 
he  whole  command  and  execute  a combined  and  vigorous  sortie. 

Q.  Should  the  bivouac  be  in  an  open  plain  and  entirely 
inprotected? 

A.  So  arrange  matters  as  to  mount  and  assemble  in  the 
east  possible  time. 

Q.  Should  the  enemy  surprise  a few  isolated  men? 

A.  They  should  keep  cool,  not  run  to  their  horses,  but  grapple 
rith  the  enemy  hand  to  hand,  fire  on  him  at  point  blank  range, 
oint  him,  hamstring  his  horses,  stoop  down,  get  behind  obstacles, 
uch  as  a ditch,  a tree,  a post,  etc.,  and  make  no  prisoners, 
i dismounted  man  who  preserves  his  coolness  is  not  likely  to 
uffer  at  the  hands  of  a trooper  who  attacks  him  at  night. 

Night  surprises  are,  as  a general  thing,  more  terrifying  than 
angerous.  Eight  times  in  nine  their  success  depends  upon 
le  moral  effect  produced.  Meet  them  with  great  steadiness 


93 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


and  coolness.  Silence  and  steadiness  on  the  part  of  the  attacked 
often  terrify  the  attacker  so  that  the  tables  are  turned,  the  moral 
effect  reversed,  and  the  attacker  compelled  to  ingloriously  retreat. 

Q.  Are  surprises  as  dangerous  by  day  as  by  night? 

A.  Yes,  when  they  succeed,  for  the  attacker  makes  sure  of 
his  blows,  and  learns  the  weakness  of  the  attacked.  In  surprises 
of  every  kind  it  is  necessary,  above  all  things,  to  keep  cool. 

On  the  day  of  the  affair  at  Maeroslawetz,  in  the  Russian  cam- 
paign, almost  the  whole  of  the  Russian  cavalry  was  concealed 
on  the  flanks  of  our  column.  It  made  so  well  combined  an  attack 
upon  our  general  headquarters  that  even  the  Emperor  himself 
was  in  great  danger.  At  the  same  moment  Platoff,  with  his 
Cossacks  charged  upon  us  who  formed  tha  rear-guard.  From 
fifteen  hundred  to  two  thousand  Cossacks  surrounded  the  two 
feeble  squadrons  which  remained  to  us.  and  pressed  them  so 
closely  that  men  in  the  ranks  were  wounded  by  the  Cossack  lances. 
One  of  these  squadrons,  commanded  by  the  brave  Verdiers  (today  , 
a general  officer),  charged  lances  front  and  rear,  and  so  intimidated 
the  enemy  by  their  display  of  coolness  that  he  withdrew  without 
attacking.  We  held  our  position  against  the  enemy  ten  times 
our  strength,  whose  bold  manner  might  have  had  the  most  dis- 
astrous results  for  us  and,  perhaps  for  the  entire  army,  but  for  the 
calm  courage  of  our  chiefs  and  our  lancers. 

Q.  How  may  the  enemy  be  drawn  into  an  ambush? 

A.  By  occupying  his  attention  so  as  to  prevent  his  discovering 
it.  To  accomplish  that,  one  should  sometimes  have  his  most 
active  troopers  engage  him,  and  then  suddenly  retreat  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  cause  the  enemy  to  pursue.  In  this  way  he  might  be 
drawn  directly  into  the  ambush.  Again,  by  manoeuvring  slowly,', 
changing  front,  and  pushing  him,  he  might  be  driven  into  the 
trap  laid  for  him. 


THE  SUPPORT  OF  ARTILLERY 

Q.  Should  cavalry,  in  supporting  artillery,  be  placed  in  rear 
of  the  battery? 

A.  That  is  a mistake,  which  I have  seen  made  only  too  often, 
and  which,  so  far  as  I could  learn,  was  simply  due  to  following 
an  ancient  custom,  or  to  the  vanity  of  certain  officers  who  thought  - 
it  a meritorious  thing  to  seek  useless  dangers,  or  to  the  ignorance 
of  officers  who,  having  been  employed  in  this  way  only  once  or 
twice  in  their  lives,  had  no  idea  of  the  proper  method  of  perform- 
ing the  duty  assigned  them. 

Q.  Should  the  cavalry  be  posted  near  the  guns? 

A.  Another  mistake. 

Q.  Should  it  not  be  posted  where  the  enemy  can  see  it  and( 
thus  know  that  the  guns  are  supported? 

A.  Another  mistake,  as  censurable  as  the  other  two. 

Q.  Where  should  the  support  be  placed,  then? 

A.  Your  own  judgment  should  supply  the  answer  to  this 
question.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  artillery  support?  Is  il 
to  get  slaughtered  without  crossing  a sabre,  or  to  get  so  used  ur 
that  It  is  worthless  when  actually  needed?  Is  it  to  hampe 
the  movement  of  the  guns?  Is  it  to  encourage  the  enemy  to  chargi  < 
the  battery?  That  is  what  would  Infallibly  happen  if  you  shoulc* 
post  the  support  as  has  been  indicated. 

The  support  of  a battery,  if  placed  behind  it,  would  surely  bf  ■ 
destroyed  In  short  order  by  the  enemy’s  projectiles  directed  upor 
the  battery.  If  posted  too  near,  it  will  interfere  with  the  com 
munication  between  the  guns  and  their  caissons;  _ if  placed  ir 
full  view  of  the  enemy,  its  strength  will  be  easily  estimated 
counted  even,  especially  if  the  guns  are  in  an  exposed  position 


94 


THE  SUPPORT  OF  ARTILLERY 


and  then  be  attacked  and  overwhelmed  by  superior  numbers. 

The  supporting  troops  should  be  placed  on  the  flanks  of  the 
battery  to  avoid  the  enemy’s  shot  and  shell;  at  least  a hundred 
yards  distant,  so  as  to  obtain  its  full  power  of  impulsion  if  called 
on  to  resist  a charge  made  by  the  enemy;  and  so  concealed  as 
to  avoid  serving  as  a target,  and  to  keep  the  enemy  in  ignorance 
of  both  its  strength  and  position. 

Q.  But  if  placed  under  cover,  how  will  it  be  able  to  observe 
:he  enemy’s  movements? 

A.  The  commanding  officer  alone  should  place  himself  where 
Tie  can  observe  everything,  while  keeping  in  sight  of  his  troops. 
He  should  be  careful  to  so  place  himself  that  the  enemy  cannot 
oy  seeing  him,  judge  of  the  position  of  the  support. 

Q.  If  the  battery  is  charged,  what  is  to  be  done  by  the  support? 
A.  Let  the  charge  come  on,  and,  when  it  has  spent  its  force 
tnd  the  horses  are  disunited  and  blown,  as  they  naturally  will 
be,  charge  the  enemy  in  front  or  flank  at  full  speed  and  make 
svery  effort  to  repulse  him.  If  your  charge  succeeds,  do  not  pursue 
i:he  enemy  very  far,  but  halt  and  immediately  unmask  our  rescued 
i cattery,  so  that  it  may  pound  the  retreating  enemy. 

Q.  If  our  battery,  finding  its  position  too  much  exposed,  and 
:he  demonstrations  of  the  enemy  too  threatening,  begins  to 
etreat,  what  should  the  support  do? 

A.  If  the  retreat  is  to  be  for  a short  distance  only,  it  will 
ireserve  the  same  relative  position  to  the  battery  that  it  had  before. 

Q.  If  the  retreat  is  made  in  haste,  and  is  to  be  extended  to 
iiome  distance  before  the  battery  will  take  position  again? 

A.  Tne  supporting  troops  should  march  abreast  of  the  battery 
ind,  if  it  breaks  into  column,  act  as  rear-guard  to  it. 

Q.  If  in  executing  its  retreat,  the  battery  should  take  to  a 
causeway? 

A.  The  supporting  troops  unmask  the  rear  pieces,  place  them- 
elves  so  as  to  leave  the  road  free,  oppose  any  attacks  on  the 
lanks  and  keep  in  readiness  to  resist  attacks  from  the  front. 

Q.  Should  the  battery  be  attacked  by  very  superior  forces, 

hould  the  support  retreat? 

A.  No,  not  so  long  as  the  connoneers  remain  at  their  guns. 
Q.  If  the  cannoneers  are  killed  or  captured  and  the  enemy 
; eizes  the  pieces? 

1 A.  The  supporting  troops  must  charge  his  rear  guard,  harass 
im,  obstruct  his  retreat,  and,  finally,  employ  every  means  to 

: Stake  the  guns  or  force  them  on  to  ground  from  which  the 

nemy  himself  cannot  extricate  them. 

Q.  If  we  retake  the  guns? 

A.  Bring  them  back. 

Q.  If  you  cannot  bring  them  back? 

A.  Save  the  teams. 

Q.  If  the  cannoneers,  finding  it  impossible  to  save  the  pieces, 
ecide  to  spike  them,  or  simply  to  unhitch  the  teams  and  retreat? 

A.  The  supporting  troops  will  then  cover  the  retreat  of  the 
unners  and  the  teams. 

Q.  If  while  the  battery  is  retreating,  some  of  the  pieces  get 
luck  in  the  mud,  or  are  overturned,  so  that  the  gunners  alone 
; innot  right  them  or  move  them  along? 

A.  The  most  active  men  of  the  support  will  dismount  at  cnce, 
ive  their  horses  to  other  men,  and  assist  the  gunners. 

]Q.  If  the  enemy  should  seize  this  moment  for  making  an 
Hack? 

A.  The  troopers  remount  and  face  the  enemy. 

Q.  If  a battery  in  position  loses  so  many  men  that  it  is 
table  to  continue  its  fire  and  asks  for  assistance  from  the  support? 
A.  The  men  will  be  furnished  at  once  from  the  nearest  platoon, 
id  the  commander  of  the  support  be  notified. 

Q.  Sometimes  a ruse  is  employed  against  great  masses  of 


95 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


- 

1 


cavalry  united  for  a charge,  which  consists  in  moving  forward  ; 
battery  whose  offensive  movement  is  concealed  by  a squadroi 
placed  in  front  of  it;  what  is  the  duty  of  the  commander  o 
this  squadron? 

A.  During  the  advance,  to  keep  his  squadron  in  front  of  thi 
guns,  so  as  to  conceal  them  from  the  enemy;  then,  when  th> 
guns  are  in  battery  and  loaded,  the  matches  lighted,  and  every 
thing  ready  for  firing,  to  unmask  the  battery  by  a movement  b 
platoons  to  the  right  or  left,  at  a gallop,  and  join  the  support 

The  support  should  always  act  so  as  to  deserve  the  entire  con 
fidence  of  the  artillerymen,  who  will  then  work  their  guns  witl  { 
greater  coolness  and  accuracy,  and  keep  up  their  firing  for  1 1, 
longer  time. 

The  support  will  have  to  be  still  more  watchful  when  supportini 
guns  of  the  new  model  than  when  protecting  those  of  the  ole 
pattern. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because,  as  the  old  guns  were  withdrawn  by  the  pro 

longe,  they  could  be  fought  to  the  last  moment  and  fire  grape  am 
canister  a long  time  without  changing  position,  while  the  nev 
ones  require  to  be  limbered  up  before  retreating,  and  the  artillery 
men  should  not  be  expected  to  delay  the  execution  of  this  ma 
noeuvre  until  the  enemy’s  cavalry  begins  sabring  them.  For  thi 
same  reasons  the  new  pieces  require  more  attention  when  re 
treating,  than  the  old  ones  do. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because,  with  the  old-model  gun,  if  one  wheel  horse  i 

killed  and  the  rear  traces  cut,  the  piece  may  still  continue  it 

retreat,  drawn  by  the  whiffletree,  while  with  the  new  piece 

the  six  horses  pull  on  the  same  four  traces,  and  if  one  of  then 
is  cut  or  broken,  the  gun  is  unhitched.  Should  such  an  acciden 
happen,  the  supports  should  hasten  to  assist  in  repairing  the  dam 
age,  and  place  their  horses  and  forage  ropes  at  the  disposal  o 

the  battery. 


PARTISANS. 

Q.  What  is  a partisan? 

A.  A detachment  is  on  partisan  service  when  it  operate 
separately  and  apart  from  the  army,  and  under  the  instruction 
of  its  own  chief  which  are  based  on  orders  given  only  in  gen 
eral  terms  and  on  information  in  regard  to  the  general  movement 
of  the  whole  army. 

A partisan  is  sent  to  stir  up  a province:  to  annoy  the  flank 
or  rear  of  a hostile  army;  to  capture  or  destroy  depots  or  convoys 
etc.;  to  make  prisoners  and  throw  the  enemy  off  the  scent  ii 
regard  to  the  movement  of  our  own  troops;  etc. 

Q.  What  should  be  the  first  care  of  an  officer  ordered  o 
partisan  service? 

A.  To  see  that  the  detachment  he  commands  is  composed  o 
bold  and  well-mounted  men. 

Q.  And  the  second? 

A.  To  receive  from  his  general  an  accurate  map  of  the  countr 
in  which  he  is  to  operate,  as  correct  information  as  possibl 
in  regard  to  the  position  of  the  enemy  and  of  his  probable  ir  ' 
tentions,  and  to  learn  the  present  and  future  movements  of  ou 
own  army. 

Q.  Why  this  last  information,  since  he  is  to  act  separately 

A.  So  as  to  know  where  to  send  his  reports,  and  where  t 
fall  back  upon  supports  in  case  of  an  emergency  compelling 
retreat. 


96 


PARTISANS 


Partisan  warfare  is  very  hazardous.  It  can  be  successfully 
executed  only  by  a chief  who  is  shrewd,  quick  and  bold,  sup- 
ported by  troops  like  himself.  For  the  partisan  there  is  no  repose; 
he  must  always  have  his  eyes  open,  and,  if  fatigue  compels  him 
to  slumber  for  an  instant,  an  advance-line  of  spies  should  guard 
him  and  warn  him  of  danger. 

The  warfare  he  carries  on  is  that  of  a corsair.  His  strength 
lies  in  surprise.  The  vulture  which,  unperceived,  swoops  down 
upon  its  prey,  captures  it,  and  disappears,  is  the  image  of  the 
partisan.  Therefore  the  blows  he  delivers  should  be  decided, 

prompt,  terrible  even,  if  necessary,  and  no  trace  of  his  retreat 
should  be  left  behind. 

The  partisan  resorts  to  every  possible  stratagem.  One  will 

arrange  his  attack  so  well,  and  cast  his  net  so  accurately  over 
the  hostile  detachment  vfhich  he  surprises,  that  not  a single  per- 
son shall  escape  to  give  the  alarm.  Another,  in  a hostile 

country,  works  with  the  enemy,  levies  contributions  of  horses 
and  cloth  in  his  name,  and  remounts  and  clothes  his  men 
at  the  expense  of  the  King  of  Prussia.  Another  strips  his  pris- 
oners, puts  their  uniform  on  his  own  men,  and  enters  the  enemy's 
bivouacs,  taking  advantage  of  the  deception  to  surprise  them  and 
but  them  to  pieces.  Another,  twenty  leagues  in  rear  of  the 

Russian  army,  rescues  our  captured  men,  mounts  them  on  the 

horses  of  the  escort,  and  thus  doubles  his  strength.  Another 

captures  a park  of  artillery.  The  enemy  Informed  of  the  fact, 
icomes  up  two  hours  later,  and  while  he  is  viewing  the  smoking 
remains  of  his  exploded  caissons,  the  partisan  is  striking  another 
'equally  destructive  blow  three  leagues  In  his  rear.  The  enemy, 
ignorant  of  the  numerical  strength  of  the  bold  detachment,  halts, 
takes  up  a position,  draws  In  the  troops  which  might  have  been 

of  great  assistance  to  his  army,  and  ours  profit  by  these  de- 

lays. Another,  like  the  brave  and  Illustrious  Pole,  Umlnski,  at 
(the  head  of  a few  squadrons,  incites  a province  to  insurrection, 
creates  a powerful  diversion,  and,  after  several  victories,  when 
forced  to  retreat,  returns  to  the  national  army  with  his  foroes 
ncreased  threefold. 

The  partisan,  by  his  isolation,  by  his  freedom  from  all  obliga- 
' lion  to  march  immediately  In  such  or  such  a direction,  or  to  re- 
turn to  any  certain  place,  is  free  from  all  constraint;  he  is  master 
of  all  the  ground  within  range  of  his  vision;  he  should  observe 

It  with  unusual  intelligence,  and  should  form  his  opinion  not  so 
nuch  from  his  own  point  of  view  as  from  that  of  the  enemy, 
hus,  he  should  observe  the  heights,  the  depths  and  the  curtains  in 
•eference  to  this  point  of  view,  and  always  place  himself  so  as  to 
nrevent,  by  means  of  these  curtains,  the  enemy’s  observation  of 
i is  command. 

If  he  descends  by  a certain  oath,  the  hill  on  his  right  will 
lonoeal  the  movement.  If  he  crosses  a plain  in  a certain  di- 
rection, the  little  wood  visible  on  his  left  will  mask  his  march 

I or  ten  minutes,  and  that  time  will  be  sufficient  for  him  to 
lain  the  ravine  in  iwhich  he  will  be  able  to  lie  in  ambush. 

As  the  partisan  always  acts  by  surprising  the  enemy,  the  of- 
ensive  positions  he  takes  will  always  be  ambuscades.  The  nearer 
.0  the  point  of  attack,  the  better  they  are;  but  this  nearness 
ihould  always  be  calculated  with  reference  to  the  greater  or  less 
onfidence  and  watchfulness  of  the  enemy. 

The  partisan,  after  having  boldly  oaptured  a convoy,  begins 
lis  retreat.  This  should  be  made  promptly,  for  the  enemy  may 
ie  informed  and  send  superior  forces  in  pursuit.  He  should 
ompare  the  importance  and  possibility  of  preserving  the  prize 

»te  has  oaptured  with  that  of  the  attack  he  may  have  to  resist 
nd  the  speed  with  which  his  retreat  must  be  made.  The  rapid 


97 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


comparison  would  determine  him  to  destroy  everything  which  might 
injuriously  delay  him,  and  he  retires,  not  on  the  road  by  which 
he  came,  but  by  one  which  will  shorten  the  distance  to  a place 
of  safety.  The  undulations  of  the  ground,  the  woods,  ravines, 
all  mask  his  retreat,  and  he  halts  only  after  several  hours'  march,  i 
knowing  that  the  enemy’s  pursuit  will  not  extend  beyond  a cer-  i 
tain  distanoe;  that  the  more  prolonged,  the  weaker  and  less 
dangerous  it  is;  especially  if  the  retreating  force  leads  it  over 
a difficult  and  broken  country,  favorable  to  the  formation  of  am- 
buscades. 

If,  however,  the  pursuing  enemy  appears  at  some  distance 
and  threatens  to  attaok  openly  and  vigorously,  the  partisan  does 
not  hesitate  to  throw  him  off  the  track.  He  moves  the  convoy 
out  quietly,  under  the  officer  whom  he  orders  to  march  rapidly 

and,  in  case  of  attack,  to  abandon  everything  he  thinks  it  im-  i 

possible  to  save.  Then  he  moves  to  the  right  or  left  with  the  I 

main  body  of  his  troops,  and  draws  in  that  direction  the  pur- 
suing enemy,  wtio  is  thus  deceived  and  led  away  from  his  proper 
objective. 

A partisan  wearied  by  long  exertion  and  in  need  of  recupera- 
tion should  either  gain  one  of  our  posts  in  rear  of  the  enemy 

and  which  is  not  blockaded  by  him,  or  else  throw  himself  entirely 
off  the  enemy's  lines  of  operations.  As  a rule,  these  lines  Ir 
rear  of  his  position  are  limited  to  a few  roads  guarded  by  detach-  - 
ments  rejoining  the  army,  and  are  scouted  to  a very  short  dis- 
tance only. 

The  partisan  need  go,  then,  but  a few  leagues  to  reach  a plact 
of  safety.  Nevertheless,  to  render  this  safety  more  complete  hi 
frequently  changes  his  position. 

If  the  partisan  has  sick  or  wounded  men,  he  takes  them  witf 
him  and  bestows  the  greatest  care  upon  them.  If  they  cannot  bi 
transported  with  the  command  without  delaying  the  speed  of  hi; 
marches,  he  should  leave  them  in  a village,  placing  them  In  the 
care  of  the  principal  people,  who  will  be  held  personally  respon 
sible  for  their  treatment. 

If  prisoners  have  been  made,  in  order  not  to  weaken  himsel  - 
they  will  be  sent  into  a friendly  country,  and  confided  to  the 
care  of  the  rural  guards,  who  will  deliver  them,  by  roundabou 
ways,  to  our  army. 

If  the  partisan  has  captured  guns  and  does  not  feel  perfectly 
sure  of  reaching  our  army  with  them,  he  should  bury  them  se 
cretly,  and  out  of  sight  of  his  prisoners,  in  some  unfrequenter 
wood,  and  mark  the  place  where  they  have  been  buried.  After 
wards  he  takes  along  with  him  the  limbers  and  destroys  them  a 
a point  some  leagues  distant,  so  that  the  spot  where  the  gun  ) 
have  been  concealed  may  be  certain  to  remain  unknown. 

General  Rule — The  partisan  having  to  be,  above  all  things 
as  active  as  possible,  he  must  keep  nothing  with  him  whicl  - 
might  delay  or  burden  his  command. 


LED  HORSES.  SUTLERS 

Q.  What  Is  understood  by  "led  horses?” 

A.  The  extra  horses  of  officers,  or  horses  of  the  regimen 
without  riders,  which  are  led  by  men  detailed  for  the  purpose 
Q.  In  war  where  do  they  march? 

A.  With  the  regiment  and  where  they  will  be  secure  from  at 
tack  by  the  enemy.  When  a regiment  is  acting  alone,  its  led  horse 
follow  it;  if  it  is  acting  as  rear  guard,  the  led  horses  precede  It 


98 


LED  HORSES-SUTLERS 


if  the  regiment  is  likely  to  be  attacked  in  front  and  rear,  the 
led  horses  are  placed  in  the  oentre  of  the  column. 

Q.  If  the  regiment  is  brigaded? 

A.  its  led  horses  are  united  with  those  of  the  other  regiments, 
and  all  march  wherever  the  commanding  general  may  direct. 

Q.  And  during  a fight? 

A.  The  led  horses  are  kept  in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  out 
of  range  of  the  enemy’s  fire,  and  frequently  close  to  the  field 
hospitals. 

Q.  Are  the  led  horses  of  a regiment  placed  under  command  of 
any  one? 

A.  Yes;  they  should  be  commanded  by  a non-commissioned 
officer,  and  sometimes,  when  danger  is  feared,  by  an  officer,  even. 

Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  commander? 

A.  To  assemble  them  properly  and  make  them  keep  together. 
When  resting,  to  choose  the  most  favorable  and  least  exposed 
place  for  the  halt;  to  reconnoitre  the  vicinity,  and  never  to  get 
so  far  separated  from  the  regiment  as  to  lose  it  or  fail  to  join 
it  in  bivouac  during  the  evening. 

Q.  Should  the  led  horses  be  required  to  join  the  regiment 
every  day? 

A.  Yes;  except  in  case  of  imminent  danger,  or  orders  given 
to  the  contrary. 

Q.  How  often  should  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  led  horses 
be  relieved? 

A.  His  tour  should  be  for  only  twenty-four  hours,  but  he 
is  not  to  relinquish  it  until  regularly  relieved. 

Sometimes,  In  order  to  retain  the  valuable  services  of  a non- 
commissioned officer  in  the  ranks,  the  care  of  the  led  horses 
is  intrusted  to  a sick  or  slightly  wounded  one.  This  important 
duty  must  not,  however,  be  confided  to  anyone  not  perfectly  able  to 
perform  it.  To  command  the  led  horses  requires  gentleness,  intel- 
ligence and  great  firmness.  The  intelligence  is  demanded  In  the 
selection  of  the  most  favorable  positions,  as  regards  safety  and 
comfort,  and  in  judging  the  characters  of  the  men  of  the  command. 
Gentleness  will  remove  all  pretext  for  the  dissatisfied  servants 
saving  the  command,  marching  by  themselves,  and  even  deserting 
sometimes.  Firmness  will  regulate  the  conduct  of  the  marches 
md  halts. 

If  the  oommander  of  the  led  horses  should  lose  sight  of  the 
'egiment  on  the  day  of  a battle,  he  should  keep  himself  informed 
hrough  the  men  returning  from  the  battlefield,  of  the  movements 
t has  made,  and  according  to  what  he  learns,  move  closer  to 
ir  retire  farther  from  the  place  it  is  said  to  occupy. 

In  selecting  a place  for  the  led  horses  he  must  always  bear  in 
nind  the  necessity  for  having  them  where  they  may  be  easily 
ound.  Therefore  he  must  never  select  a position  which  it  would 
>6  impossible,  or  even  require  much  time,  to  find. 

He  must  also  see  that  the  men  give  the  horses  an  opportunity 
o feed,  and  that  they  do  not  leave  them.  If  foraging  parties 

!re  sent  out,  he  must  require  at  least  half  of  the  men  to  remain 
rith  the  horses  and  be  responsible  for  their  safety.  Sometimes 
e should  also  accompany  the  foragers  to  prevent  their  pillaging, 
letting  drunk,  or  overloading  the  horses  taken  out  for  the  purpose 
if  carrying  back  the  forage. 

After  the  horses  have  eaten,  or  when  he  fears  a surprise,  he 
nust  have  the  horses  bridled,  and  have  the  men  hold  the  reins 
n their  arms. 

He  must  also  see  that  the  forage  and  provisions  obtained  at 
he  halt  are  not  wasted,  and  that  they  are  so  managed  that  a 
ortion  may  be  taken  to  the  bivouac  of  the  regiment  for  the 
orses  which  have  been  ridden  and  for  their  riders.  He  must 
ave  the  horses  watered  on  arriving  at  a stream  or  well,  and 
ave  the  wounds  of  those  needing  special  care  dressed.  On  return- 


99 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


ing  to  the  regiment  he  must  make  his  report  to  the  chief  of  his 
corps. 

Q.  When  a man  is  dismounted,  where  should  he  go  with  his 
arms  and  equipment? 

A.  To  the  led  horses,  which  becomes  the  general  rendezvous 
of  men  separated  from  their  commands. 

Q.  And  when  a horse  is  to  be  sent  to  a sub-depot? 

A.  He  should  be  sent  to  join  the  led  horses,  if  there  should 
be  found  among  them  a sound  man  and  a horse  in  good  condition, 
the  two  should  be  sent  to  join  the  regiment.  In  like  manner,  a 
horse  unfit  for  active  service  should  be  given  to  some  wounded 
man  who  is  going  to  the  rear. 

Q.  How  could  there  be,  among  the  led  horses,  a troop  horse 
in  serviceable  condition. 

A.  Because  all  captured  horses,  and  those  whose  riders  have 
beoome  disabled,  are  sent  there  for  the  use  of  dismounted  men. 

Q.  If  you  should  have  some  brave  officers  and  non-commissioned 
offioers  or  troopers  who,  slightly  wounded,  are  unable  to  continue 
on  duty  at  the  outposts,  but  who  would  be  made  strong  and 
active  again  by  a few  days’  rest. 

A.  Let  them  march  with  the  led  horses,  and,  as  soon  as  they 
are  fit  for  duty  again,  recall  them  to  the  regiment. 

Q.  If  men  perfeotly  fit  for  duty  come  to  the  led  horses? 

A.  They  must  be  sent  back  to  their  squadrons  immediately,  j 

Q.  Where  do  the  sutlers  march? 

A.  Their  intelligence,  their  prospects  of  gain,  enable  them  tc 
easily  choose  the  place  most  suitable  for  the  sale  of  the  thing; 
they  carry.  Nevertheless,  custom  has  established  certain  rule; 
for  their  government,  which  it  is  necessary  to  know.  The  sutlers 
having  wagons  should  march  with  the  led  horses.  Those  who  arc 
mounted  should  march  nearer  the  regiment;  that  is  to  say,  al 
some  point  between  it  and  the  led  horses. 

A sutler  must  sell  to  others  only  when  the  regiment  to  which  h< 
is  attaohed  has  no  need  of  anything.  He  must  not  leave  hi; 
proper  place  except  for  the  time  required  to  purohase  supplies 
for  the  regiment. 

A sutler  should  be  required  to  always  carry  with  him  a pack 
age  of  linen  and  lint  for  use  in  case  of  need  in  first  aid  tc 
the  iwounded.  Should  the  supply  oarried  by  the  surgeons  becomi 
exhausted,  this  would  be  found  to  be  very  acceptable. 

The  sutler  should  not  be  allowed  to  take  advantage  of  thi 
scarcity  of  supplies  to  sell  his  goods  to  the  regiment  at  exorbi 
tant  prices.  His  profits  should  be  large  to  compensate  him  fo 
his  labor,  but  must  not  be  excessive. 

A good  sutler  is  a valuable  addition  to  a regiment,  and,  there 
fore,  he  should  receive  protection  and  assistance.  On  arrivim 
in  camps  or  oantonments  the  sutlers  should  not  only  be  purveyors 
but  act  as  laundrymen  also.  Any  sutler  found  pillaging  should  b 
immediately  delivered  up  for  punishment. 

Sometimes  troopers  detailed  for  the  escort  of  general  officer 
are  taken  from  this  duty  by  the  officers  or  employees  of  th 
headquarters  and  forcibly  transformed  into  servants  for  thes 
gentlemen.  Whenever  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  find 
a man  of  his  regiment  in  charge  of  led  horses  not  belongin  i 
to  his  command,  he  will  question  him,  and  if  he  discovers  a 
abuse  of  authority,  he  will,  in  the  absence  of  written  orders  c 
the  general  commanding,  have  the  horses  turned  loose,  and  sen 
the  man  to  join  his  regiment. 


100 


REAR  GUARDS 


REAR  GUARDS. 

|'  Q.  What  is  a rear-guard? 

A.  Troops  detached  to  protect  the  rear  of  a command  while 
i marching. 

Q.  To  whom  should  the  command  of  a rear  guard  be  intrusted? 
A.  To  an  officer  who  inspires  the  troops  with  perfect  con- 
fidence by  the  coolness  of  his  judgment,  the  boldness  and  intre- 
pidity of  his  actions. 

Q.  Why? 

A.  Because  he  will  have  to  deal  with  an  enemy  whose  audac- 
ity will  be  doubled  by  the  fact  of  our  retreating. 

Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  this  officer? 

A.  To  delay  the  approach  of  the  enemy  by  every  possible  means, 
and  to  perish  rather  than  permit  him  to  attack  the  force  he  is 
charged  with  protecting. 

I At  the  Beresina,  an  officer  of  the  rear-guard,  crushed  by  the 
Russian  fire,  was  losing  all  his  men.  In  vain  had  he  called  upon 
Ney  for  reinforcements.  Not  understanding  the  oause  of  Ney's 
silence,  he  ran  to  him.  “Of  the  five  hundred  men  I had  two  hours 
ago,  four  hundred  are  already  dead"  he  said,  excitedly.  “The 
Trappists  do  not  leave  the  sides  of  their  graves,  and  when  one 
of  them  says  ‘Brother,  we  must  die’,  the  other  repeats,  ‘Brother, 
die  we  must'!"  The  officer  returned  to  his  post,  under  a hail  of 
shot.  He  had  just  resumed  it,  saying  to  himself,  with  grim 
humor,  “Brother,  we  must  die",  when  a terrible  voice — that  of 
Ney — responded,  “Die  we  must!”  The  marshall  remained  a long 
time  with  the  rear-guard,  encouraging  it  by  his  heroic  example. 
It  was  written  that  he  should  perish  by  the  hands  of  assassins. 
Q.  Is  there  need  of  a rear-guard  when  the  command  is  ad- 
. vancing? 

A.  Yes. 

Q.  For  what  purpose? 

A.  To  collect  and  drive  forward  the  stragglers,  and  protect 
the  column  from  any  enemy  who  may  have  got  in  rear  of  it;  to 
guard  important  defiles  which  there  is  reason  to  fear  might  fall 
into  the  power  of  the  enemy;  to  look  out  for  ambusoades  which 
may  have  been  passed  unperceived  by  the  main  body;  to  scout 
the  flanks  In  rear  of  the  marching  column,  and,  sometimes,  to 
connect  an  advanced  body  with  its  supports. 

Q.  What  should  the  rear-guard  do  when  the  troops  to  which 
i It  belongs  are  attacked  and  form  line? 

A.  Unless  there  are  orders  to  the  contrary,  it  should  join 

them  immediately  and  take  its  place  in  the  line  of  battle.  If, 

however,  it  should  discover  the  enemy  executing  a flank  move- 

ment and  threatening  the  rear  or  one  wing  of  the  command,  it 
should  move  rapidly  to  meet  the  enemy,  send  notice  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  detachment,  and  immediately  open  fire. 

Q.  If  the  enemy  endeavors  to  seize  a defile  which  the  de- 

taohment  must  repass,  what  does  the  rear-guard  do? 

A.  Sends  warning  to  the  detachment  commander,  and  moves 
cn  rapidly  to  defend  the  defile. 

Q.  Should  it  march  far  in  rear  of  the  column? 

A.  The  distance  to  be  preserved  between  it  and  the  column 
depends  mainly  on  the  orders  received;  if  they  are  not  very  pre- 
:ise  upon  this  point,  it  should  keep  to  a greater  distance  in  an 
jpen  country  than  in  a close  one,  but  always  so  as  to  see,  or  at 
least  be  in  easy  communication  with  the  detachment  and 
’either  lose  its  trace  nor  be  separated  from  it  by  the  enemy. 

0-  If.  in  spite  of  these  precautions,  such  a separation  should 
incur,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  If  the  enemy  is  not  too  strong,  break  through  his  line  and 
101 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


rejoin  the  detachment.  If  this  is  believed  to  be  impossible,  be- 
gin skirmishing  at  once  with  the  enemy  occupying  the  road,  to 
distract  his  attention  and  threaten  him  with  serious  attacks. 

Q.  If  the  enemy  sends  superior  forces  against  the  rear-guard? 

A.  It  must  retire  at  the  gait  employed  in  attacking;  halt  if  j 
the  enemy  halts;  follow  him  if  he  retires,  and  harass  him  con- 
tinually;  should  the  detachment  make  a gap  in  his  line,  ma- 
noeuvre so  as  to  assist  the  movement,  and  then  rejoin  as  quickly 
as  possible.  V- 

Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  rear-guard  in  a retrograde  move- 
ment? 

A.  To  protect  and  support  the  retreat. 

Q.  In  that  case,  how  does  the  rear-guard  march? 

A.  At  a distance  always  proportioned  to  the  more  or  less  open 
nature  of  the  country,  but  always  at  the  gait  employed  by  the 
column,  so  as  to  run  no  risk  of  being  separated  from  it,  or  dis- 
turbing it  by  causing  fears  for  the  rear-guard,  and  also  In  suoh 
a manner  as  to  discover  and  repel,  if  possible,  all  attacks  threaten- 
ing the  detachment. 

Q.  What  formation  does  it  keep? 

A.  That  which  is  considered  the  best  to  prevent  It  from 
being  broken  through.  If  it  Is  followed  timidly,  in  an  open 
country,  it  preserves  its  line  of  skirmishers,  which  is  extended  or 
contracted,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground  and  the  de- 
monstrations of  the  enemy;  but  always  estimating  clearly  the 
reality  and  importance  of  these  demonstrations,  and  so  controlling 
affairs  as  to  be  able  to  concentrate  the  whole  force  quickly.  If 
it  Is  forced  vigorously  on  to  a certain  road,  it  leaves  in  rear  only 
a few  skirmishers  taken  from  among  the  bravest  and  best  mounted 
men.  and  makes  the  poorly  mounted  men,  who  could  only  embar- 
rass and  delay  it  move  on  in  advance;  then,  supposing  it  Is  a squad- 
ron, it  spaces  its  platoons  on  the  road  at  a distance  of  a hundred 
paces  from  each  other.  The  platoons  will  retire  thus:  they  regu- 
late on  one  another  and  face  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  tak- 
ing care  to  support  their  right  flank  on  the  ditch,  so  as  to  leave 
on  their  left  an  open  space  through  which  the  skirmishers,  when 
charged,  may  pass  without  breaking  them.  If  the  first  platoon  is 
repulsed  It  retreats  to  re-form  in  the  rear,  the  second  stands 
fast,  charges  the  enemy,  and  halts  him  for  a few  moments;  if 
it  cannot  hold  on,  it  retreats  and  moves  to  the  rear  of  the 
first  to  re-form.  The  third  charges,  in  its  turn;  and  so  on  with 
the  fourth,  first  and  second. 

Q.  If  the  road  is  not  as  wide  as  the  front  of  a platoon? 

A.  The  platoons  are  formed  in  columns  of  sections,  by  fours. 

0-  If  the  enemy  has  artillery,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Post  the  greatest  possible  number  of  men  on  the  flank  of 
the  road,  and  make  every  effort  to  prevent  Its  being  abandoned. 
Hold  fast  to  every  turn  of  the  road,  to  all  the  obstacles,  to  all 
the  different  heights  which  will  give  protection  against  artillery 
fire  by  preventing  accurate  aiming  and  raking  the  road  directly. 
Threaten  the  pieces  sometimes,  and  try  to  form  ambuscades  if 
it  Is  believed  that  they  will  meet  with  success. 

Q.  If,  while  retreating,  a wood  should  be  encountered? 

A.  Make  a great  display  of  holding  it,  in  order  to  deoeive  the 
enemy  In  regard  to  the  forces  occupying  it.  If  the  enemy  halts, 
advance  on  him,  and  take  advantage  of  his  indecision  to  gain  as 
much  time  as  possible;  warning  the  column,  however,  of  the  halt 
made  and  reporting  the  dispositions  of  the  enemy,  and  taking  the 
necessary  precautions  to  prevent  being  cut  off  by  him.  If  the 
detachment  does  not  consider  it  advisable  to  halt,  the  rear-guard 
is  advised  of  the  fact,  and  acts  accordingly.  If  it  takes  a dif- 


102 


REAR  GUARDS 


ferent  road,  a non-commissioned  officer  is  left  at  the  point  where 
it  turns  off,  to  direct  the  march  of  the  rear-guard. 

Q.  If  a village  be  met  with? 

A.  The  rear-guard  aots  in  a similar  manner,  and  profits  by 
the  halt  to  barricade  it  with  beams,  carts  with  the  wheels  taken 
off,  etc.  To  do  that,  it  masks  its  movements  by  a single  platoon 
which  occupies  the  road  while  the  others  pass  to  the  rear  of  the 
barricade,  in  which  only  a small  opening  is  left,  for  the  successive 
retreat,  in  single  file,  of  the  troopers  of  the  last  platoon  of  the 
rear-guiard,  as  soon  as  it  is  threatened  with  a charge.  If  a 
oharge  should  be  made,  it  is  awaited  at  the  barricade,  and  received 
with  a discharge  of  carbines  and  pistols. 

Q.  In  building  barricades,  what  precaution  should  be  taken? 

A.  That  they  are  so  placed  as  not  to  be  easily  turned;  for 
if  they  can  be  turned,  they  will  be  more  dangerous  than  useful 
to  us. 

Q.  If  a bridge  is  encountered? 

A.  Pass  over  rapidly,  and  make  a stand  In  rear  of  it.  If 
built  of  wood  so  that  it  can  be  easily  destroyed,  proteot  with 
skirmishers  those  engaged  in  its  destruction? 

Q.  How  may  a wooden  bridge  be  destroyed? 

A.  By  tearing  up  the  floor  and  throwing  the  joists  on  your 
r bank  of  the  river,  or  by  burning  it.  To  burn  it,  straw  and  fagots 
should  be  placed  under  it;  if  possible,  tar  should  first  be  poured 
over  it.  This  operation  is,  however,  always  a slow  one. 

Q.  Should  it  encounter  a ford  which  it  is  desirable  to  destroy? 

A.  If  near  a village,  try  to  collect  a number  of  harrows  and 
throw  them,  teeth  up,  into  the  ford.  Break  bottles  in  the  bottom 
of  the  ford,  or  throw  trees  across  the  stream,  the  tops  towards 
the  enemy.  If  the  ford  cannot  be  destroyed,  barricade  it  like  a 
defile.  If  the  enemy  attempts  to  force  a crossing,  make  a feint 
of  retreating,  so  as  to  let  him  enter  the  ford,  and  when  the  head 
of  his  column  has  passed  you,  oharge  It  vigorously,  and  hurl  It 
Sack  into  the  river. 

Q.  If  the  river  is  not  fordable? 

A.  It  is  passed  as  desoribed  in  the  ohapter  on  Detachments. 

Q.  If  one  crosses  it  in  a ferry  or  in  boats? 

A.  One  does  as  described  in  the  same  chapter,  only  the  boats 
ire  sunk  after  having  been  used. 

An  officer  of  the  rear-guard  should  have  under  his  command 
lone  but  serviceable  horses  and  active  men,  because  his  march 
ihould  not  be  delayed  by  the  weakness  of  individuals.  There- 
ore,  if  he  finds  in  his  detachment  any  unserviceable  horses,  he 
hould  relieve  himself  of  them  at  the  first  opportunity,  by  sending 
hem  to  the  main  body. 

Q.  In  general,  then,  what  are  the  duties  of  the  commander 
f the  rear-guard? 

A.  To  delay  the  enemy’s  march  by  every  means  suggested  to 
ilm  by  his  intelligence;  to  prevent  the  enemy's  estimating  the 
trength  and  composition  of  our  columns,  as  well  as  the  idea 
rhich  governs  their  movements;  to  moderate  the  gait  of  his  horses 

0 as  to  avoid  distressing  them,  and  to  bring  back  all  his  men; 
ot  to  allow  himself  to  be  cut  off  from  the  main  body,  and  to 
eep  in  constant  communication  with  it;  to  support  vigorously 
hose  of  his  men  who  have  dismounted  for  the  performance  of 
ny  duty  and  never  to  allow  himself  to  be  driven  back  on  a defile 
hich  cannot  be  passed  without  suffering  severe  loss. 

Q.  Do  rear-guards  march  the  same  at  night  as  in  the  daytime? 

A.  At  night  they  draw  nearer  to  the  column,  especially  when 
le  night  is  dark,  the  enemy  near,  and  the  inhabitants  hostile 
')  us. 

Q.  And  if  they  fear  losing  the  trace  of  the  column? 

A.  Some  troopers  are  placed  between  them  and  the  column 

1 connecting  files. 


103 


THE  CAVALRYMAN’S  HAND-BOOK 


Q.  The  troops  protected  by  the  rear-guard  having  halted  to  go 
into  bivouac,  what  should  the  rearguard  do? 

A.  It  takes  position  wherever  it  may  be  at  the  time,  but  the 
detaohment  causes  it  to  be  relieved  promptly,  for  generally  it  ii 
so  much  fatigued  as  to  require  perfect  rest.  It  enters  bivouao 
and  the  men  are  sent  to  join  their  several  squadrons. 

The  duties  of  the  rear  guard  may  be  summed  up  in  these  three 
words,  which  should  form  its  device:  vigilance,  unity  of  action, 
and  firmness. 

The  dangers  to  which  a rear-guard  is  subjected  are  gener- 
ally in  direct  proportion  to  the  greater  or  less  degree  of  order 
observed  in  the  column  which  it  protects. 


LIGHT  CAVALRY  AND  INFANTRY  ACTING  TOGETHER 

If,  on  reconnaissance,  advance  or  rear-guard,  a body  of  infantry 
falls  temporarily  under  the  command  of  a cavalry  officer,  he  must 
take  the  greatest  care  of  it  and  regard  it  as  his  duty  to  spare 
it  more  than  his  own  mounted  troops. 

In  bivouac  the  cavalry  should  share  like  brothers  with  the 
infantry.  In  battle  they  should  support  it,  and  never  abandon 
it.  If  the  country  becomes  open,  let  the  cavalry  hold  the  first 
line;  if  it  becomes  close,  the  infantry  should  be  nearer  the  enemy, 
and  the  cavalry  should  watch  its  flanks,  to  prevent  its  being  cut 
off,  and  its  rear,  so  that  in  case  of  repulse  the  infantry  may  find 
a prompt  and  vigorous  support. 

If,  while  on  rear-guard  duly,  these  mixed  troops  should  be 
attacked  by  very  surperior  forces  and  compelled,  as  a matter  of 
prudence,  to  leave  the  direct  route  and  take  a less  open  one, 
on  which  the  defence  may  have  greater  chances  of  success,  the 
cavalry  should  consult,  in  advance,  the  convenience  of  the  infantry, 
and  regulate  its  gait  by  the  march  and  strength  of  the  latter. 

The  cavalry  officer  should  keep  his  infantry  on  the  side  where 
the  country  is  broken  and  interspersed  with  hedges,  copses,  vine- 
yards, and  hills. 

If  a foot  soldier  Is  wounded  let  a trooper  give  him  his  horse, 
and  take  his  musket,  until  another  horse,  or  a farm  wagon,  can 
be  obtained  for  the  transport  of  the  wounded  man. 

When  the  command  halts  for  the  night,  the  bivouac  should  be 
chosen  so  as  to  shelter  the  infantry  and  protect  it  from  surprise 
by  the  enemy's  cavalry.  In  this  bivouac  there  should  be  no  vedettes, 
but  only  Infantry  sentinels  and  continuous  cavalry  patrols. 

With  the  advance-guard,  the  infantry  should  be  kept  out  of 
sight  and  shown  only  at  the  proper  time.  The  unexpected  appear- 
ance of  the  infantry  will  produce  a powerful  effect  on  the  enemy, 
especially  if  his  force  consists  of  cavalry  only. 

An  excellent  way  of  disclosing  the  presence  of  infantry  is  to 
place  It  In  ambush,  then  lead  the  enemy’s  cavalry  In  mass  upon 
it.  A quarry,  a copse  in  the  open  country,  a garden  wall  at  the 
entrance  to  a village  are  all  excellent  places  for  conoealing  troops, 
especially  if  the  infantry,  desirous  of  performing  its  duty,  keeps 
silent,  lowers  its  arms,  removes  its  head-dresses,  creeps  and  crawls 
— in  fact,  employs  every  means  to  conceal  its  presence  until  the 
arrival  of  the  time  for  it  to  show  itself  and  act. 

Our  cavalry  should  not  hesitate  to  pass  by  the  ambush,  bul 
should  reform  quickly  and,  with  sabre  in  hand,  charge  back  vigor- 
ously and  thoroughly  after  the  infantry  has  fired  its  point-blank 
volley.  If  it  takes  advantage  of  the  enemy's  surprise,  it  will 
send  him  flying.  If,  in  this  affair,  it  does  not  succeed  In  cutting 
the  enemy  in  pieces,  it  will,  at  least,  teach  him  to  be  more  careful 
the  morale  will  rest  with  the  victors,  and  it  may  be  presumec 
that  the  enemy  will  take  no  more  chances  with  these  same  troops 


104 


LIGHT  CAVALRY  AND  INFANTRY 


If  you  manoeuvre  with  the  infantry  be  careful  to  avoid  masking 
their  fire  so  as  to  hamper  or  paralyze  their  action. 

Suppose  that  your  detachment  is  composed  of  one  battalion 
and  four  squadrons,  and  that  you  are  compelled  to  retreat  across 
an  open  plain.  Put  the  infantry  in  the  centre  in  echelons  of 
half  battalions.  On  the  right  and  left  place  a squadron  in 
column  of  platoons,  and  keep  the  other  two  squadrons  united 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line. 

The  infantry  will  be  able  to  give  full  effect  to  its  fire.  If 
i threatened,  its  two  lines  will  form  squares  in  echelon.  Your 
squadrons  on  the  wings  will  be  like  the  arms  of  this  body,  acting 
together  as  one  man.  The  central  position  of  the  reserve  squadrons 
' will  enable  them  to  reach,  in  a few  seconds,  any  point  threatened 
by  the  enemy. 

As  soon  as  the  ground  becomes  broken,  so  as  to  afford  good 
, positions  for  the  infantry,  the  square  farthest  from  the  enemy  will 
take  up  one  of  them,  occupy  the  line,  and  increase  its  fire  in 
jrder  to  protect  the  other,  which  will  pass  beyond  their  position 
• bnd  echelon  itself,  in  turn,  in  rear,  leaving  the  second  half  battalion 
as  rear-guard.  If  the  squadrons  on  the  wings  have  suffered,  they 
will  be  relieved  by  the  central  squadrons,  whose  place  they  will 
take. 

If  the  command  is  not  to  halt,  the  position  will  be  held  for  a 
short  time  only,  and  the  retreat  will  continue  in  the  same  manner. 
If  the  road  is  bordered  on  one  side  by  vineyards,  woods,  hedges, 
ditches,  etc.,  and  on  the  other  by  open  ground,  the  cavalry  will 
retreat,  in  echelon,  by  the  road  or  in  the  open  ground,  and  the 
infantry  will  retreat,  in  the  same  formation,  under  the  protection 
of  the  natural  obstacles  of  the  ground. 
j Should  the  enemy,  with  superior  forces,  push  our  retreat  vigor- 
ously, when  night  comes  the  infantry  will  remain  in  our  bivouacs 
for  a few  hours  only,  to  obtain  absolutely  needed  rest;  then  it 
will  move  on  quietly,  while  our  cavalry,  of  whom  one  half  will 
keep  their  horses  bridled,  will  keep  up  the  fires  to  deceive  the 
enemy,  and  will  slowly  retreat  only  an  hour  before  sunrise. 

If  the  confidence  and  determination  shown  by  the  enemy  lead 
us  to  fear  that  he  may  take  advantage  of  the  night  to  arrange 
'ambuscades  along  the  road  we  are  to  follow  in  the  morning,  we 
should  thwart  his  designs  by  silently  leaving  our  bivouacs  as 
soon  as  the  fires  have  been  lighted,  either  to  take  up  a new 
position  much  farther  to  the  rear  and  out  of  danger,  or  by  leaving 
the  road  and  turning  off  to  the  right  or  left,  in  a direction  which 
the  enemy  could  not  possibly  anticipate  our  choosing. 


■ 


/ 


357.18 

B797P 


